GLSOperator's Manual

Order no. P166 0188 13 Part no. 1665844305 Edition A 2017

É1665844305dËÍ1665844305

GLSO

perat

or'sM

anual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and about Daimler AG can be found on thefollowing websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-gestions youmay have regarding this Operator'sManual to the technical documentation team atthe following address:Customer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLC3 Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated orotherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-out written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-tooth SIG Inc.RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg-istered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-son Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarksof Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of HarmanInternational Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-cle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in successionindicate an instruction with severalsteps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells youwhere you can findmore information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on the nextpage.

Dis‐play This text indicates a message on themultifunction display/multimedia dis-play.

As at 28.09.2015

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-cle before driving. For your own safety and alonger vehicle life, follow the instructions andwarning notices in this Operator's Manual.Ignoring them could result in damage to thevehicle or personal injury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right tointroduce changes in the following areas:RDesignREquipmentRTechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:RDigital Operator's ManualRPrinted Operator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.Your Operator's Manual:

Digital form inside the vehicleThe Digital Operator's Manual providescomprehensive and specifically adaptedinformation on your vehicle's equipmentand multimedia system. It contains infor-mative animations, individual languagesettings and an intuitive search function.Booklet inside the vehicleIn addition to this manual and the afore-mentioned digital media, you also have theoption to obtain a comprehensive printedversion of the Supplement for your multi-media system from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Digital form via the InternetTheOperator'sManual on the Internet pro-vides easy access to all informationregarding your vehicle andmultimedia sys-tem. It also provides helpful animations,interesting background information and awide array of search options.Digital form as an AppUsing the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, youcan view all the information on your vehicleandmultimedia system via mobile Internetor download it independently of networkaccess. Available for smartphones or tab-lets.

You can also use the Mercedes-Benz GuidesApp:

Please note that theMercedes-Benz Guides Appmay not yet be available in your country.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

1665844305 É1665844305dËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 25Protecting the environment ................... 25Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 25Operator's Manual ................................. 26Service and vehicle operation ................ 26Operating safety .................................... 28QR codes for the rescue card ................ 30Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 30Information on copyright ....................... 32

At a glance ........................................... 33Cockpit .................................................. 33Instrument cluster ................................. 34Multifunction steering wheel ................. 35Center console ...................................... 36Overhead control panel ......................... 39Door control panel ................................. 40

Safety ................................................... 41Panic alarm ............................................ 41Occupant safety .................................... 41Children in the vehicle ........................... 57Pets in the vehicle ................................. 62Driving safety systems ........................... 63Protection against theft ......................... 72

Opening and closing ........................... 74SmartKey ............................................... 74Doors ..................................................... 80Cargo compartment ............................... 81Side windows ......................................... 85Sliding sunroof ....................................... 89

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 94Correct driver's seat position ................ 94Seats ..................................................... 94Steering wheel ..................................... 105Mirrors ................................................. 107Memory function ................................. 110

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 112Exterior lighting ................................... 112

Interior lighting .................................... 116Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LEDheadlamps) .......................................... 117Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halo-gen headlamps) ................................... 117Windshield wipers ................................ 119

Climate control ................................. 123Overview of climate control systems ... 123Operating the climate control sys-tems .................................................... 129Setting the air vents ............................ 134

Driving and parking .......................... 137Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 137Driving ................................................. 137DYNAMIC SELECT controller ............... 145Automatic transmission ....................... 146Refueling ............................................. 153Parking ................................................ 159Driving tips .......................................... 162Driving systems ................................... 172Towing a trailer .................................... 221

On-board computer and displays .... 229Important safety notes ........................ 229Displays and operation ........................ 229Menus and submenus ......................... 232Display messages ................................ 243Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................... 274

Multimedia system ........................... 287General notes ...................................... 287Important safety notes ........................ 287Function restrictions ............................ 287Operating system ................................ 288

Stowage and features ...................... 294Stowage areas ..................................... 294Features .............................................. 302

Maintenance and care ...................... 319Engine compartment ........................... 319ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 323

2 Contents

Care ..................................................... 324

Breakdown assistance ..................... 331Where will I find...? .............................. 331Flat tire ................................................ 331Battery (vehicle) .................................. 336Jump-starting ....................................... 338Towing and tow-starting ...................... 341Fuses ................................................... 343

Wheels and tires ............................... 346Important safety notes ........................ 346Operation ............................................ 346Winter operation .................................. 348Tire pressure ....................................... 349Loading the vehicle .............................. 356All about wheels and tires ................... 359Changing a wheel ................................ 366Wheel and tire combinations ............... 371Emergency spare wheel ....................... 372

Technical data ................................... 376Information regarding technical data ... 376Vehicle electronics .............................. 376Identification plates ............................. 377Service products and filling capaci-ties ...................................................... 378Vehicle data ......................................... 384Vehicle data for off-road driving .......... 385Trailer tow hitch ................................... 387

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 21512 V socket

see Sockets115 V socket ...................................... 307360° camera

Cleaning ......................................... 328Display in the multimedia system .. 202Function/notes ............................. 201

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 245Function/notes ................................ 63Important safety notes .................... 63Warning lamp ................................. 277

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 56

Activating media modeGeneral notes ................................ 292

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 130Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 238Display message ............................ 265Function/information .................... 210Trailer towing ................................. 213

Active Brake AssistActivating or deactivating .............. 237Display message ............................ 250Function/notes ................................ 64

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

Activating or deactivating .............. 237Display message ............................ 251Function/notes ................................ 69Important safety notes .................... 70Warning lamp ................................. 285

Active Curve SystemDisplay message ............................ 262

Function/notes ............................. 187Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 238Display message ............................ 264Function/information .................... 213Trailer towing ................................. 215

Active light function ......................... 114ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 69Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 65Adaptive Damping System

Function/notes ............................. 189Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 257Function/notes ............................. 115Switching on/off ........................... 116

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 382Address book

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

Adjusting the volumeAudio 20 ........................................ 288COMAND ....................................... 288

ADS (Adaptive Damping System)Function/notes ............................. 186

Air bagsDeployment ..................................... 53Display message ............................ 254Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 47Important safety notes .................... 46Introduction ..................................... 46Knee bag .......................................... 47Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 48PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 42Side impact air bag .......................... 48Window curtain air bag .................... 48

Air filter (display message) .............. 260AIR FLOW ........................................... 130Air vents

Glove box ....................................... 135Important safety notes .................. 134Rear ............................................... 135Setting ........................................... 134

4 Index

Setting the center air vents ........... 134Setting the side air vents ............... 135

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AIRMATIC packageADS (Adaptive Damping System) ... 186Function/notes ............................. 186

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 72Switching off (ATA) .......................... 72Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 72

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

AMGAdaptive sport suspension sys-tem ................................................ 189

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 241Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Approach/departure angle .............. 171Ashtray ............................................... 305Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 237Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 236ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 323Hiding a service message .............. 323Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 323Service message ............................ 323Special service requirements ......... 323

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 72Function ........................................... 72Switching off the alarm .................... 72

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 237Display message ............................ 261Function/notes ............................. 205

Audio 20Switching on/off ........................... 288

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 234

Audio systemsee separate operating instructions

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 256see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 324Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 143Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 142Automatic headlamp mode .............. 112Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 149Changing gear ............................... 149DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 146Display message ............................ 270Drive program ................................ 149Drive program display .................... 148Driving tips .................................... 149DYNAMIC SELECT controller ......... 145Emergency running mode .............. 153Engaging drive position .................. 148Engaging neutral ............................ 147Engaging park position automati-cally ............................................... 147Engaging reverse gear ................... 147Engaging the park position ............ 146Kickdown ....................................... 149Manual shifting .............................. 150Oil temperature (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 241Overview ........................................ 146Problem (malfunction) ................... 153Pulling away ................................... 141Starting the engine ........................ 140Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 150Trailer towing ................................. 149Transmission position display ........ 148Transmission positions .................. 148

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 153AUX jacks

CD/DVD drive ............................... 293

Index 5

Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-ing) ...................................................... 387

BBack button ....................................... 288Bag hook ............................................ 299Ball coupling

Installing ........................................ 223Removing ....................................... 227

BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 64Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 77Important safety notes .................... 77Replacing ......................................... 77

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 338Display message ............................ 258Important safety notes .................. 336Jump starting ................................. 338Overview ........................................ 336

Beltsee Seat belts

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 238Display message ............................ 265Notes/function .............................. 207Trailer towing ................................. 209see Active Blind Spot Assist

Blootooth®Connecting a different mobilephone ............................................ 292

BlueTECAdding DEF .................................... 156

BlueTEC (DEF) .................................... 381Bluetooth®

Searching for a mobile phone ........ 291see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287Telephony ...................................... 290

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 250Notes ............................................. 382

Brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake lampsDisplay message ............................ 256

BrakesABS .................................................. 63Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 65BAS .................................................. 64Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 382Display message ............................ 245High-performance brake system .... 166Hill start assist ............................... 141Important safety notes .................. 164Maintenance .................................. 165Parking brake ................................ 160Riding tips ...................................... 164Warning lamp ................................. 276

BreakdownWhere will I find...? ........................ 331see Flat tiresee Towing away

Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 34Bulbs

see Replacing bulbs

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 26

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Carsee Vehicle

Care360° camera ................................. 328Car wash ........................................ 324Carpets .......................................... 330Display ........................................... 329Exhaust pipe .................................. 328Exterior lights ................................ 327Gear or selector lever .................... 329Interior ........................................... 329Matte finish ................................... 326Notes ............................................. 324Paint .............................................. 326Plastic trim .................................... 329Power washer ................................ 325Rear view camera .......................... 328

6 Index

Roof lining ...................................... 330Seat belt ........................................ 330Seat cover ..................................... 330Sensors ......................................... 328Side running board ........................ 327Steering wheel ............................... 329Trim pieces .................................... 330Washing by hand ........................... 325Wheels ........................................... 326Windows ........................................ 327Wiper blades .................................. 327Wooden trim .................................. 330

Cargo compartment coverNotes/how to use ......................... 300

Cargo compartment enlargementImportant safety notes .................. 297

Cargo compartment floorImportant safety notes .................. 301Opening/closing ............................ 301Stowage well (under) ..................... 301

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 299CD

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

CD player (on-board computer) ........ 235Center console

Lower section .................................. 37Upper section .................................. 36

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 239Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 74

ChildRestraint system .............................. 58

Child seatForward-facing restraint system ...... 61LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 59On the front-passenger seat ............ 61Rearward-facing restraint system .... 61Top Tether ....................................... 60

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 61Rear doors ....................................... 62

ChildrenSpecial seat belt retractor ............... 57

Cigarette lighter ................................ 306

CleaningMirror turn signal ........................... 327Trailer tow hitch ............................. 329

Climate control3-zone automatic climate controlwith additional rear-compartmentclimate control ............................... 127Automatic climate control (3-zone) .............................................. 125Controlling automatically ............... 130Cooling with air dehumidification .. 130Defrosting the windows ................. 132Defrosting the windshield .............. 132Dual-zone automatic climate con-trol ................................................. 123General notes ................................ 123Indicator lamp ................................ 130Ionization ....................................... 134Maximum cooling .......................... 132Notes on using the automatic cli-mate control .................................. 129Overview of systems ...................... 123Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 133Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 130Rear control panel ......................... 125Rear control panel (3-zone auto-matic climate control with addi-tional rear-compartment climatecontrol) .......................................... 127Refrigerant ..................................... 383Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 384Setting the air distribution ............. 131Setting the air vents ...................... 134Setting the airflow ......................... 131Setting the climate mode (AIRFLOW) ............................................ 130Setting the temperature ................ 131Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 133Switching on/off ........................... 129Switching residual heat on/off ...... 133Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 133Switching the ZONE functionon/off ............................................ 132

Coat hooks ......................................... 300

Index 7

CockpitOverview .......................................... 33see Instrument cluster

Collapsible spare wheelInflating ......................................... 374see Emergency spare wheel

COMANDDriving dynamics display ............... 221Switching on/off ........................... 288

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 329

Combination switch .......................... 113Connecting a USB device

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 232Controller ........................................... 288Convenience closing feature .............. 87Convenience opening feature ............ 87Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 322Display message ............................ 257Filling capacity ............................... 383Important safety notes .................. 382Temperature (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 241Temperature gauge ........................ 230Warning lamp ................................. 283

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 32Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 256Crash-responsive emergency light-ing ....................................................... 117Crosswind Assist ................................. 69Crosswind driving assistance ............ 69Cruise control

Activating ....................................... 173Activation conditions ..................... 173Cruise control lever ....................... 172Deactivating ................................... 173Display message ............................ 267Driving system ............................... 172Function/notes ............................. 172Important safety notes .................. 172

Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 173

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 303Important safety notes .................. 302Rear compartment ......................... 303Temperature controlled ................. 303Third row of seats .......................... 304

Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 29Customer Relations Department ....... 29

DData

see Technical dataData carrier

Selecting ........................................ 235Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 256Function/notes ............................. 112Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 239

Declarations of conformity ................. 28DEF

Adding ........................................... 156Display message ............................ 260Filling capacity ............................... 381Important safety notes .................. 381

Diagnostics connection ...................... 29Differential lock (display mes-sage) ................................................... 263Digital speedometer ......................... 233DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 146Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 323Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 244Driving systems ............................. 261Engine ............................................ 257General notes ................................ 243Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 243KEYLESS-GO .................................. 273Lights ............................................. 256Safety systems .............................. 245SmartKey ....................................... 273Tires ............................................... 268Vehicle ........................................... 270

8 Index

Distance Pilot DISTRONICActivating ....................................... 176Activation conditions ..................... 176Cruise control lever ....................... 175Display Message ............................ 266Displays in the instrument cluster .. 179Driving tips .................................... 180Function/notes ............................. 174Important safety notes .................. 174Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 178Stopping ........................................ 177Switching off .................................. 178Warning lamp ................................. 285

Distance recordersee Odometersee Trip odometer

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 285Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 65Warning lamp ................................. 285

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 239Automatic locking (switch) ............... 81Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 74Control panel ................................... 40Display message ............................ 272Emergency locking ........................... 81Emergency unlocking ....................... 81Important safety notes .................... 80Opening (from inside) ...................... 80Overview .......................................... 80Power closing .................................. 81

Drinking and driving ......................... 163Drive program

Automatic transmission ................. 149Off-Road program (vehicles with-out Off-Road Engineering pack-age) ............................................... 217Off-road programs (vehicles withOff-Road Engineering package) ...... 218SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 241

Drive programsDisplay (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 148

Driver's doorsee Doors

DrivingImportant safety notes .................. 137

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 324

Driving Assistance PLUS package ... 210Driving in mountainous terrain

Approach/departure angle ............ 171Driving lamps

see Daytime running lampsDriving off-road

see Off-road drivingDriving safety system

Active Brake Assist .......................... 64Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 63Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function ................................. 69ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 69Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 65BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 64Distance warning function ............... 65EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 69ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 66Important safety information ........... 63Overview .......................................... 63STEER CONTROL ............................. 72

Driving systemAIRMATIC package ........................ 186Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 174Distance Pilot DISTRONIC withSteering Pilot ................................. 180Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 190Parking Pilot .................................. 193

Driving systems360°camera .................................. 201Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 210Active Curve System ...................... 187Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 213ADS ............................................... 186AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 189ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 205Blind Spot Assist ............................ 207Cruise control ................................ 172Display message ............................ 261Driving Assistance Plus package ... 210

Index 9

HOLD function ............................... 185Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 209Level control (vehicle with the Off-Road Engineering package) ........... 182Rear view camera .......................... 197Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 206

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 149Brakes ........................................... 164Break-in period .............................. 137Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 180Downhill gradient ........................... 164Drinking and driving ....................... 163Driving in winter ............................. 167Driving on flooded roads ................ 166Driving on sand .............................. 170Driving on wet roads ...................... 166Driving over obstacles ................... 170Exhaust check ............................... 163Fuel ................................................ 162General .......................................... 162Hydroplaning ................................. 166Icy road surfaces ........................... 167Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 165Off-road driving .............................. 168Off-road fording ............................. 167Snow chains .................................. 348The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 137Tire ruts ......................................... 170Towing a trailer .............................. 222Traveling uphill ............................... 171Wet road surface ........................... 165

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)Display message ............................ 263Function/notes ............................. 216

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 235see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

DYNAMIC SELECT controllerAutomatic transmission ................. 145

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 240Function/notes ............................. 106

EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ........................... 107Function/notes ............................. 106Switching on/off ........................... 240

EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 247Function/notes ................................ 69

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 163On-board computer ....................... 232

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 143Automatic engine switch-off .......... 142Deactivating/activating ................. 143General information ....................... 142Important safety notes .................. 142Introduction ................................... 142

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 56

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 81Vehicle ............................................. 81

Emergency spare wheelGeneral notes ................................ 372Important safety notes .................. 372Removing ....................................... 373Storage location ............................ 373Stowing .......................................... 373

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 53

Emergency unlockingTailgate ............................................ 85

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 26

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 283Display message ............................ 257ECO start/stop function ................ 142Engine number ............................... 378Irregular running ............................ 144Jump-starting ................................. 338Starting (important safety notes) ... 139Starting problems .......................... 144

10 Index

Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 140Starting via smartphone ................ 140Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 140Switching off .................................. 160Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 343

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 144

Engine jump startingsee Jump starting (engine)

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 321Additives ........................................ 382Checking the oil level ..................... 320Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 321Display message ............................ 259Filling capacity ............................... 382Notes about oil grades ................... 381Notes on oil level/consumption .... 320Temperature (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 241

Engine switch-offsee ECO start/stop function

Entering an addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 241Characteristics ................................. 67Deactivating/activating ................... 67Display message ............................ 245Function/notes ................................ 66General notes .................................. 66Important safety information ........... 67Trailer stabilization ........................... 68Warning lamp ................................. 279

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 66Exhaust check ................................... 163Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 328Exterior lighting

see LightsExterior mirrors

Adjusting ....................................... 107

Dipping (automatic) ....................... 109Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 240Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 108Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 108Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 109Setting ........................................... 108Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 110Storing the parking position .......... 109

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 296

FFavorites

Overview ........................................ 289Filler cap

see RefuelingFlat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 332Preparing the vehicle ..................... 331TIREFIT kit ...................................... 333see Emergency spare wheel

Floormats ........................................... 318Fog lamps (extended range) ............. 115Folding the rear bench seat for-wards/back ....................................... 297Fording

Off-road ......................................... 167On flooded roads ........................... 166

FrequenciesMobile phone ................................. 376Two-way radio ................................ 376

FuelAdditives ........................................ 380Consumption statistics .................. 232Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 233Displaying the range ...................... 233Driving tips .................................... 162Fuel gauge ....................................... 34Grade (gasoline) ............................ 379Important safety notes .................. 379Low outside temperatures ............. 380Problem (malfunction) ................... 156Quality (diesel) ............................... 380Refueling ........................................ 153Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 379

Index 11

Fuel filler flapOpening ......................................... 155

Fuel filter (display message) ............ 260Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 233

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 379Problem (malfunction) ................... 156

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 343Before changing ............................. 344Dashboard fuse box ....................... 344Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 344Fuse box under rear bench seat .... 345Important safety notes .................. 343

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 318General notes ................................ 315Important safety notes .................. 315Opening/closing the garage door .. 317Problems when programming ........ 317Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 316Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 316

Gear indicator (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 241Genuine parts ...................................... 25Glove box ........................................... 295Google™ Local Search

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defini-tion) .................................................... 365

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHazard warning lamps ...................... 114Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 96Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 97Adjusting (manually) ........................ 96

Adjusting (rear) ................................ 97Installing/removing (rear) ................ 98Luxury .............................................. 97

HeadlampsFogging up ..................................... 116see Automatic headlamp mode

Heatingsee Climate control

High beam flasher ............................. 113High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 115Display message ............................ 256Replacing bulbs ............................. 119Switching on/off ........................... 113

Highway mode ................................... 114Hill start assist .................................. 141HOLD function

Deactivating ................................... 185Display message ............................ 264Function/notes ............................. 185

Home addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

HoodClosing ........................................... 320Display message ............................ 272Important safety notes .................. 319Opening ......................................... 319

Horn ...................................................... 33Hydroplaning ..................................... 166

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 72Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lampsIndicators

see Turn signalsInsect protection on the radiator .... 320Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 34Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 229Intelligent Light System

Activating/deactivating ................. 239Overview ........................................ 114

12 Index

Interior lightingAutomatic control .......................... 117Emergency lighting ........................ 117General notes ................................ 117Manual control ............................... 116Overview ........................................ 116Reading lamp ................................. 116

iPod®see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

JJack

Storage location ............................ 331Using ............................................. 368

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 338

KKey positions

KEYLESS-GO .................................. 138SmartKey ....................................... 138

KEYLESS-GOActivating ......................................... 75Convenience closing feature ............ 88Deactivation ..................................... 75Display message ............................ 273Locking ............................................ 75Removing the Start/Stop button ... 139Start function ................................... 76Start/Stop button .......................... 138Starting the engine ........................ 140Unlocking ......................................... 75

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 149Manual gearshifting ....................... 152

Knee bag .............................................. 47

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 238Display message ............................ 264Function/information .................... 209see Active Lane Keeping Assist

Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 241

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 59Level control

AIRMATIC ...................................... 188Level control (display message) ...... 261Level control (vehicle with the Off-Road Engineering package)

Basic settings ................................ 182Function/notes ............................. 182Important safety notes .................. 182

License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 256Light function, active

Display message ............................ 256Light sensor (display message) ....... 256Lights

Activating/deactivating the Intel-ligent Light System ........................ 239Active light function ....................... 114Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 115Automatic headlamp mode ............ 112Fog lamps (extended) .................... 115Hazard warning lamps ................... 114High beam flasher .......................... 113High-beam headlamps ................... 113Highway mode ............................... 114Light switch ................................... 112Low-beam headlamps .................... 113Off-road lights ................................ 115Parking lamps ................................ 113Rear fog lamp ................................ 113Standing lamps .............................. 113Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 239Turn signals ................................... 113see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

Loading guidelines ............................ 294Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 81Emergency locking ........................... 81From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 80

Index 13

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 239LOW RANGE

Display message ............................ 263Off-road gear ................................. 219

LOW RANGE off-road gear ................ 219Low-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 256Replacing bulbs ............................. 118Switching on/off ........................... 113

Lumbar supportAdjusting (on the seat) .................. 103

Luxury head restraints ....................... 97

MM+S tires ............................................ 348Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 326mbrace

Call priority .................................... 311Display message ............................ 250Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 312Downloading routes ....................... 314Emergency call .............................. 309General notes ................................ 308Geo fencing ................................... 315Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 313MB info call button ........................ 311Remote fault diagnosis .................. 313Remote vehicle locking .................. 313Roadside Assistance button .......... 310Search & Send ............................... 312Self-test ......................................... 309Speed alert .................................... 314System .......................................... 308Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 315Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 313

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 76General notes .................................. 76Inserting .......................................... 76Locking vehicle ................................ 81

Removing ......................................... 76Unlocking the driver's door .............. 81

Media InterfaceUSB port in the armrest of thecenter console ............................... 295see Digital Operator's Manual

Memory card (audio) ......................... 235Memory function ............................... 110Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive

360°camera .................................. 201Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 210Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 213ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 205Blind Spot Assist ............................ 207Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 174Distance Pilot DISTRONIC withSteering Pilot ................................. 180General notes ................................ 172Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 209Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .......... 190Parking Pilot .................................. 193PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 56Rear view camera .......................... 197Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 206

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 244Mirror

Vanity mirror (sun visor) ................ 304Mirror turn signal

Cleaning ......................................... 327Mirrors

see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneConnecting (Bluetooth® inter-face) .............................................. 290Connecting another mobilephone ............................................ 292Frequencies ................................... 376Installation ..................................... 376Menu (on-board computer) ............ 235Transmission output (maximum) .... 376

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 76MOExtended tires .............................. 332

14 Index

Mounting wheelsLowering the vehicle ...................... 370Mounting a new wheel ................... 369Preparing the vehicle ..................... 367Raising the vehicle ......................... 368Removing a wheel .......................... 369Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 367

MP3Operation ....................................... 235see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287see separate operating instructions

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 231Permanent display ......................... 238

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 230Overview .......................................... 35

Multimedia systemsee Separate operating instructions

Music filessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 233see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287see separate operating instructions

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 137

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 49Faults ............................................... 52Operation ......................................... 49System self-test ............................... 51

Occupant safetyAir bags ........................................... 46Automaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 56Children in the vehicle ..................... 57Important safety notes .................... 41

Introduction to the restraint sys-tem .................................................. 41Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 48PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 42Pets in the vehicle ........................... 62PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 55PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 56Restraint system warning lamp ........ 42Seat belt .......................................... 42

OCSConditions ....................................... 49Faults ............................................... 52Operation ......................................... 49System self-test ............................... 51

Odometer ........................................... 232Off-road driving

Approach/departure angle ............ 386Checklist after driving off-road ...... 169Checklist before driving off-road .... 169Fording depth ................................ 385General information ....................... 168Important safety notes .................. 168Maximum gradient climbing abil-ity .................................................. 386Traveling uphill ............................... 171

Off-road lights .................................... 115Off-Road program (vehicles with-out Off-Road Engineering package)

Function/notes ............................. 217Off-road programs (vehicles withOff-Road Engineering package)

Function/notes ............................. 218Off-road drive program .................. 218Offroad Plus drive program ............ 218

Off-road programs (vehicles withthe Off-Road Engineering package)

Displays in the COMAND display ... 221Off-road system

4MATIC .......................................... 215DSR ............................................... 216LOW RANGE off-road gear ............. 219Off-road 4ETS .................................. 67Off-road ABS .................................... 64

Index 15

Off-road ESP® .................................. 68Off-road programs (vehicles withOff-Road Engineering package) ...... 218

Oilsee Engine oil

On and Offroad menu (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 241On-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 241Assistance menu ........................... 236Audio menu ................................... 234Convenience submenu .................. 240Display messages .......................... 243Displaying a service message ........ 323Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 179Factory settings submenu ............. 240Important safety notes .................. 229Instrument cluster submenu .......... 238Lighting submenu .......................... 239Menu overview .............................. 232Message memory .......................... 244Navigation menu ............................ 233On and Offroad menu .................... 241Operation ....................................... 230RACETIMER ................................... 241Settings menu ............................... 238Standard display ............................ 232Telephone menu ............................ 235Trip menu ...................................... 232Vehicle submenu ........................... 239Video DVD operation ..................... 235

Operating safetyDeclaration of conformity ................ 28Important safety notes .................... 28

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Operator's ManualOverview .......................................... 26Vehicle equipment ........................... 26

Outside temperature display ........... 229Overhead control panel ...................... 39Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 62

PPaddle shifters

see Steering wheel paddle shifters

Paint code number ............................ 377Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 326Panic alarm .......................................... 41Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Important safety notes .................... 89Opening/closing the roller sun-blind ................................................. 92Operating ......................................... 91Operating the roller sunblinds forthe sliding sunroof ........................... 91Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92Reversing feature ............................. 90

ParkingImportant safety notes .................. 159Parking brake ................................ 160Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 109Rear view camera .......................... 197see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidParking Pilot .................................. 193see 360° camerasee Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 192Driving system ............................... 190Function/notes ............................. 190Important safety notes .................. 190Problems (malfunctions) ................ 193Sensor range ................................. 191Towing a trailer .............................. 190Warning display ............................. 192

Parking brakeApplying automatically ................... 161Applying or releasing manually ...... 161Display message ............................ 247Electric parking brake .................... 160Emergency braking ........................ 162General notes ................................ 160Releasing automatically ................. 161Warning lamp ................................. 282

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 113

Parking PilotDisplay Message ............................ 265Exiting a parking space .................. 196

16 Index

Function/notes ............................. 193Important safety notes .................. 193Parking .......................................... 195

PASSENGER AIR BAGDisplay message ............................ 254Indicator lamps ................................ 42Problem (malfunction) ................... 254

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 62Phone book

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 329Power locks ......................................... 81Power washers .................................. 325Power windows

see Side windowsPRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 251Operation ......................................... 55

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS)

Display message ............................ 251Operation ......................................... 56

Protection against theftATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 72Immobilizer ...................................... 72

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 25

Pulling awayAutomatic transmission ................. 141General notes ................................ 141Hill start assist ............................... 141Trailer ............................................ 141

QQR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1Rescue card ..................................... 30

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 29

RRACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 241Radiator cover ................................... 320

RadioSelecting a station ......................... 234see separate operating instructions

Radio modesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 28Reading lamp ..................................... 116Rear bench seat

Folding forwards/back .................. 298Rear compartment

Exit/entry position (3rd row ofseats) ............................................. 100Setting the air vents ...................... 135Setting the temperature ................ 131

Rear fog lampDisplay message ............................ 256Switching on/off ........................... 113

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemAUX jacks ...................................... 293AUX jacks CD/DVD drive .............. 293

Rear seatsAdjusting ......................................... 98Display message ............................ 272

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 328Display in the multimedia system .. 198Function/notes ............................. 197Switching on/off ........................... 198

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 133Switching on/off ........................... 133

Rear window wiperReplacing the wiper blade .............. 121Switching on/off ........................... 120

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 107Dipping (automatic) ....................... 109

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 383Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 34Important safety notes .................. 153Refueling process .......................... 154see Fuel

Index 17

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 315Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 316

Replacing bulbsGeneral notes ................................ 117High-beam headlamps ................... 119Important safety notes .................. 117Installing/removing the cover(front wheel arch) .......................... 118Low-beam headlamps .................... 118Overview of bulb types .................. 118Turn signals (front) ......................... 119

Reporting safety defects .................... 30Rescue card ......................................... 30Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 259Warning lamp ................................. 283

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 133Restraint system

Display message ............................ 252Introduction ..................................... 41Warning lamp ................................. 282Warning lamp (function) ................... 42

Reversing featurePanorama sliding sunroof ................ 90Roller sunblinds ............................... 91Side windows ................................... 86Sliding sunroof ................................. 90Tailgate ............................................ 82

Reversing lamps (display mes-sage) ................................................... 256Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 27Roller sunblind

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ..................................... 91Rear side windows ......................... 304

Roof carrier ........................................ 302Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 330Roof load (maximum) ........................ 384Route (navigation)

see Route guidance (navigation)

Route guidancesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

Route guidance (navigation) ............ 233

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 57see Occupant safetysee Operating safety

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

SD cardInserting ........................................ 292Inserting/removing ........................ 292Removing ....................................... 292

SD memory cardsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287Selecting ........................................ 235

Search & Sendsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 45Adjusting the height ......................... 44Cleaning ......................................... 330Correct usage .................................. 44Fastening ......................................... 44Important safety guidelines ............. 43Introduction ..................................... 42Releasing ......................................... 45Switching belt adjustment on/off(on-board computer) ...................... 240Warning lamp ................................. 275Warning lamp (function) ................... 45

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 96Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 103Adjusting the head restraint ............ 96Calling up a stored setting (mem-ory function) .................................. 111Cleaning the cover ......................... 330Correct driver's seat position ........... 94Entry position (3rd row of seats) .... 100

18 Index

Exit position (3rd row of seats) ...... 101Folding down/up (third row ofseats) ............................................... 99Folding the 2nd row of seatsforward electrically ........................ 102Folding the 2nd row of seatsforward manually ........................... 100Folding the rear bench seat for-wards/back ................................... 297Important safety notes .................... 94Overview .......................................... 94Seat heating problem .................... 105Seat ventilation problem ................ 105Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 110Switching seat heating on/off ....... 103Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 104

SectionSliding sunroof ................................. 89

Selector leverCleaning ......................................... 329

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 328Service message

see ASSYST PLUSService products

Brake fluid ..................................... 382Coolant (engine) ............................ 382DEF special additives ..................... 381Engine oil ....................................... 381Fuel ................................................ 379Important safety notes .................. 378Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 383Washer fluid ................................... 383

Setting the air distribution ............... 131Setting the airflow ............................ 131Setting the date/time format

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

Setting the languagesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

Setting the timesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 240On-board computer ....................... 238

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 241Side impact air bag ............................. 48Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 256Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 327Convenience closing feature ............ 87Convenience opening feature .......... 87Hinged side windows ....................... 86Important safety information ........... 85Opening/closing .............................. 86Overview .......................................... 85Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89Resetting ......................................... 88Reversing feature ............................. 86

SIRIUS servicessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

Sliding sunroofImportant safety notes .................... 89Opening/closing .............................. 90Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92Resetting ......................................... 91see Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 77Changing the programming ............. 76Checking the battery ....................... 77Convenience closing feature ............ 88Convenience opening feature .......... 87Display message ............................ 273Door central locking/unlocking ....... 74Important safety notes .................... 74KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 76Loss ................................................. 78Mechanical key ................................ 76Overview .......................................... 74Positions (ignition lock) ................. 138Problem (malfunction) ..................... 78Starting the engine ........................ 140

SmartphoneStarting the engine ........................ 140

SMSsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

Snow chainsInformation .................................... 348

Index 19

SocketsCenter console .............................. 306General notes ................................ 306Luggage compartment ................... 307Rear compartment ......................... 306

SoundSwitching on/off ........................... 288

Special seat belt retractor .................. 57Specialist workshop ............................ 29Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Digital ............................................ 233In the Instrument cluster ................. 34Segments ...................................... 229Selecting the display unit ............... 238

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 256Switching on/off ........................... 113

Start/Stop buttonStarting the engine ........................ 140

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 139STEER CONTROL .................................. 72Steering

Display message ............................ 272Steering Pilot

Activating/deactivating ................. 237Display message ............................ 267

Steering wheelAdjusting (electrically) ................... 106Adjusting (manually) ...................... 105Button overview ............................... 35Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 230Cleaning ......................................... 329Important safety notes .................. 105Steering wheel heating .................. 106Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 110

Steering wheel heatingProblem (malfunction) ................... 106Switching on/off ........................... 106

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 150Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 241Stowage areas ................................... 294

Stowage compartmentsArmrest (under) ............................. 295Center console .............................. 296Center console (rear) ..................... 296Cup holders ................................... 302Eyeglasses compartment ............... 296Glove box ....................................... 295Important safety information ......... 294Stowage net ................................... 296

Stowage net ....................................... 296Summer tires

In winter ........................................ 348Sun visor ............................................ 304Suspension setting

AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 189

Suspension settingsSETUP (on-board computer) .......... 241

SUV(Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 28

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 133Switching on media mode

Via the device list .......................... 292

TTachometer ........................................ 229Tailgate

Display message ............................ 271Emergency unlocking ....................... 85Important safety notes .................... 81Limiting the opening angle ............... 85Opening dimensions ...................... 384Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom inside) ...................................... 84Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom outside) ................................... 83Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 82Power closing .................................. 81

Tanksee Fuel tank

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 34

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 378Information .................................... 376Tires/wheels ................................. 371

20 Index

Trailer loads ................................... 387Vehicle data ................................... 384

TelephoneAccepting a call (multifunctionsteering wheel) .............................. 236Authorizing a mobile phone (con-necting) ......................................... 291Connecting a mobile phone (gen-eral information) ............................ 290Display message ............................ 272Menu (on-board computer) ............ 235Number from the phone book ........ 236Redialing ........................................ 236Rejecting/ending a call ................. 236see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287Switching between mobilephones ........................................... 292

TemperatureCoolant (display in the instrumentcluster) .......................................... 230Coolant (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 241Engine oil (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 241Outside temperature ...................... 229Setting (climate control) ................ 131Transmission oil (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 241

Through-loading feature ................... 297Time

see separate operating instructionsTiming (RACETIMER) ......................... 241Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 353Checking manually ........................ 352Display message ............................ 268Maximum ....................................... 352Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 334Notes ............................................. 351Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 335Recommended ............................... 349

Tire pressure loss warning systemGeneral notes ................................ 352Important safety notes .................. 352Restarting ...................................... 353

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 355Function/notes ............................. 353General notes ................................ 353Important safety notes .................. 354Radio type approval for the tirepressure monitor ........................... 356Restarting ...................................... 355Warning lamp ................................. 286Warning message .......................... 355

TIREFIT kitImportant safety notes .................. 333Storage location ............................ 331Tire pressure not reached .............. 334Tire pressure reached .................... 335Using ............................................. 333

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 365Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 364Bar (definition) ............................... 364Changing a wheel .......................... 366Characteristics .............................. 364Checking ........................................ 346Curb weight (definition) ................. 365Definition of terms ......................... 364Direction of rotation ...................... 367Display message ............................ 268Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 366DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 364DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 363GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 364GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defi-nition) ............................................ 365GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 365GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 365Important safety notes .................. 346Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 364Information on driving .................... 346Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 365

Index 21

Labeling (overview) ........................ 361Load bearing index (definition) ...... 366Load index ..................................... 363Load index (definition) ................... 365M+S tires ....................................... 348Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 365Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 365Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 365Maximum tire load ......................... 363Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 365MOExtended tires .......................... 348Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 366PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 365Replacing ....................................... 366Service life ..................................... 347Sidewall (definition) ....................... 366Snow chains .................................. 348Speed rating (definition) ................ 365Storing ........................................... 367Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 364Summer tires in winter .................. 348Temperature .................................. 360TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 366Tire bead (definition) ...................... 365Tire pressure (definition) ................ 365Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 364Tire size (data) ............................... 371Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 361Tire tread ....................................... 347Tire tread (definition) ..................... 365Total load limit (definition) ............. 366Traction ......................................... 360Traction (definition) ....................... 366Tread wear ..................................... 360TWR (permissible trailer drawbarnoseweight) (definition) ................. 366Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 359Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 364

Wear indicator (definition) ............. 366Wheel and tire combination ........... 371Wheel rim (definition) .................... 364see Flat tire

Toolsee Vehicle tool kit

Top Tether ............................................ 60Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 343Important safety notes .................. 341

Towing a trailerAxle load, permissible .................... 387Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 329Coupling up a trailer ...................... 225Decoupling a trailer ....................... 226Driving tips .................................... 222ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 68Important safety notes .................. 221Installing the ball coupling ............. 223Lights display message .................. 256Mounting dimensions .................... 387Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .......... 190Power supply ................................. 227Pulling away with a trailer .............. 141Removing the ball coupling ............ 227Trailer loads ................................... 387

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 341Installing the towing eye ................ 342Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 343Removing the towing eye ............... 342Transporting the vehicle ................ 343With both axles on the ground ....... 342

Towing eye ......................................... 331Traffic reports

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

Traffic Sign AssistDisplay message ............................ 264Function/notes ............................. 206Important safety notes .................. 206Instrument cluster display ............. 206

Trailer couplingsee Towing a trailer

Trailer loads and drawbar nose-weights ............................................... 227

22 Index

Trailer towingActive Blind Spot Assist ................. 213Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 215Blind Spot Assist ............................ 209Permissible trailer loads anddrawbar noseweights ..................... 227

Transfer case ..................................... 153Transmission

see Automatic transmissionTransmission position display ......... 148Transporting the vehicle .................. 343Traveling uphill

Brow of hill ..................................... 171Driving downhill ............................. 172Maximumgradient-climbing capa-bility ............................................... 171

Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 330Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 232Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 232Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 233

Trunksee Tailgate

Turn signalsDisplay message ............................ 256Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 119Switching on/off ........................... 113

Two-way radioFrequencies ................................... 376Installation ..................................... 376Transmission output (maximum) .... 376

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi-nition) ................................................. 366Type identification plate

see Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 81From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 80

Upshift indicator (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 241

USB devicesConnecting to the Media Inter-face ............................................... 292

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 304Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 29Data acquisition ............................... 30Display message ............................ 270Equipment ....................................... 26Individual settings .......................... 238Limited Warranty ............................. 30Loading .......................................... 356Locking (in an emergency) ............... 81Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 74Lowering ........................................ 370Maintenance .................................... 27Operating safety .............................. 28Parking .......................................... 159Parking for a long period ................ 162Pulling away ................................... 141Raising ........................................... 368Reporting problems ......................... 29Securing from rolling away ............ 367Towing away .................................. 341Transporting .................................. 343Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 81Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 74Vehicle data ................................... 384

Vehicle batterysee Battery (vehicle)

Vehicle data ....................................... 384Vehicle data (off-road driving)

Approach/departure angle ............ 386Fording depth ................................ 385Maximum gradient climbing abil-ity .................................................. 386

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 384Vehicle emergency locking ................ 81Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 377Vehicle level

AIRMATIC ...................................... 188Vehicle level (display message) ....... 261Vehicle tool kit .................................. 331

Index 23

VideoOperating the DVD ......................... 235see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

VIN ...................................................... 377Seat ............................................... 378Type plate ...................................... 377

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 277Brakes ........................................... 276Check Engine ................................. 283Coolant .......................................... 283Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 285Distance warning ........................... 285ESP® .............................................. 279ESP® OFF ....................................... 280Fuel tank ........................................ 283Overview .......................................... 34Parking brake ................................ 282PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 42Reserve fuel ................................... 283Restraint system ............................ 282Seat belt ........................................ 275Tire pressure monitor .................... 286

Warranty .............................................. 26Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 273Weather display (COMAND)

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 287

Wheel and tire combinationsTires ............................................... 371

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 370Wheel chock ...................................... 367Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 366Checking ........................................ 346Cleaning ......................................... 326Emergency spare wheel ................. 372Important safety notes .................. 346Information on driving .................... 346Interchanging/changing ................ 366Mounting a new wheel ................... 369Mounting a wheel .......................... 367Overview ........................................ 346

Removing a wheel .......................... 369Snow chains .................................. 348Storing ........................................... 367Tightening torque ........................... 370Wheel size/tire size ....................... 371

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 253Operation ......................................... 48

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 132

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 322Important safety notes .................. 383

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 122Rear window wiper ........................ 120Replacing the wiper blades ............ 120Switching on/off ........................... 119

Winter drivingSlippery road surfaces ................... 167

Winter operationOverview ........................................ 348Radiator cover ............................... 320

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 348

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 327Replacing ....................................... 120Replacing (rear window) ................ 121Replacing (windshield) ................... 121

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 330Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

ZZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 132

24 Index

Protecting the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions require youto dispose of materials, first try to regenerate orre-use them. Observe the relevant environmen-tal rules and regulations when disposing ofmaterials. In this way you will help to protect theenvironment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audio sys-tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairsor welding. You could impair the operatingefficiency of the restraint systems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels aswell as accessories relevant to safety whichhave not been approved byMercedes-Benz. Thiscould lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant

Introduction 25

Z

systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories thathave been specifically approved for your vehi-cle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz partsshould be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintaina supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts fornecessary service and repair work. In addition,strategically located parts delivery centers pro-vide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification number(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benzparts (Y page 377).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmenti ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may notfeature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase contract documentationfor your vehicle contains a list of all the systemsin your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-let are important documents and should be keptin the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies inaccordance with the warranty terms and condi-tions in the Service and Warranty Informationbooklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordance with the following warranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Islandand Vermont Emission Control System War-rantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessorieswarranties. These are available at any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a reason-able number of repair attempts Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or servicefacilities fail to fix one or more substantialdefects or malfunctions in the vehicle that arecovered by its express warranty.During the period of 18 months from originaldelivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on theodometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or moreof the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction

results in a condition that is likely to cause

26 Introduction

death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle isdriven, that defect or malfunction has beensubject to repair two ormore times, and youhave directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,LLC in writing of the need for its repair.

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunctionof a less serious nature than category (1)has been subject to repair four or moretimes and you have directly notifiedMercedes-Benz in writing of the need for itsrepair.

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describes allthe necessary maintenance work which shouldbe done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Bookletwith you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The serviceadvisor will record every service for you in theService and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram offers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100(Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Programbrochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"section in the Service and Warranty Booklet(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu-ment wallet.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, please sendus the "Notification of Address Change" in theService and Warranty Booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-ing you in a timelymanner should the need arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-ature in the vehicle so that it is available to thenext owner.If you have purchased a used car, please send usthe "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in theService and Warranty Booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaWhen you are abroad with your vehicle, observethe following points:RService facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconverter may not be available. Leaded fuelcan cause damage to the catalytic converter.RThe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane number. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available fordelivery in Europe through our European Deliv-ery Program. For details, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or write to one of thefollowing addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Introduction 27

Z

Sports Utility Vehicle

G WARNINGDue to the high center of gravity, the vehiclemay start to skid and roll over in the event ofan abrupt steering maneuver and/or whenthe vehicle's speed is not adapted to the roadconditions. There is a risk of an accident.Always adapt your speed and driving style tothe vehicle's driving characteristics and to theprevailing road and weather conditions.

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-over rate than other types of vehicles.Failure to operate this vehicle safely may resultin an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severeor fatal injury.In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signif-icantly more likely to die than a person wearinga seat belt.You and all vehicle occupants should alwayswear your seat belts.

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb, speed bumps or a pothole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the underbody orparts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under-body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could bedamaged without the damage being visible.Components damaged in this way can unex-pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, nolonger withstand the strain they are designedto.If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-bustible materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs can gather between the underbody andthe underbody paneling. If these materialscome in contact with hot parts of the exhaustsystem, they can catch fire.In such situations, have the vehicle checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Declarations of conformityUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the two following two conditions: 1)

28 Introduction

These devices may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and 2) These devices must accept anyinterference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation. Changesor modifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) These devices maynot cause interference, and (2) These devicesmust accept any interference, including inter-ference that may cause undesired operation ofthe device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intended forthe connection of diagnostic equipment at aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to a diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of vehicle systems. As a result, theoperating safety of the vehicle could be affec-ted. There is a risk of an accident.Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con-nection in the vehicle, which is approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equipmenton the diagnostics connection is used, thestarter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-

mation being reset, for example. This may leadto the vehicle failing tomeet the requirements ofthe next emissions test during the main inspec-tion.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-fied specialist workshop. It has the necessaryspecialist knowledge, tools and qualifications tocorrectly carry out the work required on yourvehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-evant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.Always have the following work carried out at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when drivingyour vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe vehicle technical dataRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotorvehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-isfaction, please discuss the problem again withtheMercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, con-tact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance Center

Introduction 29

Z

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC3 Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is reproduced as required ofall manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to theNational Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of1966.If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual aboutthe proper operation of your vehicle as well asabout possible vehicle damage. Damage toyour vehicle that arises from culpable contra-ventions against these instructions is not cov-ered either by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-ranty.

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent of an accident, rescue services can usethe QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-cue card for your vehicle. The current rescuecard contains the most important informationabout your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. therouting of the electric cables.You can find more information under http://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/content/asportal/en/communication/informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data storageA wide range of electronic components in yourvehicle contain data memories.These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:Rthe vehicle's operating stateRincidentsRmalfunctionsIn general, this technical information docu-ments the state of a component, a module, asystem or the surroundings.These include, for example:Roperating conditions of system components,e.g. fluid levelsRthe vehicle's statusmessages and those of itsindividual components, e.g. number of wheelrevolutions/speed, deceleration in move-ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedalpositionRmalfunctions and defects in important systemcomponents, e.g. lights, brakesRvehicle reactions and operating conditions inspecial driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-ment, intervention of stability control sys-temsRambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature

30 Introduction

This data is of an exclusively technical natureand can be used to:Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-tions and defectsRanalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-dentRoptimize vehicle functionsThe data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements.When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-mation can be read from the event datamemoryand malfunction data memory.Services include, for example:Rrepair servicesRservice processesRwarrantiesRquality assuranceThe vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-vice network (including the manufacturer) usingspecial diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-mation is obtained from it, if required.After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-mation is deleted from the malfunction memoryor is continually overwritten.When operating the vehicle, situations are con-ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-tion with other information (if necessary, underconsultation with an authorized expert), couldbe traced to a person.Examples include:Raccident reportsRdamage to the vehicleRwitness statementsFurther additional functions that have been con-tractually agreed upon with the customer allowcertain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-cle as well. The additional functions include, forexample, vehicle location in case of an emer-gency.

COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID)If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle'soperation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-uations, and the location of the vehicle may becompiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-tem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's

Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-tions.

COMAND/mbraceIf the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle'soperation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-uations, and the location of the vehicle may becompiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-tem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator'sManual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-tions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). The main purpose ofan EDR is to record, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle's systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safety systemsfor a short period of time, typically 30 secondsor less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:RHow various systems in your vehicle wereoperatingRWhether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastenedRHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRHow fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in which crashesand injuries occur. NOTE: EDRdata are recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa-tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDRunder normal driving conditions and no personaldata (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location)are recorded. However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement could combine the EDR datawith the type of personally identifying data rou-tinely acquired during a crash investigation.Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is neededto read data that is recorded by an EDR, and

Introduction 31

Z

special equipment is required. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessing thevehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the CrashData Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extractdata from the EDR is commercially available,Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expresslydisclaims any and all liability arising from theextraction of this information by unauthorizedMercedes-Benz personnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or, ifthe vehicle is leased, without the consent of thelessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by law enforce-ment; by federal, state or local government; inconnectionwith or arising out of litigation involv-ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint SystemModule. Tamperingwith, alter-ing, modifying or removing the EDR componentmay result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-tem Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.Thismeans that in the event of such conflict, thefederal regulation governs. As of February 2013,13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-sourcesoftware used in your vehicle and its electroniccomponents is available on the following web-site:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

32 Introduction

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle shift-ers 150

; Combination switch 113

= Instrument cluster 34

? Horn

A DIRECT SELECT lever 146

B Parking Assist PARKTRONICwarning display 192

C Overhead control panel 39

D Climate control systems 123

E Ignition lock 138Start/Stop button 138

Function Page

F Adjusts the steering wheelmanually 105

G Adjusts the steering wheelelectrically 105Steering wheel heating 106

H Cruise control lever 172

I Opens the hood 319

J Diagnostics connection 29

K Electric parking brake 160

L Light switch 112

Cockpit 33

Ataglance

Instrument cluster

Function Page

: Speedometer with segments 229Warning and indicator lamps:å ESP® OFF 279! ABS 277Braking 276$ (USA only)J (Canada only)L Low-beam headlamps 113T Parking lamps 113÷ ESP® 279K High-beam headlamps 113Electric parking brake (red) 282F (USA only)! (Canada only)! Electric parking brake(yellow) 282· Distance warning 285

; #! Turn signals 113

= Multifunction display 231

Function Page

? Tachometer 229Warning and indicator lamps:R Rear fog lamp 113; Engine diagnostics 283h Tire pressure monitor 2866 Restraint system 42ü Seat belts 275% Diesel engine: preglow 140

A Coolant temperature gauge 230Warning and indicator lamps:? Coolant 283

B Fuel level indicatorWarning and indicator lamps:8 Reserve fuel with fuelfiller flap location indicator(right-hand side) 283

C Instrument cluster lighting 229

i Information on displaying the outside tem-perature in the multifunction display can be

found under "Outside temperature display"(Y page 229).

34 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 231

; Multimedia system display

= ?

Switches on voice-operatednavigation or the Voice Con-trol System8

MuteWX

Adjusts the volume~

Rejects or ends a call 235Exits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redial mem-ory

Function Page

? =;

Selects a menu 2309:

Selects a submenu or scrollsthrough lists 230a

Confirms a selection 230Hides display messages 243%

Back 230Switches off voice-operatednavigation or the Voice Con-trol System

i In vehicles with multimedia systemCOMAND you can find further information:Ron the multimedia system in the DigitalOperator's ManualRon the DVD changer or single DVD drive inthe Digital Operator's ManualRon the Voice Control System in the sepa-rate operating instructions

i In vehicleswithmultimedia systemAudio 20you can find further information:Ron the multimedia system in the DigitalOperator's ManualRon the voice-operated control of the navi-gation in the manufacturer's operatinginstructions

Multifunction steering wheel 35

Ataglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: Multimedia system (see theseparate operating instruc-tions)

; c Seat heating 103

= s Seat ventilation 104

? c Parking AssistPARKTRONIC 190

A è ECO start/stop func-tion 142

Function Page

B £ Hazard warning lamps 114

C PASSENGER AIR BAG indica-tor lamp 42ATA indicator lamp 72

D å ESP® 67

36 Center consoleAt

aglance

Center console, lower section

i Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineeringpackage

Function Page

F Stowage compartment 296Cup holder 302Ashtray 305Cigarette lighter 306Socket 306

G Selector wheel for level con-trol 182

H Ã DSR (Downhill SpeedRegulation) 216

I Manual gearshifting (perma-nent setting) 150

J DYNAMIC SELECT controller 145

K Stowage compartment withMedia Interface 295

Function Page

L Touchpad (see the separateoperating instructions)

M Back button (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)

N Multimedia system control-ler (see the separate operat-ing instructions)

O g Switches to the favor-ites button (see the separateoperating instructions)

P Switches to the display of thevehicle settings; see the sep-arate operating instructions

Q + LOW RANGE off-roadgear 219

Center console 37

Ataglance

i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package andMercedes-AMG vehicles

Function Page

F Stowage compartment 296Cup holder 302Ashtray 305Cigarette lighter 306Socket 306

G Ã DSR (Downhill SpeedRegulation) 216

H Manual gearshifting (perma-nent setting) 150

I DYNAMIC SELECT controller 145

J Stowage compartment withMedia Interface 295

K Touchpad (see the separateoperating instructions)

Function Page

L Back button (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)

M Multimedia system control-ler (see the separate operat-ing instructions)

N g Switches to the favor-ites button (see the separateoperating instructions)

O Switches to the display of thevehicle settings; see the sep-arate operating instructionsAMG adaptive sport suspen-sion system (Mercedes-AMGvehicles) 189

P Á Level control 188

38 Center consoleAt

aglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left-handreading lamp on/off 116

; c Switches the front inte-rior lighting on 116

= u Switches the rear inte-rior lighting on or off 116

? | Switches the front inte-rior lighting/automatic inte-rior lighting control off 117

A p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 116

B 3 Opens/closes the pan-orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and roller sun-blinds 91

Function Page

C Eyeglasses compartment 296

D F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace system) 310

E G SOS button (mbracesystem) 309

F ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 311

G Rear-view mirror 107

H Buttons for the garage dooropener 317

I Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and LINGUA-TRONIC1

1 LINGUATRONIC is only available in combination with COMAND. Please observe the separate operatinginstructions.

Overhead control panel 39

Ataglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: Opens the door 80

; %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 80

= r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors and steeringcolumn (memory function) 110

? Adjusts the seats 94

A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds the exteriormirrors in/out electrically 107

Function Page

B W Opens/closes the sidewindows 86

C ± Opens/closes thehinged power side windows 86

D p Opens/closes the tail-gate 84

E n Activates/deactivatesthe override feature for theside windows in the rearcompartment 62

40 Door control panelAt

aglance

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for at leastone second.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed.

X To deactivate: press! button: again.orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint systemThe restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with parts ofthe vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.The restraint system can also reduce the forcestowhich vehicle occupants are subjected duringan accident.The restraint system comprises:Rseat belt systemRair bagsRchild restraint systemRchild seat securing systemsThe components of the restraint system work inconjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times, allvehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 44)Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraintproperly (Y page 94).

As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.Observe the information relating to the correctdriver's seat position (Y page 94).You also have to make sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 46).An air bag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the air bagincreases the level of protection for vehicleoccupants in the event of an accident. For exam-ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protectionoffered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bagsare not deployed.When an accident occurs, onlythe air bags that increase protection in that par-ticular accident situation are deployed. How-ever, seat belts and air bags generally do notprotect against objects penetrating the vehiclefrom the outside.Information on restraint system operation canbe found under "Triggering of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 53).For information on children traveling with you inthe vehicle and on child restraint systems, see"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 57).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary to modify components of therestraint system to accommodate a personwith disabilities, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only:for further information contact our CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1‑800‑367‑6372).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only usedriving aids which have been approved specifi-cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on and atregular intervals while the engine is running.Therefore, malfunctions can be detected ingood time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-nents of the restraint system are in operationalreadiness.Amalfunction has occurred if the 6 restraintsystem warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switchedonRdoes not go out after a few seconds with theengine runningRlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNINGIf the restraint system is malfunctioning,restraint system components may be trig-gered unintentionally or may not deploy asintended during an accident. This can affectfor example the Emergency TensioningDevice or the air bag. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp: andPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp; arepart of the Occupant Classification System(OCS).

The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-onds, subsequently both indicator lamps areoff (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): thefront-passenger front air bag is able to deployin the event of an accident.RPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It willthen not be deployed in the event of an acci-dent.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp isoff, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp shows the status of the front-passengerfront air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.Depending on the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag musteither be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-lowing points. You must make sure of this bothbefore and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on the instal-led child restraint system, and the age andsize of the child. Therefore, be sure to observethe notes on the "Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS)" (Y page 48) and on "Chil-dren in the vehicle" (Y page 57). There youwill also find instructions on rearward andforward-facing child restraint systems on thefront-passenger seat.RAll other persons: depending on the classi-fication of the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-bled or deactivated (Y page 48). Be sure toobserve the notes on "Seatbelts“ (Y page 42) and "Air bags"(Y page 46). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occupantsin the event of an accident or the vehicle rollingover. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupantscoming into contact with parts of the vehicleinterior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle

42 Occupant safetySafety

occupant in the best position in relation to theair bag.The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices for the frontseat belts and the outer seat belts in the sec-ond row of seats as well as the seat belts inthe third rowRSeat belt force limiters for the front seat beltsand the outer seat belts in the second row ofseats as well as the seat belts in the third row

If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outletquickly or with a jerky movement, the beltretractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac-ted any further.The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens theseat belt in an accident, pulling the belt closeagainst the body. However it does not pull thevehicle occupant back in the direction of thebackrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-rect an incorrect seat position or the routing ofan incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps toreduce the force exerted by the seat belt on thevehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters for the front seats aresynchronized with the front air bags, whichabsorb part of the deceleration force. This canreduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu-pants during an accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle ofthe front-passenger seat. This may otherwiselead to the triggering of the Emergency Ten-sioning Device in the event of an accident,which will then need to be replaced.

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEvenwhere this is not required by law, all vehicleoccupants should correctly fasten their seatbelts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannotperform its intended protective function. Anincorrectly fastened seat belt can also causeinjuries, for example, in the event of an acci-dent or when braking or changing directionabruptly. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-ting properly.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position.When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannotwear the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional and suitable restraint system. If theseat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-form its intended protective function. Anincorrectly fastened seat belt can also causeinjuries, for example, in the event of an acci-dent or when braking or changing directionabruptly. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50m) tall in suitable additional restraintsystems.

If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

cle. The child restraint systemmust be appro-priate to the age, weight and size of the childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 57) in addition to the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation and oper-ating instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 48)

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleached or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied.

Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,although the damage may not be visible, e.g.due to splinters of glass.Modified or damagedseat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.Modified Emergency Tensioning Devicescould accidentally trigger or fail to deploywhen necessary. This poses an increased riskof injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 43).All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seatbelt correctly before beginning the journey. Alsomake sure that all vehicle occupants are alwayswearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicleis in motion.

When fastening the seat belt, always make surethat:Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the beltbuckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces which occur be dis-tributed over the area of the belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is alwaysrouted across the center of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt must notcome into contact with your neck or be routedunder your arm. Where possible, adjust theseat belt to the appropriate height.Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down aspossible across your lap.The lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdomen.This applies particularly to pregnant women.If necessary, push the lap belt down to yourhip joint and pull it tight using the shouldersection of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-ted or fragile objects.If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, storethese in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time.Infants and children must never travel sittingon the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seat belt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.Also ensure that there are never objectsbetween a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-gage or loads (Y page 294).

Fastening and adjusting the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 43) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 44).

44 Occupant safetySafety

Basic illustrationX Adjust the seat (Y page 94).The seat backrest must be in an almost ver-tical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outletand engage belt tongue; into beltbuckle:.The seat belt on the driver’s seat and thefront-passenger seat may be tightened auto-matically, see "Belt adjustment"(Y page 45).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

The shoulder section of the seat belt mustalways be routed across the center of the shoul-der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.The belt outlet will engage in various posi-tions.

X To lower: hold belt outlet release= and slidebelt outlet downwards.

X Let go of belt outlet release= in the desiredposition and make sure that the belt outletengages.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. Further information can be found under"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 57).

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will betrapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.This could damage the door, the door trimpanel and the seat belt. Damaged seat beltscan no longer fulfill their protective function

and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

X Press the release button in the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the beltback.

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This func-tion adjusts the driver's and front-passengerseat belt to the upper body of the occupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle andRthe ignition is switched onThe seat-belt adjustment will apply a certainretraction force if any slack is detected betweenthe vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do nothold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust-ing.You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on andoff in the on-board computer (Y page 240).

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-pants must wear their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. In addition, there may bea warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt hasalready been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time theengine is started. If, after six seconds, the driveror front-passenger seat belt has not been fas-tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv-er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastenedor a front door is opened again, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after theengine is started, an additional warning tone willsound. The warning tone switches off after sixseconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-tened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarningtone sounds. A warning tone also sounds withincreasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

driver or front passenger have fastened theirseat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-ing is activated again.

Air bags

IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.An air bag complements the correctly fastenedseat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. Theair bag provides additional protection in appli-cable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. Thedifferent air bag systems function independ-ently from one another (Y page 53).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in an almost upright position. The center of

the head restraint must support the head atabout eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passenger seatsas far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-tionmust allow the vehicle to be driven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against thedoor or side window. Youmay otherwise be inthe deployment area of the air bags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in frontof the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-board, for example. Your feet may otherwisebe in the deployment area of the air bag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannotbe worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under twelve years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitablechild restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installed onthe rear seats.ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatwhen the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated(Y page 42).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 48) and on "Children in thevehicle" (Y page 57) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationand operating instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may preventan air bag from functioning correctly. Beforestarting your journey and to avoid risks resultingfrom the speed of the air bag as it deploys, makesure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.

46 Occupant safetySafety

Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploymentarea of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,rear side trim or side walls.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are inthe pockets of your clothing. Store suchobjects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyanymore. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Front air bags! Do not place heavy objects on the front-passenger seat. This could cause the systemto identify the seat as being occupied. In theevent of an accident, the restraint systems onthe front-passenger side may be triggeredand have to be replaced.

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the steer-ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag;deploys in front of and above the glove box.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for the occu-pants in the front seats.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampinforms you about the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 42).The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensorreadings, detects that the front-passengerseat is occupied (Y page 48). ThePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp isnot lit (Y page 49)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity

Driver's knee bag

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steeringcolumn. The driver's knee bag is triggeredtogether with the front air bag.The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh,knee and lower leg protection for the occupantin the driver's seat.

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-vent deployment of the air bags integratedinto the seats. Consequently, the air bagscannot protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. In addition, the operation ofthe occupant classification system (OCS)could be adversely affected. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Front side impact air bags: and second rowrear side impact air bags; deploy next to theouter bolster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. It also offers addi-tional pelvis protection for occupants in thefront seats. However, it does not protect the:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impact airbag is deployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.The side impact air bag on the front-passengerside deploys under the following conditions:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied orRthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckleof the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,the side impact air bag on the front-passengerside deploys if an appropriate accident situationoccurs. In this case, deployment is independent

of whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integrated intothe side of the roof frame and deploy in the areaextending from the front door (A-pillar) to therear side window (D-pillar).When deployed, the window curtain air bagenhances the level of protection for the head.However, it does not protect the chest or arms.In the event of a side impact, the window curtainair bag is deployed on the side on which theimpact occurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a window curtain air bag may bedeployed in other accident situations(Y page 53).

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

IntroductionThe Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.Depending on that result, the front-passengerfront air bag is either enabled or deactivated.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

48 Occupant safetySafety

In the following situation, the side impact air bagand the Emergency Tensioning Device are deac-tivated:ROCS has not categorized the person on thefront-passenger seat as an adult or a personof corresponding stature andRthe seat belt tongue of the seat belt is notinserted into the front-passenger seat beltbuckle

RequirementsTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with their backagainst the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possibleIf the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-tion, e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raisedfrom the seat cushion

If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat, besure to observe the correct positioning of thechild restraint system. Never place objectsunder or behind the child restraint system, e.g. acushion. The entire base of the child restraintsystem must always rest on the seat cushion ofthe front-passenger seat. The backrest of theforward-facing child restraint systemmust lie asflat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat.The child restraint system must not touch theroof or be subjected to a load by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrestand the head restraint position accordingly.Only then can OCS be guaranteed to functioncorrectly. Always observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Occupant Classification System opera-tion (OCS)

: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampThe indicator lamps inform you whether thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated orenabled.X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, orturn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGERAIR BAGON indicator lampsmust light up simul-taneously for approximately six seconds.The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-onds, subsequently both indicator lamps areoff (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): thefront-passenger front air bag is able to deployin the event of an accident.RPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It willthen not be deployed in the event of an acci-dent.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp isoff, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp shows the status of the front-passengerfront air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.If the status of the front-passenger front air bagchangeswhile the vehicle is inmotion, an air bagdisplaymessage appears in the instrument clus-ter (Y page 254). When the front-passengerseat is occupied, always pay attention to thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Beaware of the status of the front-passenger frontair bag both before and during the journey.

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront air bag is correct.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is off, the front-passenger front air bagmay deploy in the event of an accident. Thechild could be struck by the air bag. This posesan increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampstays off, do not install a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat.You can find more information on OCS under"Problemswith theOccupant Classification Sys-tem" (Y page 52).

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, the child could, in theevent of an accident:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Move the front-passenger seat as far back aspossible. Always make sure that the shoulderbelt strap is correctly routed from the vehiclebelt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide onthe child restraint system. The shoulder beltstrap must be routed forwards and down-wards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If nec-essary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide andthe front-passenger seat accordingly. Alwaysobserve the child restraint system manufac-turer's installation instructions.

If OCS determines that:Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild of up to twelvemonths old, in a standardchild restraint system, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after thesystem self-test and remains lit. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated.But even in the case of a twelve-month-oldchild, in a standard child restraint system, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp cango out after the system self-test. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bag isactivated. The result of the classification isdependent on, among other factors, the childrestraint system and the child's stature. It isrecommended that you install the childrestraint system on a suitable rear seat.

50 Occupant safetySafety

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per-son of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager orsmall adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp lights up and remains lit afterthe system self-test depending on the resultof the classification or, alternatively, goes out.- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is off, move the front-passenger seatas far back as possible. Alternatively, a per-son of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, a person of smaller statureshould not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person of adult stature, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampgoes out after the system self-test. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bag isactivated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure toobserve the notes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 57).When the occupant classification system (OCS)is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint systemwarning lamp in the instrument cluster and thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lightup simultaneously. The front-passenger front airbag is deactivated in this case and does notdeploy during an accident. Have the OccupantClassification System (OCS) checked andrepaired immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor this purpose.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or theseat cushion are damaged, have the necessaryrepair work carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor this purpose.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessories thathave been approved by Mercedes-Benz.If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bag willalso deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, thefront-passenger front air bag is either enabled ordeactivated.

System self-test

G DANGERIf both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps donot light up during the system self-test, thesystem is malfunctioning. The front-passenger front air bag might be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered at allin the event of an accident with high deceler-ation. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-pant Classification System (OCS) checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit after the system self-test, thefront-passenger front air bag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front air bagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe person is seated properly with a cor-rectly fastened seatbeltRthe front-passenger seat has been movedas far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-cation System (OCS) checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect OCS oper-ation. This could result in the front-passengerair bag not functioning as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-

facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp displays the status of the front-passengerfront air bag (Y page 49). If the front-passengerfront air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 secondsand then goes out.If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp isoff, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp shows the status of the front-passengerfront air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-lems with the Occupant Classification System"(Y page 52).

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 51).

52 Occupant safetySafety

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamplights up and remains lit,even though the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or a per-son of a stature corre-sponding to that of anadult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-rect.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the personon the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 49).

X If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampdoes not light up and/ordoes not stay on.The front-passenger seatis:RunoccupiedRoccupied with theweight of a child up totwelve months old in achild restraint system

OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the childseat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests onthe seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of theforward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seatbelt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passengerseat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the childrestraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the childrestraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-ingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto theseat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/orthe PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not installa child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom-mended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rearseat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bags

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

repaired. This will help to make sure the air bagscontinue to perform their protective function forthe vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G WARNINGEmergency Tensioning Devices that havedeployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Have pyrotechnically triggered EmergencyTensioning Devices replaced immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trig-ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardoussituations. This procedure is reversible.If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggeredor air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. The 6 restraint system warninglamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-ing. The powder that is released generally doesnot constitute a health hazard, but it may causeshort-term breathing difficulties in people withasthma or other respiratory problems. Providedit is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicleimmediately or open the window in order to pre-vent breathing difficulties.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency TensioningDevices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,which may require special handling and regardfor the environment. National guidelines mustbe observed during disposal. In California, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, the restraintsystem control unit evaluates important physi-cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal orrear collision.

An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational. You can find further informationunder: "Restraint system warning lamp"(Y page 42)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe respective front-passenger seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rearcompartment are triggered independently of thelock status of the seat belts.If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RFront air bags and driver's knee bagRWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-mines that deployment can offer additionalprotection to that provided by the seat belt

The front-passenger front air bag is activated ordeactivated depending on the person on thefront-passenger seat. The front-passenger frontair bag can only deploy in an accident if thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.Observe the information on the PASSENGERAIRBAG indicator lamps (Y page 42).Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. Duringthe first deployment stage, the front air bag isfilled with propellant gas to reduce the risk ofinjuries. The front air bag is fully deployed withthe maximum amount of propellant gas if a sec-ond deployment threshold is reached within afew milliseconds.The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-sioning Devices and the air bag are determinedby evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration oracceleration which occurs at various points inthe vehicle. This process is pre-emptive innature. Deployment should take place in goodtime at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelerationand the direction of the force are essentiallydetermined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the collisionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehicleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factors which can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play a deci-

54 Occupant safetySafety

sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor dothey provide an indication of air bag deploy-ment.The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-out an air bag being deployed. This is the case ifonly parts which are relatively easily deformedare affected and the rate of deceleration is nothigh. Conversely, air bagsmay be deployed eventhough the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigidvehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occursas a result.If the restraint system control unit detects a sideimpact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicablecomponents of the restraint system are activa-ted independently of each other depending onthe apparent type of accident.RSide impact air bags on the side where theimpact takes place, independently of theEmergency Tensioning Device and the use ofthe seat belt on the driver's seat and outerseats in the second rowThe side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the followingconditions:- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact,independently of the use of the seat belt andindependently of whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedREmergency Tensioning Devices, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection in this situationRWindow curtain air bags on the driver's andfront-passenger side in certain situationswhen the vehicle rolls over, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection to that provided by the seatbelt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems work independ-ently of each other.

How the air bag system works is determinedby the severity of the accident detected,especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-eration and the apparent type of accident:RFrontal collisionRSide impactRRollover

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)

IntroductionIn certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®takes pre-emptivemeasures to protect the vehi-cle occupants.

Important safety notes! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats. There is a dangerthat the seats and/or objects could be dam-aged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.

Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-SAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of anaccident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt yourdriving style to suit the prevailing road andweather conditions andmaintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

FunctionPRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. whenBAS is activatedRin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-steers or oversteers severelyRon vehicles with the Driving Assistance pack-age: if BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully or theradar sensor system detects an imminentdanger of collision in certain situations

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detected:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and thesliding sunroof are closed.

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

Rvehicles with the memory function: the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfav-orable position.Rvehicleswith amulticontour seat: the air pres-sure in the side bolsters of the seat backrestis increased.

If the hazardous situation passes without result-ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the beltpre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontourseats, the air pressure in the side bolsters isreduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE®can then be reversed.If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightlywhen the vehicle is stationary.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Informa-tion about the convenience function can befound under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 45).

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-pant protection system PLUS)

IntroductionPRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance package.Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-endcollision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit-uations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptivemeasures to protect the vehicle occupants.

Important safety notesThe intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannotprevent an imminent collision.The driver is not warned about the interventionof PRE-SAFE® PLUS.PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehi-cle is backing up.When driving, or when parking or exiting a park-ing space with assistance from Parking Pilot,PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply the brakes.

FunctionPRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa-tions if the radar sensor system detects animminent head-on or rear-end collision.PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detected:Rif the radar sensor system detects that ahead-on collision is imminent, the seat beltsare pre-tensioned.Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-end collision is imminent:- the brake pressure is increased if the driverapplies the brakes when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is can-celed:Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when agear is engagedRif the risk of a collision passes or is no longerdetectedRif Distance Pilot DISTRONIC indicates anintention to pull away

If the hazardous situation passes without result-ing in an accident, the original settings arerestored.

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending on thetype and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRvehicles with a memory function: the electri-cally adjustable steering wheel is raisedRthe engine is switched off and the fuel supplyis cut offRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergencycall

56 Occupant safetySafety

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installa child restraint system on a rear seat. Childrenare generally better protected there.If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.The child restraint system must be appropri-ate to the age, weight and size of the childRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes in this section in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 48)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-

dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sittingproperly. Particular attention must be paid tochildren.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 43) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 44).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where athree-point seat belt can be properly fastenedwithout a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat belt retractorensures that the seat belt will not slacken oncethe child restraint system has been secured.

Children in the vehicle 57

Safety

Z

Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-let.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seat beltretractor is activated.

X Push the child seat restraint system down sothat the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Removing a child restraint system and deacti-vating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Press the release button of the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it backtowards the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesIf you install a rearward-facing child restraintsystem on the center rear seat, the rear arm restmust be folded back as far as possible.You can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,

that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-lines" (Y page 294).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

The securing systems of child restraint systemsare:Rthe seat belt systemRthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsRthe Top Tether anchorages

58 Children in the vehicleSafety

If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child onthe front-passenger seat, be sure to observe theinformation on the "Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS)" (Y page 48). There you will alsofind information on deactivating the front-passenger front air bag.All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-responds to the standards can be found on aninstruction label on the child restraint system.This confirmation can also be found in the instal-lation instructions that are included with thechild restraint system.Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-lation and operating instructions for the childrestraint system used.Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engagedcorrectly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingringsTo ensure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systemcan perform its protective func-tion as intended, the backrest of the respective

outer seat in the second row must be in theupright position.

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat belt couldotherwise be damaged.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for the outerseat in the second row of seats

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for the thirdrow of seatsBefore installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system on the second row of seats:X Move the rear seat backrests in the secondrow to an upright position (Y page 98).

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystemon both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings:.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may alsobe used and can be installed using the vehicle'sseat belt system. Install the child seat accordingto the manufacturer's instructions.

Children in the vehicle 59

Safety

Z

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system secured witha LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.If the child restraint system is equipped with aTop Tether belt, this should always be used.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear seats or the rear seat backrests arenot locked, they could fold forwards in theevent of an accident, heavy braking or suddenchanges of direction. As a result, childrestraint systems cannot perform their inten-ded protective function. Rear seats and rearseat backrests that are not locked can alsocause additional injuries, e.g. in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Always lock the rear seats and rear seatbackrests after installing a Top Tether belt.Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjustthe rear seat backrests so that they are in anupright position.

Make sure that the backrest in the rear com-partment engages fully. To do so, pull firmly onthe seat backrest.

Top Tether anchorages

The Top Tether anchorages for the second rowof seats are located on the rear of the rear seatbackrests. For the third row of seats, use the

cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartmentfloor.

X Move head restraint= up (Y page 97).X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystem with Top Tether. Always comply withthe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions when doing so.

X Route Top Tether beltB under head restraint= between the two head restraint bars.

X Guide Top Tether beltBdownwards betweencargo compartment cover: and rear seatbackrest;.

X Hook Top Tether hookA of Top Tether beltB into Top Tether anchorage?.Make sure that:RTop Tether hookA is hooked into TopTether anchorage? as shown.RTop Tether beltB is not twisted.RTop Tether beltB is routed between rearseat backrest; and cargo compartmentcover: if cargo compartment cover: isinstalled.RTop Tether beltB is routed between rearseat backrest; and the cargo net if thecargo net is installed.

X Tension Top Tether beltB. Always complywith the child restraint system manufactur-er's installation instructions when doing so.

X Move head restraint= back down againslightly if necessary (Y page 97). Make surethat you do not interfere with the correct rout-ing of Top Tether beltB.

60 Children in the vehicleSafety

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installthe child restraint system on a rear seat.If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,always observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 48).You can thus avoid the risks that could arise asa result of:Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-passenger seatRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is permanently lit (Y page 42) is the front-passenger front air bag deactivated.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the childrestraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passengerseat. The child restraint system must not touchthe roof or be subjected to a load by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrestand the head restraint position accordingly.Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is

correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet tothe shoulder belt guide on the child restraintsystem. The shoulder belt strap must be routedforwards and downwards from the vehicle beltoutlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt out-let and the front-passenger seat accordingly.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for:Rthe rear doors (Y page 62)Rthe rear side windows (Y page 62)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.

Children in the vehicle 61

Safety

Z

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door securedwith a child-proof lock cannot be opened frominside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked,the door can be opened from the outside.

X To activate: press the child-proof lock leverup in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks arework-ing properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear side win-dows

X To activate/deactivate:press button:.If indicator lamp; is lit, operation of the rearside windows is disabled. Operation is onlypossible using the switches in the driver'sdoor. If indicator lamp; is off, operation ispossible using the switches in the rear com-partment.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.

62 Pets in the vehicleSafety

Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 63)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 64)RActive Brake Assist (Y page 64)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 67)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 69)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 69)RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function(Y page 69)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 72)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-ther reduce the risk of an accident nor overridethe laws of physics. Driving safety systems aremerely aids designed to assist driving. You areresponsible for maintaining the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time, and for staying in lane. Always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing road andweather conditions andmaintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.The driving safety systems described only workas effectively as possible when there is ade-quate contact between the tires and the roadsurface. Pay particular attention to the informa-tion regarding tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires"section (Y page 346).In wintry driving conditions, always use wintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.Only in this way will the driving safety systemsdescribed in this section work as effectively aspossible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a way thatthe wheels do not lock when you brake. Thisallows you to continue steering the vehiclewhenbraking.The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when youonly brake gently.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 277) and dis-play messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 245).

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application: depressthe brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indicationof hazardous road conditions, and functions as areminder to take extra care while driving.

Driving safety systems 63

Safety

Z

Off-road ABSAn ABS system specifically suited to off-roadterrain is activated automatically once the off-road program is activated on:RVehicles without the Offroad Engineeringpackage (Y page 217)RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-age (Y page 218)

At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the frontwheels lock cyclically during braking. The dig-ging-in effect achieved in the process reducesthe stopping distance on off-road terrain. Thislimits steering capability.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situations.If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BASautomatically boosts the braking force, thusshortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Active Brake Assist

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warn-ing function with an autonomous braking func-tion and Adaptive Brake Assist.Active Brake Assist can help you tominimize therisk of a collision with the vehicle traveling infront or reduce the effects of such a collision.If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a riskof collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. If you do not react to the visual andaudible collision warning, autonomous brakingcan be initiated in critical situations. If you applythe brake yourself in a critical situation, Adap-tive Brake Assist of the Active Brake Assist sys-tem supports you.

Important safety notesIn particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different lineRnew vehicles or after servicing is carried outon the Active Brake Assist systemObserve the notes in the section on breaking-in (Y page 137).

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensor checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.

Activating/deactivatingActive Brake Assist is automatically active afterswitching on the ignition.You can activate or deactivate Active BrakeAssist (Y page 237) in the on-board computer.When deactivated, the distance warning func-

64 Driving safety systemsSafety

tion and the autonomous braking function arealso deactivated.If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, theæsymbol appears in the assistance graphic dis-play.If DSR (Y page 216) is activated, Active BrakeAssist is deactivated.

Distance warning function

General informationThe distance warning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision with avehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such acollision. If the distance warning functiondetects that there is a risk of a collision, you willbe warned visually and acoustically.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 63).

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

FunctionStarting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),the distance warning function warns you if yourapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermit-tent warning tone will then sound, and the·distance warning lamp will light up in the instru-ment cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the system to display a warning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obstaclesthat are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-ded period of time.Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h), thedistance warning function can also react to sta-tionary obstacles, such as stopped or parkedvehicles.

Autonomous braking functionIf the driver does not react to the distance warn-ing signal in a critical situation, Active BrakeAssist can assist the driver with the autonomousbraking function.The autonomous braking function is available inthe following speed ranges:R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objectsR4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationaryobjects

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-tion to intervene.If the autonomous braking function requires aparticularly high braking force, preventativepassenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)are activated simultaneously (Y page 55).

Adaptive Brake Assist

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-tance warning signal can detect obstacles that

Driving safety systems 65

Safety

Z

are in the path of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a collision. Ifyou apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive BrakeAssist will automatically increase the brakingforce to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-tance in hazardous situations at speeds above4mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technologyto assess the traffic situation.Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph(250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable ofreacting to moving objects that have alreadybeen detected as such at least once over theperiod of observation.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta-tionary obstacles.If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularlyhigh braking force, preventative passenger pro-tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activatedsimultaneously (Y page 55).X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-cle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 63).

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause Brake Assist to intervene.If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to amalfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with full brakeboosting effect and BAS.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.power transmission between the tires and theroad surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating fromthe direction desired by the driver, one or morewheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. Theengine output is also modified to keep the vehi-cle on the desired course within physical limits.ESP® assists the driver when pulling away onwet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilizethe vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-red to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.

66 Driving safety systemsSafety

In appropriate driving situations, activate theoffroad program:X Vehicles without the Offroad Engineeringpackage (Y page 217)

X Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-age (Y page 218)

Offroad 4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem)An ETS system specifically suited to off-roadterrain is activated automatically once an off-road program is activated:RVehicles without the Offroad Engineeringpackage (Y page 217)RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-age (Y page 218)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Only operate the vehicle for a maximum often seconds on a brake test dynamometer.Switch off the ignition.Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth-erwise destroy the brake system.

! A function or performance test should onlybe carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.Before you operate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualifiedworkshop. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.

ESP® is only deactivated if the å warninglamp is lit continuously.If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warninglamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not availabledue to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 279) and display messages which maybe shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 245).

i Only use wheels with the recommended tiresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the÷ ESP®warning lampflashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailingroad and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehicle stopsmoving. The engine starts automatically whenthe driver wants to pull away again. ESP®remains in its previously selected status, e.g. ifESP® was deactivated before the engine wasautomatically switched off.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

You can select between the following states ofESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

Driving safety systems 67

Safety

Z

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelSpinning the wheels results in a cutting actionwhich provides better grip.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle ifthe vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts tospin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated. Youcould otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To deactivate: press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To activate: press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in theinstrument cluster flashes. In such situations,ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.RTraction control is still activated.RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; noris it activated if you brake firmly with assis-tance from ESP®

RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-venes.RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionis no longer available; it is not activated evenif you brake firmly with assistance from ESP®RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

Offroad ESP® (vehicles with OffroadEngineering package)An ESP® system specifically suited to off-roadterrain is activated automatically once the off-road program is activated on:RVehicles without the Offroad Engineeringpackage (Y page 217)RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-age (Y page 218)

Offroad ESP® intervenes with a delay if there isoversteering or understeering, thus improvingtraction.

ESP® trailer stabilization

General informationESP® trailer stabilization is not available inMercedes-AMG vehicles.If your vehicle/trailer combination begins toswerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP®slows the vehicle down by braking and limitingthe engine output until the vehicle/trailer com-bination has stabilized.

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity cantip over before ESP® can detect this. There isa risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilizethe vehicle/trailer combination by depressingthe brake firmly.

68 Driving safety systemsSafety

Trailer stabilization is active above speeds ofabout 37 mph (60 km/h).ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP®is deactivated or disabled because of amalfunc-tion.

Crosswind Assist

General informationStrong crosswind gusts can impair the ability ofyour vehicle to drive straight ahead. The cross-wind driving assistance function integrated inESP® noticeably reduces these impairments.ESP® intervenes automatically according to thedirection and intensity of the crosswinds affect-ing your vehicle.ESP® intervenes with stabilizing braking toassist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speedsabove 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straightahead or cornering gently.

Important safety notesCrosswind Assist does not work if ESP® isswitched off or deactivated because of a mal-function.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pressureon the rear wheels to improve driving stabilitywhile braking.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 63).

G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 277) as well as displaymessages (Y page 247).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety andoffers increased braking comfort. In addition tothe braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also hasthe HOLD function (Y page 185) and hill startassist (Y page 141).

Active Brake Assist with cross-trafficfunction

General informationi Pay attention to the important safety notesin the "Driving safety systems" section(Y page 63).

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic functioncan help you to minimize the risk of a collisionwith a vehicle in front or a pedestrian and reducethe effects of such a collision. If the Active BrakeAssist with cross-traffic function detects a riskof collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically and, if necessary, your brake appli-cation will be assisted according to the situa-tion. If you do not react, the system can alsoreact by braking automatically. In the event of adetected risk of collision due to crossing traffic,you will also be visually and acoustically warnedas well as assisted by the brake boosting effectaccording to the situation.Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function isonly available in vehicles with the Driving Assis-tance Plus package.For Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-tion to assist you when driving, the radar sensorsystem and the camera system must be opera-tional.If the radar sensor system or the camera systemis malfunctioning, Active Brake Assist withcross-traffic function is restricted or no longeravailable. The brake system is still available withcomplete brake boosting effect and BAS.The radar sensor system and camera systemhelp Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-tion to detect obstacles that are in the path ofyour vehicle for an extended period of time.In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-cle can be detected.

Driving safety systems 69

Safety

Z

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic functiondetects pedestrians using typical characteris-tics such as body contours and the posture of aperson standing upright.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" section(Y page 70).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionwill initially brake your vehicle by a partialapplication of the brakes if a danger of colli-sion is detected. There may be a collisionunless you brake yourself. Even after subse-quent full application of the brakes a collisioncannot always be avoided, particularly whenapproaching at too high a speed. There is arisk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

In the event of a partial application of the brakes,the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the fullbraking pressure.

G WARNINGActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic functioncannot always clearly identify objects andcomplex traffic situations.In such cases, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function might:Rissue an unnecessary warning or engageRneither give a warning nor interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be prepared to brake, especiallyif Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-tion alerts you. Terminate the intervention in anon-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic functioncannot always clearly identify people, partic-ularly if they are moving. Active Brake Assist

with cross-traffic function cannot intervene inthese cases. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be prepared to brake, especiallyif Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-tion alerts you.

In order to maintain the appropriate distance tothe vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,you must apply the brakes yourself.

G WARNINGActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic functiondoes not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRwhen corneringAs a result, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function may not warn you or engage inall critical situations. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system is alsoimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicleRvehicles quickly move into the radar sensorsystem detection range

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is coveredRglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sunbeing low in the sky

70 Driving safety systemsSafety

RdarknessRor if:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the pathof the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes apedestrian as a person due to special cloth-ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects- the typical outline of a person is not distin-guishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camera sys-tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

FunctionX To activate or deactivate: activate or deac-tivate Active Brake Assist with cross-trafficfunction using the on-board computer(Y page 237).If the Active Brake Assist with cross-trafficfunction is deactivated, theæ symbolappears in the multifunction display.

If you have activated DSR (Y page 216), theActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function isdeactivated.Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),this function warns you if you rapidly approach avehicle in front. An intermittent warning tonewill then sound and the· distance warninglamp will light up in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic functioncan also brake the vehicle automatically underthe following conditions:Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seatbelts fastenedandRthe vehicle speed is between approximately4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)

Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), Active Brake Assist with cross-trafficfunction may react to:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

i If there is an increased risk of a collision,preventive passenger protection measures(PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 55).

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasiveaction or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking, upto the point of full brake application. Automaticemergency braking is not performed until imme-diately prior to an imminent accident.If you apply the brake yourself in a critical sit-uation or during autonomous braking, brakingassistance is provided according to the situa-tion. If necessary, this increases the brake pres-sure up to full brake application.To avoid a collision, Active Brake Assist withcross-traffic function calculates the brake forcenecessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionhas detected a risk of a collision

When driving at a speedunder20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress thebrake pedal, Active Brake Assist with cross-traf-fic function is activated. The increase in brakepressure from Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is carried out at the last possiblemoment.When driving at a speedabove20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress thebrake pedal sharply, Active Brake Assist withcross-traffic function automatically increasesthe brake pressure to a degree suited to thetraffic situation.Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionprovides braking assistance in hazardous situa-tions with vehicles in front within a speed rangebetween 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph(250 km/h).

Driving safety systems 71

Safety

Z

Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h) the Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function assists you with braking in haz-ardous situations with:Rstationary obstacles in the path of the vehicle,e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRstationary pedestrians in the path of the vehi-cleRobstacles crossing your path that move in thedetection range of the sensors and are detec-ted

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

You can prevent the intervention of Active BrakeAssist with cross-traffic function at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal furtherRactivating kickdownRreleasing the brake pedalThe braking application of Active Brake Assistwith cross-traffic function is ended automati-cally if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacleRthere is no longer a risk of collisionRthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle

STEER CONTROL

General informationSTEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steering wheelin the direction required for vehicle stabilization.This steering assistance is provided in particularif:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on awet or slippery road surface when you brakeRthe vehicle starts to skid

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

No steering assistance is provided from STEERCONTROL, if:RESP® is deactivatedRESP® is malfunctioningRthe steering is malfunctioningIf ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assistedfurther by the electrical power steering.

Protection against theft

ImmobilizerX To activate with the SmartKey: remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch theignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.The immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyonecan start the engine if a valid SmartKey has beenleft inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivated whenyou start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be started(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-tem is not operational. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

72 Protection against theftSafety

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey orKEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm systemis armed after approximately 15 seconds.

X To deactivate using the SmartKey: unlockthe vehicle with the SmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X To deactivate using KEYLESS-GO: unlockthe vehicle with KEYLESS-GO.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-cle.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe tailgateRthe hoodX To switch the alarm off with the Smart-Key: press the% or& button on theSmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-cle.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you closethe open door that triggered it, for example.

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-tem automatically notifies the CustomerAssistance Center. This is done either by textmessage or data connection. The emergencycall system sends the message or data provi-ded that:Ryou have subscribed to thembrace service.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

Protection against theft 73

Safety

Z

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-netic fields. Otherwise, the remote controlfunction could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-ity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.

Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GOStart function key in the temperature-controlledcup holder. Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO or KEY-LESS-GOStart function keywill not be detected.VehicleswithKEYLESS-GO start function: donot keep the SmartKey in the cargo compart-ment. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not bedetected, e.g. when starting the engine usingthe Start/Stop button.

SmartKey functions

: & Locks the vehicle; F Opens/closes the tailgate= % Unlocks the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press the% button.If you do not open the vehicle within approx-imately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Ranti-theft protection is reactivated.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks thefollowing components:Rthe doorsRthe tailgateRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlocking andthree times when locking.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 239).You will receive visual and acoustic locking con-firmation if all components were able to belocked.

74 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

If activated in the multimedia system, the loca-tor lighting also lights up in the dark (see sepa-rate operating instructions).X To open the tailgate automatically fromoutside the vehicle: press and hold theFbutton until the tailgate opens.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X To close the tailgate automatically fromoutside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is loca-ted in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle,press theF button on the SmartKey.When the tailgate closes you can then releasethe button.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY-LESS-GO key in the vehicle (Y page 140).

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry theSmartKey with you. You can combine the func-tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by usingKEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the& button on the SmartKey.The driver's door and the door at which the han-dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle. When locking orunlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distancebetween the SmartKey and the correspondingdoor handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid SmartKeyis in the vehicle by periodically establishing aradio connection between the vehicle and theSmartKey. This happens:Rwhen starting the engineRwhile drivingRwhen the external door handles are touchedRduring convenience closing

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-face of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface:or;.Make sure that you do not touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for an extendedperiod.

Further information on the convenience closingfeature (Y page 87).If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, only thecargo compartment of the vehicle is unlocked.

Deactivating and activatingIf you do not intend to use a SmartKey for anextended period of time, you can deactivate theKEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. TheSmartKey will then use very little power, therebyconserving battery power. For the purposes ofactivation/deactivation, the vehiclemust not benearby.X To deactivate: press the& button on theSmartKey twice in rapid succession.The battery check lamp of the SmartKeyflashes twice briefly and lights up once, KEY-LESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 77).

X To activate: press any button on the Smart-Key.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated featuresare available again.

SmartKey 75

Openingandclosing

Z

KEYLESS-GO start function

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-Key in the vehicle (Y page 140).

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the locking sys-tem. This means that only the driver's door andthe fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicleis unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travelalone.X To change the setting: press and hold downthe% and& buttons simultaneouslyfor about six seconds until the battery indica-tor lamp flashes twice (Y page 77).

If the setting of the locking system is changedwithin the signal range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicleThe SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock: press the% button once.X To unlock centrally: press the% buttontwice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-lows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch the innersurface of the door handle on the driver'sdoor.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surfaceof the door handle on the front-passengerdoor or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles(Y page 75).

X To restore the factory settings: press andhold down the% and& buttons simul-taneously for approximately six seconds untilthe battery check lamp flashes twice(Y page 77).

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 72).If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-matically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction of thearrow and at the same time remove mechan-ical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 81)Runlocking the cargo compartment(Y page 85)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 81)

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key; completely into theSmartKey until it engages and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.

76 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thebatteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 77).If the SmartKey battery is checked within thesignal reception range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 76).

X Press mechanical key; into the SmartKeyopening in the direction of the arrow until bat-tery compartment cover: opens. Do nothold battery compartment cover: closedwhile doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

SmartKey 77

Openingandclosing

Z

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth todo so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compartmentcover: into the housing first and then pressto close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the SmartKey(Y page 76).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons onthe vehicle.

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingthe SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 77) and replace it if necessary(Y page 77).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 81) or lock (Y page 81) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 81) or lock (Y page 81) the vehicle using themechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 81) or lock (Y page 81) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 75).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 77) and replace it if necessary(Y page 77).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 81) or lock (Y page 81) the vehicle using themechanical key.

78 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 81) or lock (Y page 81) the vehicle using themechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of theSmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-trol function:X Unlock (Y page 81) or lock (Y page 81) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using the Smart-Key.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 338).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 338).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using the Start/Stop button. The Smart-Key is in the vehicle.

The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 77) and replace it if necessary(Y page 77).

If this does not work:X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

SmartKey 79

Openingandclosing

Z

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can only open therear doors from inside the vehicle if they are notsecured by the child-proof locks (Y page 62).If the vehicle has previously been locked fromthe outside, opening a door from the inside willtrigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch offthe alarm (Y page 72).

X Front door: pull door handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: pops up.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X Rear door: pull door handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: pops upand the door unlocks.

X Pull door handle; again.The door can be opened.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle fromthe inside. The buttons are located on both frontdoors.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehi-cle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be lockedor unlocked.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from theinside if the vehicle has been locked from theoutside.You can open a front door from inside the vehi-cle even if it has been locked.If a locked door is opened from the inside, theprevious unlock status of the vehicle will betaken into consideration if:Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but-ton for the central locking, orRif the vehicle was locked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked, only thedoor which has been opened from the inside isunlocked.

80 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button: forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do nothear a tone, the relevant setting has alreadybeen selected.The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-ing.You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic locking func-tion on and off using the on-board computer(Y page 239).

Power closingPower closing pulls the doors and tailgate intotheir locks automatically even if they are notcompletely closed.X To power close a door: push the door intothe lock up to the first detent position.Power closing will pull the door fully closed.

X To power close the tailgate: lightly pressthe tailgate downwards.Power closing will pull the tailgate fullyclosed.

Unlocking/locking the driver's doorusing the mechanical keyi If youwant to centrally lock the vehicle usingthe mechanical key, begin by pressing thelocking button for the interior locking mech-anism while the driver's door is open. Thenlock the driver's door using the mechanicalkey.

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of thedriver's door as far as it will go.

X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise to position1.

X To lock: turn themechanical key clockwise asfar as it will go to position1.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 72).If you lock the vehicle as described above, thefuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarmsystem is not armed.

Cargo compartment

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

Cargo compartment 81

Openingandclosing

Z

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rearwhen opened. Therefore, make sure thatthere is sufficient clearance above and behindthe tailgate.

The opening dimensions of the tailgate can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 384).You should preferably place luggage or loads inthe cargo compartment. Observe the loadingguidelines (Y page 294).Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com-partment. You could otherwise lock yourselfout.You can:Rclose the tailgate manually from outsideRopen and close the tailgate automaticallyfrom outsideRopen and close the tailgate automaticallyfrom insideRlimit the opening angle of the tailgateRunlock the tailgate from inside with the emer-gency release

Tailgate reversing featureOn vehicles with the tailgate remote closing fea-ture, the tailgate is equipped with automaticobstacle recognition with a reversing feature. Ifa solid object blocks or restricts the tailgatewhen automatically opening or closing, this pro-cedure is stopped. If the tailgate is stopped dur-ing the closing procedure, it will open againautomatically. The automatic obstacle recogni-tion with reversing feature is only an aid. It is nota substitute for your attentiveness when open-ing and closing the tailgate.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not respond:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingersRover the lastÓ in (8 mm) of the closingmovement

The reversing feature cannot prevent some-one from becoming trapped in these situa-tions in particular. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, orRpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door orRpress the closing or locking button on thetailgate orRpull the handle on the tailgate

Opening and closing manually fromoutside

Opening

X Press the% button on the SmartKey.X Pull handle: and release it.The tailgate opens automatically.

82 Cargo compartmentOp

eningandclosing

Closing

X Pull the tailgate down using recess:.X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the&button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.

i If a KEYLESS-GOkey is detected in the cargocompartment, the tailgate will not lock.

Opening/closing automatically fromoutside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetailgate.Rpull the handle on the tailgate

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgate

is open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rearwhen opened. Therefore, make sure thatthere is sufficient clearance above and behindthe tailgate.

Two warning tones sound while the tailgate isopening or closing.The opening dimensions of the tailgate can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 384).

i Notes on the automatic reversing feature forthe tailgate (Y page 82).

Opening the tailgate automaticallyYou can open the tailgate automatically with theSmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.X Press and hold theF button on the Smart-Key until the tailgate opens.

orX When the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgatehandle and let it go again immediately.

orX With the tailgate stopped in an intermediateposition, pull the tailgate upwards.You can release the tailgate as soon as thetailgate starts to open.

Closing the tailgate automatically

Cargo compartment 83

Openingandclosing

Z

X To close: press closing button: in the tail-gate.

orX Press and hold theF button on the Smart-Key until the tailgate closes.You can release the button as soon as thetailgate starts to close.

orX Pull the tailgate downwards slightly.You can release the tailgate as soon as thetailgate starts to close.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: you can simultane-ously close and lock the tailgate.X Press locking button; in the tailgate.If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside thevehicle, the tailgate closes and locks. All thedoorsmust be shut and the SmartKey locatedin the vicinity of the tailgate.i The tailgate cannot be opened and closedwith the SmartKey if there is a SmartKey in theignition.If the tailgate touches an object while closing,the closing procedure is interrupted and thetailgate reopens.

i If a KEYLESS-GOkey is detected in the cargocompartment, the tailgate will not lock.

Opening/closing automatically frominside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the tailgate. In addi-tion, people may be standing in the closingarea or may enter the closing area, e.g. chil-dren, during the closing procedure. There is arisk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Release the remote operating switch imme-diately if somebody becomes trapped. To re-open the tailgate pull on the remote operatingswitch.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rearwhen opened. Therefore, make sure thatthere is sufficient clearance above and behindthe tailgate.

Two warning tones sound while the tailgate isopening or closing.The opening dimensions of the tailgate can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 384).

i Notes on the automatic reversing feature forthe tailgate (Y page 82).

Opening and closing

X To open:pull remote operating switch: forthe tailgate until the tailgate opens.

X To close: turn the SmartKey to position1 or2in the ignition lock.

X Press remote operating switch for tailgate:until the tailgate is completely closed.

You can open and close the tailgate from thedriver's seat when the vehicle is stationary andunlocked.

84 Cargo compartmentOp

eningandclosing

Limiting the opening angle of the tail-gate

General notes! Make sure there is sufficient clearance toopen the tailgate fully when setting the open-ing angle. The tailgate could otherwise bedamaged. Ideally, set the opening angle out-side.

ActivatingYou can limit the opening angle of the tailgate.This is possible in the top half of its openingrange, up to approximately 4 in (10 cm) beforethe stop.X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on thetailgate.

X To stop the opening procedure at thedesired position: press the closing button inthe tailgate or pull the handle on the outsideof the tailgate again.

X To save the position: press and hold theclosing button in the tailgate until two shorttones sound.The opening angle limiter is activated. Thetailgate will now stop in the stored positionwhen opening.

DeactivatingX Press and hold the closing button in the tail-gate until you hear a short tone.

Tailgate emergency release

General notes! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rearwhen opened. Therefore, make sure thatthere is sufficient clearance above and behindthe tailgate.

The opening dimensions of the tailgate can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 384).If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked:Rusing the SmartKey, orRusing the remote operating switch in the doorcontrol panel:

Use the emergency release.

Opening

X Take mechanical key; out of the SmartKey(Y page 76).

X Insert mechanical key; or a suitable tool,e.g. a thin screwdriver, into opening: in thepaneling and push it in.The tailgate is released.

X Open the tailgate.X Insert mechanical key; into the SmartKey(Y page 76).

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

Side windows 85

Openingandclosing

Z

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-cle. Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts a side window during the closingprocess, the side window opens again automat-ically. However, the automatic reversing featureis only an aid and does not relieve you of theresponsibility of paying attention when closing aside window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the side window again man-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are located onthe driver's door. There is also a switch on eachdoor for the corresponding side window.The switches on the driver's door take prece-dence.

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open manually: press and hold the cor-responding switch.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To close manually: pull the correspondingswitch and hold it.

X To close fully: pull the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again.

If you press the switch beyond the point ofresistance and release, automatic operation isstarted in the corresponding direction. You canstop automatic operation by pressing/pullingthe switch again.You can continue to operate the side windowsafter you switch off the engine or remove theSmartKey. This function is available for up to fiveminutes or until the driver's or front-passengerdoor is opened.The side windows cannot be operated from therear when the override feature for the side win-dows is activated (Y page 62).

Opening and closing the hinged sidewindowsThe hinged side windows are operated electri-cally from the from the driver's seat.

86 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open fully: press switch: and release it.X To close fully: pull switch: and release it.X To stop the closing procedure: pressswitch: again.

If the hinged side windows become blocked dur-ing closing, the closing procedure is stopped.The hinged side windows then open again fully.

Convenience opening

General notesVehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GOstart function: you can ventilate the vehiclebefore you start driving.To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out thefollowing functions simultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the hinged side windowsRopen the sliding sunroof or the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel and the rollersunblindsRswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver'sseat

The convenience opening feature can only beoperated using the SmartKey. The SmartKeymust be close to the vehicle. For vehicles with-out KEYLESS-GO, the SmartKey must be nearthe driver's door handle.The "convenience opening" feature is also avail-able when the vehicle is unlocked.

Convenience openingX VehicleswithoutKEYLESS-GO: point the tipof the SmartKey at the door handle on thedriver's door.

X Press and hold the% button until the sidewindows and the sliding sunroof or panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel are in thedesired position.If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel are closed, theroller sunblinds are opened first.

X Press and hold the% button again until thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel isin the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening: releasethe% button.

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

When you lock the vehicle, you can simultane-ously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the hinged side windowsRclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close the rollersunblinds.Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:RRelease the& button to interrupt the clos-ing procedure.RPress and hold the% button to open.

Side windows 87

Openingandclosing

Z

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:RRelease the sensor surfaces on the exteriordoor handle to interrupt the closing proce-dure.RTo open, pull the same door handle immedi-ately and hold it firmly. The door windows andthe sliding sunroof will open for as long as thedoor handle is held but the door is notopened.

Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:Rthe side window (Y page 86)Rthe sliding sunroof (Y page 90)Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel (Y page 90)

Using the SmartKeyThe SmartKey must be close to the vehicle. Forvehicles without KEYLESS-GO, the SmartKeymust be near the driver's door handle.X VehicleswithoutKEYLESS-GO:point the tipof the SmartKey at the door handle on thedriver's door.

X Press and hold the& button until the sidewindows and the sliding sunroof or the pano-rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel arefully closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Press and hold the& button again until theroller sunblinds of the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing: releasethe& button.

Using KEYLESS-GO

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows and thesliding sunroof or the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.i Make sure you only touch recessed sensorsurface:.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel are closed.

X Vehicles with a panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel: touch recessedsensor surface: on the door handle againuntil the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:releaserecessed sensor surface: on the door han-dle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 86).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switch onthe door control panel until the side window iscompletely closed (Y page 86).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the respective side window remains closedafter the button is released, then it has been

88 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat thesteps above.

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

A side window cannot beclosed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannot beclosed and you cannotsee the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing fea-ture.

Sliding sunroof

Important safety notesYour vehicle may be equipped with a slidingsunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel. In the following section, the term"sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroofvariants.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

Sliding sunroof 89

Openingandclosing

Z

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free ofsnow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions mayoccur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could bedamaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged ifwater enters the vehicle interior.

Resonance noises can occur in addition to theusual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof isopen. They are caused by minor pressure fluc-tuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi-tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side win-dow. The noise will be reduced or eliminated.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureYour vehicle may be equipped with a slidingsunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel. In the following section, the term"sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroofvariants.The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts the sliding sunroof during the closingprocess, the sliding sunroof opens again auto-matically. However, the automatic reversingfeature is only an aid and does not relieve you ofthe responsibility of paying attention when clos-ing the sliding sunroof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closingmovement

Rduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof againman-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during theautomatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the2 switch in the corre-sponding direction.

If you press the2 switch beyond the point ofresistance, an automatic opening/closing proc-ess is started in the corresponding direction.You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.When opening and raising the roof, automaticoperation is only available if the sliding sunroofis in the closed position.The sun protection cover automatically opensalong with the sliding sunroof. You can open or

90 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

close the sun protection cover manually whenthe sliding sunroof is raised or closed.You can continue to operate the sliding sunroofafter switching off the engine or removing theSmartKey from the ignition lock. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until the driv-er's or front-passenger door is opened.

Resetting! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be openedor closed fully after resetting, contact a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not movesmoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear(Y page 90).

X Keep the2 switch pressed for anothersecond.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fullyopened and closed again (Y page 90).

X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.

Operating the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel

Opening and closing

: To raise; To open= To close/lowerThe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelcan only be opened when the roller sunblind isopen.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the2 switch in the corre-sponding direction.

If you press/pull the2 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, automatic operation is star-ted in the corresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by pressing/pulling theswitch again.The automatic raising feature is available onlywhen the panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is closed.

Operating the roller sunblinds for thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trappedbetween the roller sunblind and frame or slid-ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-ing. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing, make sure that nobody parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-blind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only beopened and closed together when the pano-rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.

Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblinds are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts a roller sunblind during the closingprocess, the roller sunblind opens again auto-matically. However, the automatic reversingfeature is only an aid and does not relieve you ofthe responsibility of paying attention when clos-ing the roller sunblinds.

Sliding sunroof 91

Openingandclosing

Z

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react in par-ticular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingers. This means that the reversing featurecannot prevent someone being trapped inthese situations. There is a risk of injury.When closing the roller sunblind, make surethat no body parts are in the sweep area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during theautomatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Opening and closing the roller sun-blinds

: To open; To open= To closeX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the2 switch in the corre-sponding direction.

If you press the2 switch beyond the point ofresistance, an automatic opening/closing proc-ess is started in the corresponding direction.You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.

Resetting the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel and the rollersunblinds! If the panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel and the roller sunblinds cannot be fullyopened or closed after resetting, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel and the roller sunblinds if the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel or the rollersunblinds do not move smoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the2 switch repeatedly to the point ofresistance in the direction of arrow= untilthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is fully closed.

X Keep the2 switch pulled for an additionalsecond.

X Pull the2 switch repeatedly to the point ofresistance in the direction of arrow= untilthe roller sunblinds are fully closed.

X Keep the2 switch pulled for an additionalsecond.

X Make sure that the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds canbe fully opened again.

X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.

Problems with the sliding sunroofYour vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel. In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof variants.

G WARNINGIf you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the slidingsunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Partsof the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.

92 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing processThe closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The sliding sunroof can-not be closed and youcannot see the cause.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the2 switch inthe overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and holdit until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and thenreopens slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the2 switch inthe overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and holdit until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing fea-ture.

Sliding sunroof 93

Openingandclosing

Z

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

Observe the following when adjusting steeringwheel:, seat belt; and driver's seat=:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag aspossible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seatcushion.Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and youcan depress the pedals properly.Rthe back of your head is supported at eye levelby the center of the head restraint.Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in the instrumentcluster clearly.

Ryou should have a good overview of trafficconditions.Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the bodyand is routed across the center of your shoul-der and across your hips in the pelvic area.

Further related subjects:RElectrical seat adjustment (Y page 96)RAdjusting the steering wheel mechanically(Y page 105) or electrically (Y page 106)RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 44).RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exteriormirrors (Y page 107).RVehicleswithmemory function: storing theseat, steering wheel, exterior mirror andHead-up Display settings with the memoryfunction (Y page 110)

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is noSmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 46) and "Children in the Vehicle"(Y page 57).

94 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seat heat-ing should also not be used to dry the seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see "Interior care".Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.Do not place sharp objects on the seatcushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Theseats should only be occupied by passen-gers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating materi-als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmov-ing the seats back. There is a risk that theseats and/or the objects could be damaged.

i It is not possible to remove the headrestraints from the front seats. The rear-com-partment head restraints, however, can beremoved (Y page 98).For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

i Further related subjects:RCargo compartment enlargement (foldingdown the rear bench seat) (Y page 297)

Seats 95

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the seats electrically

: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-SAFE® has been triggered, the front-passenger seat will bemoved to a better posi-tion if it was previously in an unfavorable posi-tion.

i Vehicles with memory function: when theseat is moved forwards or backwards, theheadrest is moved up or down automatically.

Adjusting the head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased risk

of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front andrear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust theheight and angle of the head restraints to thecorrect position.Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust thehead restraint so that it is as close as possible toyour head.Observe the important safety notes regardingthe seats (Y page 94).

Adjusting the head restraints manually

Adjusting the head restraint height

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: in the direc-tion of the arrow and push the head restraintdown to the desired position.

96 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the fore/aft position of thehead restraint

With this function you can adjust the distancebetween the head restraint and the back of theseat occupant's head.X To move forwards: pull the head restraintforwards in the direction of the arrow until itengages.There are several notches.

X Tomove backwards: press and hold releasebutton: and push the head restraint back-wards.

X When the head restraint is in the desired posi-tion, release the button and make sure thatthe head restraint is engaged in position.i Adjust the head restraint so that the back ofyour head is as close to the head restraint aspossible.

Adjusting the head restraints electri-callyX To adjust the head restraint height: slidethe switch for the head restraint adjustment(Y page 96) up or down in the direction of thearrow.

Adjusting the luxury head restraints

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-handside bolster: into the desired position.

X To adjust the fore/aft position of the headrestraint: push or pull the head restraint inthe direction of arrow;.i Adjust the head restraint so that the back ofyour head is as close to the head restraint aspossible.

Rear seat head restraints

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

X Once the head restraint is fully lowered, pressrelease catch:.

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

Seats 97

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Removing and installing the rear seathead restraintsX To remove: pull the head restraint up to thestop.

X Press release catch: and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: insert the head restraint so thatthe notches on the bar are on the left whenviewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hear itengage in position.

Rear seats (second and third row ofseats)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the seat and backrest are not engaged, theycan fold forwards, e.g. in the event of suddenbraking or an accident.RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to beforced into the seat belt by a seat or back-rest which is not engaged. The seat belt canno longer offer the intended level of pro-tection and could even cause injuries.RA child restraint system would no longer beanchored or positioned correctly andwouldnot be able to perform its required function.RThe seat backrests cannot restrain objectsor loads in the cargo compartment.

There is an increased risk of injury.Always make sure that the seat and backrestare engaged as described:Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seatwith the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureRafter you have adjusted the seatRafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature hasbeen usedRafter the cargo compartment enlargementhas been folded forwards

G WARNINGThe seat does not engage in the entry/exitposition. The seat could fold back suddenly,

e.g. when accelerating, braking, changingdirection suddenly or in the event of an acci-dent. Persons in the sweep of the seat couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.Always fold back a seat which has been foldedforwards before you pull away.Make sure thatthe seat and backrest engage fully.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Adjusting the backrest angle (secondrow of seats)

You can adjust the angle of the backrests in thesecond row of seats. There are ten detent posi-tions to choose from.X Pull the left or right release lever; upwardsin the direction of the arrow until relevantbackrest: is fully released.

X Pull backrest: forwards in the direction ofthe arrow and allow it to engage.

X To ensure that the backrest has engaged, leanfirmly against backrest:.

98 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Folding the seats up/down (third row ofseats)

General notes! Make sure that there is nothing on the fol-ded-down seats in the cargo compartment.The cargo compartment must be empty forthe third row of seats to be folded up. Theseats or the objects in the cargo compart-ment could otherwise be damaged.Make sure that the seats in the third row areempty and not blocked before folding themdown.

The 3rd row of seats consists of two electricallyfoldable individual seats, which can be loweredinto the cargo compartment.If the seat is not correctly locked in position, thedisplay message: 3rd Seat Row, Right NotLocked appears in the multifunction display.If you fold the seat back until it engages, thedisplay message disappears.Pull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is fullyengaged.The switches for folding the left or right-handseats up and down are marked: L for the left-hand seat when viewed in the direction of travel,R for the right-hand seat when viewed in thedirection of travel.

Folding forwards/back in the rear com-partment

Example: R switchX To fold down: fold the right-hand outer seatin the second row of seats forwards(Y page 100).

X Briefly pull switch:.The seat folds up.

X To stop the automatic folding: briefly pullswitch: again.

X To fold down: briefly press switch:.The seat folds down.

X To stop the automatic folding: briefly pressswitch: again.

Folding down/up in the cargo compart-ment

Example: L switchX To fold down: fold the right-hand outer seatin the second row of seats forwards(Y page 100).

X Briefly press switch:.The seat folds up.

X To stop the automatic folding: briefly pressswitch: again.

X To fold down: briefly pull switch:.The seat folds down.

X To stop the automatic folding: briefly pullswitch: again.

Detachable panel (third row of seats)! If there are objects underneath the seat, theseat can no longer be folded up or down fully.The seat could be damaged.Only drivewith the panel completely installed.

Seats 99

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

If you drop objects underneath the seats in thethird row, you can remove the panel in order toreach beneath the seat.X To open: fold the corresponding seat up ordown (Y page 99).

X Once the seat is folded halfway up or down,briefly press the button again to stop theautomatic movement.

X Grasp the panel recess.X Pull the panel in the direction of the arrow andremove it.

X To close: fold the corresponding seat up ordown (Y page 99).

X Once the seat is folded halfway up or down,briefly press the button again to stop theautomatic movement.

X Attach the panel using the guide pins.X Push the panel downwards until it engages.X Fold the seat up and down fully to check thatthe panel is seated correctly.

Folding down the seats in the secondrow manually

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf the seat and backrest are not engaged, theycan fold forwards, e.g. in the event of suddenbraking or an accident.RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to beforced into the seat belt by a seat or back-rest which is not engaged. The seat belt canno longer offer the intended level of pro-tection and could even cause injuries.RA child restraint system would no longer beanchored or positioned correctly andwouldnot be able to perform its required function.RThe seat backrests cannot restrain objectsor loads in the cargo compartment.

There is an increased risk of injury.Always make sure that the seat and backrestare engaged as described:Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seatwith the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureRafter you have adjusted the seat

Rafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature hasbeen usedRafter the cargo compartment enlargementhas been folded forwards

G WARNINGThe seat does not engage in the entry/exitposition. The seat could fold back suddenly,e.g. when accelerating, braking, changingdirection suddenly or in the event of an acci-dent. Persons in the sweep of the seat couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.Always fold back a seat which has been foldedforwards before you pull away.Make sure thatthe seat and backrest engage fully.

General notesGetting into or out of the third row of seats: youcan fold forward the right outer seat in the sec-ond row of seats.If the right outer rear seat in the second row ofseats is in the entry/exit position: the displaymessage: 2nd Seat Row, Right Not Lockedappears in the multifunction display, for exam-ple.If you fold the seat back until it engages, thedisplay message disappears.Pull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is fullyengaged.

i Further related subjects:RCargo compartment enlargement (foldingthe second row of seats forwards)(Y page 297)RFolding the seats in the third row forwards/back (Y page 99)

Entry position

100 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

X Move the head restraint to the lowest position(Y page 97).

X Pull release handle; in the direction of thearrow to the pressure point and hold it in thisposition.The backrest folds forwards.

You have two options for folding the seat downfully.X Pull release handle; again in the direction ofthe arrow to the pressure point and hold it inthis position.

orX Pull on release loop: in the direction of thearrow and hold in this position.

X Lift up the seat until it folds forwards.i Vehicles with memory function: the frontseats move forwards slightly.

Entry position

Exit positionG WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

i Further related subjects:RImportant safety notes on air bags(Y page 46)RSecuring children in the vehicle(Y page 57)

If you wish to exit the third row of seats, folddown the outer seat on the right-hand side asfollows.The release loop for the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture is located at the bottom on the back of theright outer seat in the second row of seats.X Pull on release loop: in the direction of thearrow and hold in this position.The backrest folds forwards.

X Pull on release loop: again in the directionof the arrow and hold in this position.

X Lift up the seat until it folds forwards.i Vehicles with memory function: the frontseats move forwards slightly.

Exit position

i Vehicles with memory function: in order toreturn the front seats to the saved position,call up the saved seat setting using the mem-ory buttons.

Seats 101

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Moving the outer seats back to the normalposition (second row of seats)G WARNINGIf the seat and backrest are not engaged, theycan fold forwards, e.g. in the event of suddenbraking or an accident.RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to beforced into the seat belt by a seat or back-rest which is not engaged. The seat belt canno longer offer the intended level of pro-tection and could even cause injuries.RA child restraint system would no longer beanchored or positioned correctly andwouldnot be able to perform its required function.RThe seat backrests cannot restrain objectsor loads in the cargo compartment.

There is an increased risk of injury.Always make sure that the seat and backrestare engaged as described:Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seatwith the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureRafter you have adjusted the seatRafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature hasbeen usedRafter the cargo compartment enlargementhas been folded forwards

G WARNINGThe seat does not engage in the entry/exitposition. The seat could fold back suddenly,e.g. when accelerating, braking, changingdirection suddenly or in the event of an acci-dent. Persons in the sweep of the seat couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.Always fold back a seat which has been foldedforwards before you pull away.Make sure thatthe seat and backrest engage fully.

X To lock the seat: fold back the seat until itengages.

X Fold back the backrest until it engages.

Folding down the seats in the secondrow electrically

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf the seat and backrest are not engaged, theycan fold forwards, e.g. in the event of suddenbraking or an accident.RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to beforced into the seat belt by a seat or back-rest which is not engaged. The seat belt canno longer offer the intended level of pro-tection and could even cause injuries.RA child restraint system would no longer beanchored or positioned correctly andwouldnot be able to perform its required function.RThe seat backrests cannot restrain objectsor loads in the cargo compartment.

There is an increased risk of injury.Always make sure that the seat and backrestare engaged as described:Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seatwith the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureRafter you have adjusted the seatRafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature hasbeen usedRafter the cargo compartment enlargementhas been folded forwards

G WARNINGThe seat does not engage in the entry/exitposition. The seat could fold back suddenly,e.g. when accelerating, braking, changingdirection suddenly or in the event of an acci-dent. Persons in the sweep of the seat couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.Always fold back a seat which has been foldedforwards before you pull away.Make sure thatthe seat and backrest engage fully.

General notesTo enter or exit the third row of seats: the outerleft and right seats of the second row can befolded down electrically.

102 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

One of the outer seats of the second row is in theentry/exit position: the multifunction displayshows, e.g. the 2nd Seat Row, Right NotLocked display message.If you fold the seat back until it engages, thedisplay message disappears.Pull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is fullyengaged.

i Further related subjects:RCargo compartment enlargement (foldingthe second row of seats forwards)(Y page 297)RFolding the seats in the third row forwards/back (Y page 99)

Folding down the seatsThe seats can be folded down electrically if thevehicle is stationary and the respective reardoor is open.

X Press button:.The head restraint retracts, the backrest foldsforwards and the seat folds forwards.The seat can bemanually returned to its initialposition (Y page 100).

Adjusting the multicontour seatThe multicontour seat can be adjusted via themultimedia system (see the separate operatinginstructions).

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

: Raises the backrest contour; Softens the backrest contour= Lowers the backrest contour? Hardens the backrest contourYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimum sup-port for your back.

Seat heating and seat ventilation

Switching the seat heating on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

Seats 103

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Driver's and front-passenger seat

Rear seatsThe three red indicator lamps in the button indi-cate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 3 to level 2 after approximately eightminutes.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches off approx-imately 35 minutes after it is set to level 1.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 138).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Activating and deactivating seat venti-lation

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you have selected.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 138).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows and the slid-ing sunroof using the "Convenience opening"feature (Y page 87). The seat ventilation ofthe driver's seat automatically switches to thehighest level.

104 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The seat heating or seatventilation has switchedoff prematurely or can-not be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seatventilation will switch back on automatically.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no SmartKey inthe ignition lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel man-ually

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel is unlocked while thevehicle is in motion, it could change positionunexpectedly. This could cause you to lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Before starting off, make sure the steeringwheel is locked. Never unlock the steeringwheel while the vehicle is in motion.

: Release lever; Adjusts the steering wheel height= Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-

and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever: down completely.The steering column is unlocked.

X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-tion.

X Push release lever: up completely.The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked. Whendoing so, try to push the steering wheel up ordown or try to move it in the fore-and-aftdirection.

Steering wheel 105

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the steering wheel electri-cally

: Adjusts the steering wheel height; Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-

and-aft adjustment)The steering wheel can also be adjusted whenthe SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock.

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 106)RStoring settings (Y page 110)

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc-tion of arrow: or;.Indicator lamp= lights up or goes out.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch offthe ignition and open the driver's door, thesteering wheel heating is deactivated.Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, thesteering wheel heating is deactivated.

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The steering wheel heat-ing has switched off pre-maturely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.

Move the steering wheel adjustment lever ifthere is a risk of entrapment by the steeringwheel. The adjustment process is stopped.

Press one of the memory function position but-tons. This function is only available on vehicleswith memory function.

G WARNINGIf children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture, they can become trapped, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.

106 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting inand out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer(Y page 240).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards when you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO inposition 1Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is inposition 0 or 1 in the ignition lock

i The steering wheel only moves upwards if ithas not already reached the upper stop.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the last selectedposition when:Rthe driver's door is closedRyou insert the SmartKey into the ignition lockorRyou press the Start/Stop button once on vehi-cles with KEYLESS-GO

When you close the driver's door with the igni-tion switched on, the steering wheel is alsoautomatically moved to the previously set posi-tion.The last position of the steering column is storedwhen you:Rswitch the ignition offRsave the setting with the memory function(Y page 110).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-gered in an accident, the steering column willmove upwardswhen the driver's door is opened.This occurs irrespective of the position of theSmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it eas-ier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is onlyoperational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 240).

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glaremode: flick anti-glare lever: for-wards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

Mirrors 107

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 138).

X Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but-ton:.Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side:press button;.The indicator lamp in the corresponding but-ton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again after sometime. You can adjust the selected exteriormirror using button= as long as the indicatorlamp is lit.

X Press button= up, down, or to the right orleft until you have adjusted the exterior mirrorto the correct position. You should have agood overview of traffic conditions.

The convex exteriormirrors provide a larger fieldof vision.The exterior mirrors are heated automatically ifthe rearwindowdefroster is switched on and theoutside temperature is low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 138).

X Briefly press:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-rior mirrors.

Resetting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must bereset. Otherwise, the exterior mirrors will notfold in when you select the "Fold inmirrors whenlocking" function in the on-board computer(Y page 240).X Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X Briefly press:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 240):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automati-cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle andthen open the driver's or front-passengerdoor.

108 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically folding exte-rior mirrors: move the exterior mirror intothe correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exteriormirrors: press and hold mirror-folding but-ton: until you hear a click and the mirrorengages in position audibly.The mirror housing is engaged again and youcan adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 107).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyteis harmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the electrolyte,observe the following:RRinse off the electrolyte from your skinimmediately with water.RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out ofyour eyes thoroughly with clean water.RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.RIf electrolyte comes into contact with yourskin or hair or is swallowed, seek medicalattention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with electrolyte.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror onthe driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions are met simul-taneously:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-sor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interior lightingis switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking positionYou can position the front-passenger side exte-rior mirror in such a way that you can see therear wheel on that side as soon as you engagereverse gear. You can store this position.

Using reverse gear

: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror; Button for the front-passenger side exterior

mirror= Adjustment button? Memory button MX Bring the vehicle to a standstill.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X Press button;.

Mirrors 109

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengersidemoves to the default setting parking posi-tion.

X Use button= to adjust the exterior mirror toa position that allows you to see the rearwheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to another posi-tion, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving position.

Using the memory buttonYou can store the parking position of the exte-rior mirror on the front-passenger side usingmemory buttonM?. The reverse gearmust notbe engaged during the process.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X Press button;.X Use button= to adjust the exterior mirror toa position that allows you to see the rearwheel and the curb.

X Press memory button M? and one of thearrows on button= within three seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat thesteps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button;.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger sidemoves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rif you press button: for the exterior mirroron the driver's side

Memory function

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The memory function can be used at any time,e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the ignitionlock.With the memory function, you can store up tothree different settings, e.g. for three differentpeople.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRdriver's side: steering wheel positionRdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrorson the driver's and front-passenger sides

110 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

X Adjust the seat (Y page 96).X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel(Y page 106) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 107).

X Pressmemory buttonM and then pressmem-ory position button 1, 2 or 3 within three sec-onds.The settings are stored in the selected presetposition. A tone sounds when the settingshave been completed.

The memory function can still be used if theSmartKey has been removed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant storage positionbutton 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheeland exteriormirrors are in the stored position.

The setting procedure is interrupted as soon asyou release the storage position buttons.

Memory function 111

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switched oneven during the daytime. In some countries,operation of the headlamps varies due to legalrequirements and self-imposed obligations.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 113)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 239)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4c Automatic headlampmode, controlled

by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toc.The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand-ing lamps) switches off automatically if you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0 in the ignition lock

Automatic headlamp modec is the favored light switch position. Thelight setting is automatically selected accordingto the brightness of the ambient light (excep-tion: poor visibility due to weather conditionssuch as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position1 in the ignition lock: theparking lamps are switched on/off automat-ically depending on the brightness of theambient light.RWith the engine running (USA only): if youhave switched on the Daytime RunningLights function in the on-board computer,the daytime running lamps or the parkinglamps and low-beam headlamps are switchedon or off automatically depending on thebrightness of the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlamp mode:turn the light switch toc .

G WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-ing at all times.Canada only:The daytime running lamps improve the visibilityof your vehicle during the day. The daytime run-ning lamps function is required by law in Can-ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if you move the selector lever from adrive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after threeminutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn thelight switch to the T position, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings take prec-edence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:

112 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

The daytime running lamps improve the visibilityof your vehicle during the day. To do this, thedaytime running lamps function must beswitched on using the on-board computer(Y page 239).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

Low-beam headlampsEven if the light sensor does not detect that it isdark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-lamps switch onwhen the ignition is switched onand the light switch is set to the L position.This is a particularly useful function in the eventof rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-tion 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The green L indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thickfog. Please take note of the country-specificregulations for the use of rear fog lamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 orstart the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orc .X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Parking lamps! If the battery charge is very low, the parkinglamps or standing lamps are automaticallyswitched off to enable the next engine start.Always park your vehicle safely and in awell litarea, in accordance with the relevant legalstipulations. Avoid using the T parkinglamps over a period of several hours. If pos-sible, switch on the right-hand X or left-hand W standing lamps.

X To switch on: turn the light switch to T.The green T indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey should not be in the ignition lock orit should be in position 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand side ofthe vehicle) or X (right-hand side of thevehicle).

Vehicles towing a trailer: both the right-handand left-hand standing lamps (tail lamps) arealways illuminated on the trailer.

Combination switch

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the direction ofarrow; or?.

X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:turn the light switch to L orÃ.

X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched onwhen it is dark andthe engine is running.

Exterior lighting 113

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam head-lamps:move the combination switch back toits normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: ifAdaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, it auto-matically controls activation and deactivation ofthe high-beam headlamps (Y page 115).

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazard warninglamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch, onlythe turn signal lamp on the correspondingside of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:press button:.

The hazard warning lamps automatically switchon if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speedof above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to astandstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli-cation.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate if theignition is switched off.

Intelligent Light System

General notesThe Intelligent Light System is a system thatadjusts the headlamps automatically to suit theprevailing driving and weather conditions. Itoffers advanced functions for improved illumi-nation of the road surface, e.g. depending on thevehicle speed or weather conditions. The sys-tem includes the active light function, corneringlight function, highway mode and extendedrange fog lamps. The system is only active whenit is dark.You can activate or deactivate the "IntelligentLight System" using the on-board computer(Y page 239).

Active light functionThe active light function is a system that movesthe headlamps according to the steering move-ments of the front wheels. In this way, relevantareas remain illuminated while driving. Thisallows you to identify pedestrians, cyclists andanimals.Active: when the lights are switched on.

Cornering light functionThe cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better visi-bility in tight bends, for example. It can only beactivated when the low-beam headlamps areswitched on.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turnthe steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off after nomore than three minutes.

Highway modeHighwaymode increases the range of the beam.Active:if you are driving at a speed above110 km/h and do not make any large steeringmovements for at least 1,000 m or if you aredriving at a speed above 130 km/h.

114 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Not active: if you are driving at speeds below80 km/h following activation.

Extended range fog lampsThe extended range fog lamps reduce the glareexperienced by the driver and improve the illu-mination of the edge of the road.Active: if you are driving at speeds below40 mph (70 km/h) and you switch on the rearfog lamp.Not active: if, following activation, you are driv-ing at speeds above 60mph (100 km/h) or if youswitch off the rear fog lamp

Off-road lightsThe off-road lights facilitate the early recogni-tion of objects/obstacles when driving off-roadthanks to a symmetrical, wider and brighter dis-tribution of light from the low-beam headlamps.Active: when driving at speeds no faster than30 mph (50 km/h) and the off-road programselector wheel is in position 1 or 2.Not active: when driving at speeds above30 mph (50 km/h).When the off-road lights are switched on, thecornering light function is permanently activa-ted, the active light function is deactivated andthe headlamp range control is set to staticmode.

Cornering light functionThe cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better visi-bility in tight bends, for example. It can only beactivated when the low-beam headlamps areswitched on.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turnthe steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off after nomore than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notesYou can use this function to set the headlampsto change between low beam and high beamautomatically. The system recognizes vehicleswith their lights on, either approaching from theopposite direction or traveling in front of yourvehicle, and consequently switches the head-lamps from high beam to low beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beamheadlamp range depending on the distance tothe other vehicle. Once the system no longerdetects any other vehicles, it reactivates thehigh-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead control panel.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierOn very rare occasions, Adaptive HighbeamAssist may fail to recognize other road usersthat have lights, or may recognize them toolate. In this, or in similar situations, the auto-matic high-beam headlamps will not be deac-tivated orwill be activated regardless. There isa risk of an accident.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive HighbeamAssist is only an aid. You areresponsible for adjusting the vehicle's lightingto the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-ditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured

Exterior lighting 115

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/offX To switch on: turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunctiondisplay lights up when it is dark and the lightsensor activates the low-beam headlamps.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between the vehi-cle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other roadusers have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 16mph (25 km/h) or other road usershave been detected or the roads are ade-quately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The _ indi-cator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To switch off:move the combination switchback to its normal position or move the lightswitch to another position.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunctiondisplay goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality of theheadlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting on= v Switches the rear interior lighting on/

off? | Switches the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p Switches the right-hand front reading

lamp on/offB Switches the automatic interior lighting con-

trol on

Rear overhead control panel (second row of seats): To switch the reading lamp on/off

116 Interior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Rear overhead control panel (third row of seats): Reading lamp

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeexcept when the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.The color and brightness for the ambient lightingmay be set via the multimedia system (see theseparate operating instructions).

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on: set the switch to center posi-tionB.

X To switch off: set the switch to the |position.

The interior lighting automatically switches on ifyou:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted viathe multimedia system; see the separate oper-ating instructions.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automatically ifthe vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsive emer-gency lighting:press the hazard warninglamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using theSmartKey.

Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LEDheadlamps)

The front and rear light clusters of your vehicleare equipped with LED bulbs. Do not replace thevehicle's bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop which has the necessary spe-cialist knowledge and tools to carry out theworkrequired.Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety.You must therefore make sure that these func-tion correctly at all times. Have the headlampsetting checked regularly.

Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halo-gen headlamps)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if itsglass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hotRyou drop itRyou scratch itUse bulbs only in closed lamps that have beendesigned for this purpose. Only install spare

Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) 117

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-age.Marks on the glass tube reduce the service lifeof the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube withyour bare hands. If necessary, clean the glasstube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub itoff with a lint-free cloth.Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.Do not allow bulbs to come into contact withliquids.Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 118).Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourselfreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.If the new bulb still does not light up, consult aqualified specialist workshop.Headlamps and lights are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times. Havethe headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview of bulb replacement - bulbtypesYou can replace the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Halogen headlamps: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W= Turn signal: W 5 W BV

Removing and installing the cover inthe front wheel housing

Youmust remove the cover from the front wheelhousing before you can change the front bulbs.X To remove: switch off the lights.X Turn the front wheel inwards.X Remove securing pin; using a suitable tool.X Slide cover: up and remove it.X To install:insert cover: again and slide itdown until it engages.

X Insert securing pin;.

Low-beam headlamps

X Remove the cover in the front wheel housing(Y page 118).

X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwise andremove it.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull out.

X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; and turn it clockwise.

118 Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)Lightsandwindshieldwipers

X Press on housing cover: and turn it to theright.

X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing(Y page 118).

High-beam headlamps

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwise andremove it.

X Pull lever= upwards and remove bulbholder;.

X Remove the bulb from bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Simultaneously press on bulb holder; andpull lever= downwards.

X Press on housing cover: and turn it clock-wise.

Turn signals

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.

X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwise andremove it.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull out.

X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; and turn it clockwise.X Press on housing cover: and turn it to theright.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wipers whenthe windshield is dry, as this could damagethe wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-lected on thewindshield can scratch the glassif wiping takes place when the windshield isdry.If it is necessary to switch on the windshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, always usewasher fluid when operating the windshieldwipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on thewindshield after the vehicle has been washedin an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-dues may be the reason for this. Clean thewindshield using washer fluid after washingthe vehicle in an automatic car wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due tooptical influences and the windshield becom-ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.This could then damage the windshield wiperblades or scratch the windshield.For this reason, you should always switch offthe windshield wipers in dry weather.

Windshield wipers 119

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set

to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipeC î To wipe with washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automatically accordingto the intensity of the rain. In the Å position,the rain sensor is more sensitive than inthe Ä position, causing the windshield wiperto wipe more frequently.Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: thewasher fluid is fed through the wiper blades andwhen wiping with washer fluid î the washerfluid is emitted directly from the blades.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield willno longer be wiped properly. This could preventyou from observing the traffic conditions.

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Combination switch: è Rear window wiper switch2 b Wipes with washer fluid3 I Switches on intermittent wiping4 0 Switches off intermittent wiping5 b Wipes with washer fluidX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 138).

X Turn switch: on the combination switch tothe corresponding position.When the rear window wiper is switched on,the icon appears in the instrument cluster.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, makesure that you touch only the wiper arm of thewiper.

! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper armhas been folded away from the windshield/rear window.Never fold a windshield wiper arm without awiper blade back onto the windshield/rearwindow.

120 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you release thewiper arm without a wiper blade and it fallsonto the windshield/rear window, the wind-shield/rear window may be damaged by theforce of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Removing the wiper bladesX Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

X Firmly press release knob: and pull wiperblade; upwards from the wiper arm in thedirection of the arrow.

Installing the wiper blades

X Position newwiper blade: in the retainer onthe wiper arm and slide it into place in thedirection of the arrow.The wiper blade audibly engages.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-rectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing a wiper blade

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Fold wiper arm: away from the rear windowuntil it engages.

X Position wiper blade; at a right angle towiper arm:.

X Hold wiper arm: and press wiper blade;in the direction of the arrow until it releases.

X Remove wiper blade;.

Installing a wiper bladeX Place new wiper blade; onto wiper arm:.X Hold wiper arm: and press wiper blade;in the opposite direction to the arrow until itengages.

X Make sure that wiper blade; is seated cor-rectly.

X Position wiper blade; parallel to wiperarm:.

X Fold wiper arm: back onto the rear window.

Windshield wipers 121

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wipermovement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lock.

orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

122 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Overview of climate control systems

General notesObserve the settings recommended on the fol-lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fogup.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode only brieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-tion functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature andthe humidity in the vehicle interior and filtersundesirable substances out of the air.The residual heat function can only be activatedor deactivated with the ignition switched off(Y page 133).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period duringwarm weather, e.g. using the convenienceopening feature (Y page 87).This will speed up the cooling process and thedesired interior temperature will be reachedmore quickly.

If you start the engine using your smartphone,the last selected climate control setting is reac-tivated (Y page 140).

i The integrated filter filters out most parti-cles of dust and soot and completely filtersout pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutantsand odors. A clogged filter reduces theamount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.For this reason, you should always observethe interval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Maintenance Booklet. As itdepends on environmental conditions, e.g.heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-let.

i Vehicles with AIR-BALANCE package: inaddition to ionization, the vehicle has an airfilter with anti-allergenic properties that con-tribute to improved air filtration.

i It is possible that under certain circumstan-ces the residual heat function may be activa-ted automatically an hour after the SmartKeyhas been removed in order to dry the auto-matic climate control. The vehicle is then ven-tilated for 30 minutes.

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

USA onlyFront control panel

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 132)

Overview of climate control systems 123

Climatecontrol

= Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 132)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 130)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 133)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)E Increases the airflow (Y page 131)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)G Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 129)H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)

Canada onlyFront control panel

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 132)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 132)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 130)

Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 133)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 133)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)E Increases the airflow (Y page 131)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)G Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 129)H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)

124 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Rear control panel: Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic; Switches the rear climate control on/off= Directs the air distribution through the rear air vents? Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/offA Directs the air distribution through the footwell ventsB Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

USA onlyFront control panel

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 132)= Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 132)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 130)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 132)D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 129)E Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)

Overview of climate control systems 125

Climatecontrol

F Increases the airflow (Y page 131)G Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)H DisplayI Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 130)J Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 133)K Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)

Rear control panelL Increases the airflow (Y page 131)M Sets the temperature (Y page 131)N Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 130)O Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 131)P Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (Y page 103)Q Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 131)R Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 129)S Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)T Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (Y page 103)

Canada onlyFront control panel

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 132)= Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 133)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 130)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 132)D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 129)E Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)F Increases the airflow (Y page 131)G Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)H Display

126 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

I Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 130)J Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 133)K Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)

Rear control panelL Increases the airflow (Y page 131)M Sets the temperature (Y page 131)N Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 130)O Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 131)P Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (Y page 103)Q Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 131)R Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 129)S Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)T Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (Y page 103)

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control with additional rear-com-partment climate control

USA onlyFront control panel

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 132)= Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 132)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 130)

Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 133)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 132)D Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 129)E Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)F Increases the airflow (Y page 131)

Overview of climate control systems 127

Climatecontrol

G Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)Switches off climate control

H DisplayI Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 130)J Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 133)K Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)

Rear control panelL Increases the airflow (Y page 131)M Sets the temperature (Y page 131)N Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 130)O Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 131)P Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 131)Q Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 129)R Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)

Canada onlyFront control panel

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 132)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 132)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 130)

Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 133)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Switches the rear climate control on/offD Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 129)E Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)F Increases the airflow (Y page 131)G Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)H DisplayI Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 130)J Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 133)

128 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

K Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)

Rear control panelL Increases the airflow (Y page 131)M Sets the temperature (Y page 131)N Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 130)O Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 131)P Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 131)Q Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 129)R Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)

Optimum use of automatic climatecontrol

Optimum use of the automatic climatecontrolThe following contains notes and recommenda-tions on optimum use of the dual-zone or 3-zoneautomatic climate control.RYou can switch on climate control by using theà and¿ orà andÁ buttons.The indicator lamps in theà and¿ buttons or theà andÁ buttonslight up.RVehicles with 3-zone climate control:inautomatic mode, you can also use theñ button to set a climate mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level isrecommended.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" functionbriefly until the windshield is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. ifthere are unpleasant outside odors or when ina tunnel. Thewindows could otherwise fog up,since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle inair-recirculation mode.RVehicles with 3-zone climate control:usethe ZONE function to adopt the temperaturesettings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment aswell. The indicator lamp above theá but-ton goes out.RVehicles with 3-zone climate control:usethe "residual heat" function if youwant to heator ventilate the vehicle interior when the igni-tion is switched off. The residual heat function

can only be activated or deactivated with theignition switched off.RIf you change the settings of the climate con-trol system, the climate status displayappears for approximately three seconds atthe bottom of the screen in the multimediasystem display. You will see the current set-tings of the various climate control functions.

During automatic engine switch-off, the climatecontrol system only operates at a reduced capa-city. If you require the full climate control output,you can switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button (Y page 143).

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Activating/deactivating climate con-trol

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, the airsupply and air circulation are also switched off.The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch offclimate control only brieflyActivate climate control primarily using theà button (Y page 130).In the rear compartment, you can also switchclimate control on and off using theà and^ buttons.

Operating the climate control systems 129

Climatecontrol

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X To switch on: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set to auto-matic mode.

X To deactivate: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.

Switching cooling with air dehumidi-fication on/off

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press the¿ orÁ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ orÁ buttonlights up.

X To deactivate: press the¿ orÁ but-ton.The indicator lamp in the¿ orÁ buttongoes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function has a delayed switch-off fea-ture.

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The indicator lamp in the¿ orÁ buttonflashes three times orremains off. The "Cool-ing with air dehumidifi-cation" function cannotbe switched on.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-function.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automaticmode, the set temperature ismain-tained automatically at a constant level. Thesystemautomatically regulates the temperatureof the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-tribution.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionis activated automatically in automatic mode.In the rear compartment, you can also switchclimate control for the rear seats to automaticmode using theà button.

Automatic controlX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airflow areactivated.

X To switch to manual mode:press the_button.

3-zone automatic climate control:when auto-matic mode is activated, you can select a cli-mate mode (Y page 130).

Adjusting the climate mode settingsYou can select the following climate mode set-tings in automatic mode:FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler settingMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-

free settingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X Press theà button.X Press theñ button repeatedly until thedesired climate mode appears in the display.

130 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Setting the temperature

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for the driv-er's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X To increase or decrease: turn control: orB counter-clockwise or clockwise(Y page 123).Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

3-zone automatic climate controlYou can select different temperature settingsfor the driver's and front-passenger sides aswellas for the rear compartment.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X To increase or decrease temperature inthe front compartment: turn control: orB counter-clockwise or clockwise(Y page 125).Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase or reduce the temperature inthe rear compartment using the front con-trol panel:press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.The temperature setting for the driver's sideis adopted for the rear compartment and thefront-passenger side.

X Turn thumbwheel: to the left or right(Y page 125).Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase or decrease the rear compart-ment temperature using the rear controlpanel: turn controlM counter-clockwise orclockwise on the rear control panel(Y page 125).Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settingsFront control panelP Directs the airflow through the center

ventsO Directs air through the footwell air ventsS Directs the airflow through the center

and footwell vents¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsb Directs the airflow through the defroster

and center vents (Canada only)a Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents_ Directs the airflow through the defroster,

center and footwell air vents (Canadaonly)

Rear control panelM Directs the airflow through the rear cen-

ter and B-pillar air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air vents

i Using the rear control panel, you can alsoactivate both air distribution positions simul-taneously. In order to do this, press both airdistribution buttons. The air is then routedthrough all rear air vents.

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the side airvents. The side air vents can only be closedwhen the controls on the side air vents areturned downwards.

AdjustingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X Press the_ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.

Setting the airflowX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X To increase: press theK button.X To reduce: press theI button.

Operating the climate control systems 131

Climatecontrol

i You can use 3-zone automatic climate con-trol to set the airflow in the rear compartmentseparately.

Switching the ZONE function on/offX To activate: press theá button.The indicator lamp above theá buttonlights up.Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side is notadopted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side is notadopted for the front-passenger side and therear compartment.

X To deactivate: press theá button.The indicator lamp above theá buttongoes out.Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side is adop-ted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side is adop-ted for the front-passenger side and the rearcompartment.

Defrosting the windshield

General notesYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or frontside windows on the inside.Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" functionas soon as the windshield is clear again.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing settings:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperature

Rair distribution to the windshield and frontside windowsRair-recirculation mode off

X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

MAX COOL maximum coolingTheMAX COOL function is only available in vehi-cles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when the engineis running.X To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in theÙ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in theÙ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climate controlswitches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the¿ orÁ cooling with airdehumidification function.

X Activate automatic modeÃ.X If thewindows continue to fog up, activate the"windshield defrosting" function(Y page 132).i You should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Press the_ button repeatedly until theP orO symbol appears in the display.i You should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.

132 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

i If you clean the windows regularly, they donot fog up so quickly.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off as soonas the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rearwindow defroster switches off automaticallyafter several minutes.

If the battery voltage is too low, the rear windowdefroster may switch off.

Switching on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp in the¤ button lightsup or goes out.

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defrostercan be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off

General notesYou can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehicle fromoutside. The air already inside the vehicle willthen be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-dows can fog up more quickly, in particular atlow temperatures. Only use air-recirculationmode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-ging up.

Switching on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X To activate: press thed button.The indicator lamp in thed button lightsup.i In the event of high pollution levels (3-zoneautomatic climate control only) or at high out-side temperatures, air-recirculation mode isautomatically activated. When air-recircula-tion mode is activated automatically, the indi-cator lamp in thed button is not lit.

Outside air is added after about 30 minutes.X To deactivate: press thed button.The indicator lamp in thed button goesout.i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-matically:Rafter approximately five minutes at outsidetemperatures below approximately 41 ‡(5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if coolingwith air dehumidification is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at outsidetemperatures above approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function is activated

Switching the residual heat on or off

General notesThe residual heat function is only available onvehicles for Canada.It is possible to make use of the residual heat ofthe engine to continue heating the stationaryvehicle for up to 30 minutesafter the engine has

Operating the climate control systems 133

Climatecontrol

been switched off. The heating time depends onthe set interior temperature.

Switching on/offX To activate: press theÌ orÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ orÁ buttonlights up.i The blowerwill run at a low speed regardlessof the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat function athigh temperatures, only the ventilation will beactivated. The blower runs at medium speed.

X To deactivate: press theÌ orÁ but-ton.The indicator lamp in theÌ orÁ buttongoes out.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops

IonizationIonization is used to purify the air in the vehicleinterior and attain an improved interior climate.The ionization of the interior air is odorless andcannot be perceived directly in the vehicle inte-rior.You can switch ionization on and off via the mul-timedia system (see the separate operatinginstructions).Ionization can only be operated when the auto-matic climate control is switched on. The side airvent on the driver's side must be open.

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-

lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and in theengine compartment on the front-passengerside free of blockages, such as ice, snow orleaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles inthe vehicle interior.

i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust thesliders of the air vents to the center position.

Setting the center air vents

: Center air vent, left; Center air vent, right= Center vent thumbwheel, right? Center vent thumbwheel, leftX To open or close: turn thumbwheels=and? to the left or right.

134 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Setting the side air vents

Example: Side window defroster vent; Side air vent, left= Thumbwheel for side air ventX To open or close: turn thumbwheel= up ordown.

Setting the glove box air vent! Close the air vent when heating the vehicle.At high outside temperatures, open the airvent and activate the "cooling with air dehu-midification" function. Otherwise, tempera-ture-sensitive items stored in the glove boxcould be damaged.

: Air vent control; Air ventWhen the climate control system is activated,the glove box can be ventilated, for instance tocool its contents. The level of airflowdepends onthe airflow and air distribution settings.X To open or close: turn thumbwheel: to theright or left.

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

Setting the center vents in the rear com-partment

Example: center vents with rear control panel: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear control panel? Rear-compartment air vent, leftX To open or close:turn thumbwheel: up ordown.

Setting the B-pillar air vent

Second row of seats

: B-pillar air vent; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air ventX To open or close:turn thumbwheel; to theleft or right.

Setting the air vents 135

Climatecontrol

Z

B-pillar air vent in the headliner: B-pillar air vent; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air ventX To open or close: turn thumbwheel; up ordown.

Third row of seats

B-pillar air vent in the headliner: B-pillar air vent; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air ventX To open or close: turn thumbwheel; up ordown.

136 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and drivingsafety systems adjusts automatically while acertain distance is being driven after the vehiclehas been delivered or after repairs. Full systemeffectiveness is not reached until the end of thisteach-in procedure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with its per-formance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicleand engine speeds for the first 1000 miles(1500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,during this period.RChange gear in good time, before the tach-ometer needle isÔ of the way to the red areaof the tachometer.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brakethe vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedalbeyond the point of resistance (kickdown).

Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMGvehicles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),drive in the Comfort drive program.

After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and accelerate thevehicle to full speed.You should also observe these notes on break-ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train onyour vehicle have been replaced.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

Driving 137

Drivingandparking

Z

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehiclestationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid highengine speeds and driving at full throttle untilthe engine has reached its operating temper-ature.Only shift the automatic transmission to thedesired drive position when the vehicle is sta-tionary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slippery roads.You could otherwise damage the drive train.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oiltemperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the max-imum engine speed is restricted in order toprotect the engine. To protect the engine andmaintain smooth engine operation, avoid driv-ing at full throttle when the engine is cold.

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such as

the windshield wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignitionlock even if it is not the correct SmartKey forthe vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.The engine cannot be started.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesVehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with aSmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GOfunction and a detachable Start/Stop button.

A check which periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the Smart-Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. This occurs, for example, whenstarting the engine.When you insert the Start/Stop button into theignition lock, the system needs approximatelytwo seconds recognition time. You can then usethe Start/Stop button.Pressing the Start/Stop button several times insuccession corresponds to the different keypositions in the ignition lock. This is only thecase if you are not depressing the brake pedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.To start the vehicle without actively using theSmartKey:Rthe Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in theignition lock.Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.Rthe vehicle must not be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 75).

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can impair the functionality of the KEY-LESS-GO key.Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the tem-perature-controlled cup holder (Y page 303).Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be rec-ognized.If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey'sremote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after ashort time:Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignitionwith the Start/Stop button.Ryouwill not be able to start the enginewith theStart/Stop button until the vehicle isunlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the buttonon the front door (Y page 80), you can continueto start the engine with the Start/Stop button.The engine can be switched off while the vehicleis in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This functionoperates independently of the ECO start/stopautomatic engine switch-off function.

138 DrivingDrivingandparking

Key positions with KEYLESS-GO

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lockAs soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. Further information on situations where anindicator lamp either fails to go out after startingthe engine or lights up while driving(Y page 276).If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the key beingremoved from the ignition.X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You can nowactivate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen inthis position

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stopbutton: twice.The ignition is switched on.If you press Start/Stop button: once whenin this position, the ignition is switched offagain.

Removing the Start/Stop buttonYou can remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock and start the vehicle as normalusing the SmartKey.It is only possible to switch between KEYLESS-GO mode and SmartKey operation when thetransmission is in position P.X Remove Start/Stop button: from ignitionlock;.

You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-ton from the ignition lock when you leave thevehicle. You should, however, always take theSmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. Aslong as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop buttonRthe electrically powered equipment can beoperated

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals can

Driving 139

Drivingandparking

Z

ignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

General notesVehicles with a gasoline engine: the catalyticconverter is preheated for up to 30 secondsafter a cold start. The sound of the engine maychange during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P(Y page 146).The transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display shows P (Y page 148).

i You can start the engine in transmissionposition P and N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyX To start a diesel engine: turn the SmartKeyto position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 138).The% preglow indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

X Turn the SmartKey to position3 in the ignitionlock and release it as soon as the engine isrunning (Y page 138).

i Vehicles with a diesel engine: you canstart the engine without preglow if the engineis warm.

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engineThe Start/Stop button can be used to start thevehicle without inserting the SmartKey into theignition lock. The Start/Stop button must beinserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKeymust be in the vehicle. Thismode for starting theengine operates independently of the ECOstart/stop automatic engine start function.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 138).Vehicleswith a gasoline engine: the enginestarts.Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow isactivated and the engine starts.

Starting procedure via smartphoneObserve the important safety notes on startingthe engine (Y page 139).You can also start your engine via your smart-phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, thepreviously selected climate control setting isactivated. In this way you can cool or heat theinterior of the vehicle before starting the jour-ney.Only start the engine via your smartphone if it issafe to start and run the engine where your vehi-cle is parked.Observe the legal stipulations in the area whereyour vehicle is parked. Engine start via smart-phone may be limited to certain countries orregions.You can execute amaximum of two consecutivestarting attempts via your smartphone. If youinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, youcan carry out two more starting attempts.Once you have started the engine, you canswitch the engine off via your smartphone at anytime.You can only start the engine via your smart-phone if:Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lockRpark position P is selectedRthe accelerator pedal is not depressedRthe anti-theft alarm system is not activatedRthe panic alarm is not activatedRthe hazard warning lamps are switched offRthe hood is closed.Rthe doors are closed and lockedRthe windows and sliding sunroof are closedAlso make sure that:Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filledRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

140 DrivingDrivingandparking

G WARNINGLimbs could be crushed or trapped if theengine is started unintentionally during ser-vice or maintenance work. There is a risk ofinjury.Always secure the engine against uninten-tional starting before carrying out mainte-nance or repair work.

Make sure that the engine cannot be started viayour smartphone before carrying out mainte-nance or repairs. You can prevent an enginestart via your smartphone, for example, if you:Rswitch on the hazard warning lampsRdo not lock the doorsRopen the hood

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pullingaway.The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulledaway. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 239).It is only possible to shift the transmission fromposition P to the desired position if you depressthe brake pedal. Only then is the parking lockreleased. If you do not depress the brake pedal,the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved butthe parking lock remains engaged.

i Upshifts take place at higher engine speedsafter a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-verter to reach its operating temperaturemore quickly.

Information on the automatic release of theelectric parking brake (Y page 161).

Pulling away with a trailer

To ensure that you do not roll backwards whenpulling away on an uphill slope, engage the elec-tric parking brake.X Press and hold handle:.The electric parking brake continues to brakeand prevent the vehicle from rolling back-wards.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterremains on.

X Depress the accelerator pedal.X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination isheld by the driving force of the engine, releaselever:.the electric parking brake is released.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clustergoes out.

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling away for-wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holdsthe vehicle for a short time after you haveremoved your foot from the brake pedal. Thisgives you enough time to move your foot fromthe brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and todepress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never

Driving 141

Drivingandparking

Z

leave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stoppedunder certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when the driverwants to pull away again. The ECO start/stopfunction thereby helps you to reduce the fuelconsumption and emissions of your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayThe ECO start/stop function is activated when-ever you start the engine using the SmartKey orthe Start/Stop button.If the engine has been switched off automati-cally by the ECO start/stop function, theè

ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-play.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stopfunction is only available in drive programsComfort and Slippery.

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe Sport Plus or Sport drive program is notselected (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Rno off-road program has been selectedRthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the systemRthe engine is at normal operating temperatureRthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reachedRthe battery is sufficiently chargedRthe system detects that the windshield is notfogged upwhen the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe hood is closedRthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened

All of the vehicle's systems remain active whenthe engine is stopped automatically.The HOLD function can also be activated if theengine has been switched off automatically. It isthen not necessary to continue applying thebrakes during the automatic stop phase. Whenyou depress the accelerator pedal, the enginestarts automatically and the braking effect ofthe HOLD function is deactivated.All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): automatic engine switch-off can takeplace a maximum of four times in a row (initialstop, then three subsequent stops).Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of con-secutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimi-ted.

142 DrivingDrivingandparking

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function bypressing the ECO buttonRin transmission position D or N the brakepedal is released and theHOLD function is notactiveRyou depress the accelerator pedalRyou engage reverse gear RRyou move the transmission out of position PRyou switch to the Sport Plus or Sport driveprogram (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Ryou activate manual gearshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Ryou switch to the Offroad drive program(vehicles without Off-Road Engineering pack-age)Ryou switch to the Offroad or Offroad Plusdrive program (vehicles with Off-Road Engi-neering package)Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-er's doorRthe vehicle starts to rollRthe brake system requires thisRthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set rangeRthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe battery's condition of charge is too lowShifting the transmission to position P does notstart the engine.

Deactivating or activating the ECOstart/stop function

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles)

X To deactivate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

X To deactivate: in the Comfort drive pro-gram, press ECO button:.

orX Activate manual gearshifting (Y page 150).orX Switch to the Sport Plus or Sport drive pro-gram (Y page 145).Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. When theSport Plus or Sport drive program is activa-ted, the automatic transmission switches tothe Comfort drive program.

Driving 143

Drivingandparking

Z

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction.

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.Before attempting to start the engine again:X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.orX Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 139). Avoid excessively longand frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain thebattery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 338).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the startermotor to cool down for approximately twominutes.X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

144 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Vehicles with a gasolineengine:The engine is not runningsmoothly and is misfir-ing.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converterand damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The coolant temperaturegage shows a valueabove 248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is nolonger being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 322). Observe the warning notesas you do so and add coolant if necessary.

DYNAMIC SELECT controller

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to changethe drive program. Depending on the drive pro-gram selected the following vehicle character-istics will change:Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-ment)Rthe transmissionRthe suspensionRthe steeringRthe availability of the ECO start/stop functionEach time you start the engine with the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, theComfort driveprogram is activated. For further informationabout starting the engine, see (Y page 139).

X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller: as

many times as necessary until the desireddrive program is selected.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display. After five seconds thedisplay goes out.In addition, the current drive programsettingsare displayed in the multimedia system dis-play.

Drive programs available (all vehiclesexcept Mercedes-AMG vehicles):

Individual Individual settings

Sport Sporty driving characteris-tics

Comfort Comfortable and economi-cal driving characteristics

Slippery Optimal driving characteris-tics on slippery or snow-covered roads

Off-road Optimal driving characteris-tics for easily negotiable off-road terrain

Offroad Plus(vehicles withOff-Road Engi-neering pack-age)

Optimal driving characteris-tics for rough terrain

DYNAMIC SELECT controller 145

Drivingandparking

Z

Further information on:Rthe Individual, Sport,Comfort and Slipperydrive programs (Y page 149)Rthe Offroad drive program (vehicles withoutOff-Road Engineering package)(Y page 217)Rthe Offroad and Offroad Plus drive pro-grams (vehicles with Off-Road Engineeringpackage) (Y page 218)

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn DYNAMICSELECT controller: as many times as nec-essary until the desired drive program isselected.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display. After five seconds thedisplay goes out.In addition, the current drive program settingsare displayed in the multimedia system dis-play.

Drive programs available (Mercedes-AMGvehicles):

Individual Individual settings

Comfort Comfortable and economi-cal driving characteristics

Sport Sporty driving characteris-tics

Sport Plus Particularly sporty drivingcharacteristics

Slippery Optimal driving characteris-tics on slippery or snow-covered roads

Additional information for drive programs(Y page 149).

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to itsoriginal position. The current transmission posi-tion P, R, N or D appears in the transmissionposition display in the multifunction display(Y page 148).

Engaging park position P! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicleis moving, do not shift the automatic trans-mission directly from D to R, from R to D ordirectly to P. The automatic transmissioncould otherwise be damaged.

146 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

X Push theDIRECTSELECT lever in the directionof arrow P.

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is automatically engaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKeyand remove the SmartKeyRyou switch off the engine using the SmartKeyor using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door or front-passenger doorRthe driver's door is openedwhen the vehicle isstationary or driving at very low speed and thetransmission is in position D or R

Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-mission shifts automatically to transmissionposition P if the HOLD function or Distance PilotDISTRONIC is activated. Observe the informa-tion on the HOLD function (Y page 185) and onDistance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 177).

Engaging reverse gear R! Only shift the automatic transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

X If the transmission is in position D or N: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever up past the firstpoint of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever up past the first point of resistance.

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

X If the transmission is in position D or R: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to thefirst point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever up or down to the first point of resist-ance.

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-sion shifts to N automatically.With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-er's door or the front-passenger door or removethe SmartKey from the ignition, the automatictransmission shifts to P automatically.With the Start/Stop button: if you then openthe driver's door or the front-passenger door,the automatic transmission shifts to P automat-ically.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehiclecleaned in an automatic car wash with a towingsystem:Using the SmartKey:X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

With the Start/Stop button:X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.

Automatic transmission 147

Drivingandparking

Z

X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX If the transmission is in position R or N: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever down past the firstpoint of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever down past the first point of resistance.

Transmission position and drive pro-gram displayThe current transmission position and drive pro-gram appear in the multifunction display.

: Transmission position; Gear= Drive programThe arrows in the transmission position displayshowhowand intowhich transmission positionsyou can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.If the transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display is not working, you should pullaway carefully to check whether the desiredtransmission position is engaged. Ideally, youshould select transmission position D and, onMercedes-AMG vehicles, drive program C or S.

Transmission positions

B Park positionOnly shift the transmission into posi-tion P when the vehicle is stationary(Y page 159). The parking lockshould not be used as a brake whenparking. Always apply the electronicparking brake in addition to the park-ing lock in order to secure the vehi-cle.If the vehicle electronics aremalfunc-tioning, the transmission may belocked in position P. Have the vehicleelectronics checked immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.Park position P is automaticallyengaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using theSmartKey and remove the Smart-KeyRyou switch off the engine using theSmartKey or using the Start/Stopbutton and open the driver's dooror front-passenger doorRthe driver's door is opened whenthe vehicle is stationary or drivingat very low speed and the trans-mission is in position D or R

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission into posi-tion R when the vehicle is stationary.

148 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow you tomove the vehicle freely, e.g. to pushit or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shiftthe transmission to position N if thevehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.on icy roads.If you switch the engine off with thetransmission in position R or D, theautomatic transmission shifts to Nautomatically.

! Rolling in neutral N can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmission changesgear automatically. All forward gearsare available.

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gear shiftingbehavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive programRthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to a lowergear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeShifting the transmission repeatedly betweengears D and R may help to free the vehicle if ithas become stuck in slush or snow. The vehi-cle's engine management system limits thespeed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) whenshifting back and forth. To shift back and forthbetween transmission positions D and R, movethe DIRECT SELECT lever up and down past thepoint of resistance.

Towing a trailerX Drive in the middle of the engine speed rangeon uphill gradients.

X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradient,use the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 150) to select a lower gear,even if cruise control or Distance PilotDISTRONIC are activated.

Drive programs

Slippery drive programThe Slippery drive program has the followingcharacteristics:Rreduced engine and transmission settings foroptimum propulsion on slippery or snow-cov-ered roads.Roptimized ESP® stability control on slippery orsnow-covered roads.Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability onslippery or snow-covered roads, for example.

Automatic transmission 149

Drivingandparking

Z

Comfort drive programThe Comfort drive program has the followingcharacteristics:Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmissionsettings.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from theautomatic transmission shifting up sooner.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless the accel-erator pedal is depressed fully.Rthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle being drivenat lower engine speeds and the wheels beingless likely to spin.

Sport drive programThe Sport drive program has the following char-acteristics:Rsporty engine and transmission settings.Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.the fuel consumption possibly being higher asa result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.Rthe suspension exhibits sporty damping (vehi-cles with AIRMATIC).

Drive program Sport Plus (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)The Sport Plus drive program has the followingcharacteristics:Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty drivingcharacteristics.Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.the fuel consumption possibly being higher asa result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.Rthe suspension exhibits particularly firmspringing and damping settings (vehicles withAIRMATIC).Rthe ECO start/stop function is deactivated, itcan, however, be activated again using theECO button (Y page 143).

Individual drive programIn the Individual drive program, the followingproperties of the drive program can be selected:Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-ment)Rthe transmissionRthe suspensionRall vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):the steeringRall vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):availability of the ECO start/stop function

To select the gears in the Individual drive pro-gram permanently using the steering wheel pad-dle shifters, select the permanent manual gear-shift program.Information about configuring the Individualdrive program with the multimedia system canbe found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Manual gear shifting

General notesYou can change gear yourself using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. The transmissionmust bein position D.Depending on which steering wheel paddleshifter is pulled, the automatic transmissionimmediately shifts into the next gear down orup, if permitted.To use manual shifting, you have two options:Rtemporary settingRpermanent settingIf you activate manual gearshifting, the multi-function display will show the current gearinstead of transmission position D.If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gearswill be selected automatically.

150 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Temporary setting

X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever toposition D.

X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter: or;.Temporary setting will be active for a certainamount of time. Under certain conditions theminimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in thecase of lateral acceleration, during an overrunphase or when driving on steep terrain.X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddleshifter; and hold it in place.

orX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch thetransmission position.

orX Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller tochange the drive program.

Permanent setting (all vehicles exceptMercedes-AMG vehicles)

X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever toposition D.

X Press button:.

X To deactivate: press button:.orX Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller tochange the drive program.

Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMGvehicles)

X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever toposition D.

X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To deactivate: press button:.orX Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller toswitch to the Individual drive program.Indicator lamp; goes out.

Shifting gears! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatictransmission does not shift up automaticallyeven when the engine limiting speed for thecurrent gear is reached. When the engine lim-iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut toprevent the engine from overrevving. Alwaysmake sure that the engine speed does notreach the red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

Automatic transmission 151

Drivingandparking

Z

X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddleshifter;.The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): if the maximum engine speed on thecurrently engaged gear is reached and youcontinue to accelerate, the automatic trans-mission automatically shifts up in order toprevent engine damage.

X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddleshifter:.The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-ing.If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine damageby not shifting down.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; according togearshift recommendation: when shown in

the multifunction display of the instrumentcluster.

Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)! The automatic transmission does not shiftup automatically even when the engine limit-ing speed for the current gear is reached.When the engine limiting speed is reached,the fuel supply is cut to prevent the enginefrom overrevving. Always make sure that theengine speed does not reach the red area ofthe tachometer. There is otherwise a risk ofengine damage.

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicatorBefore the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-function display.X When the UP message appears in the multi-function display, pull on the right-hand steer-ing wheel paddle shifter.

KickdownMercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is onlypossible in the temporary setting.X For maximum acceleration, depress theaccelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to a lowergear depending on the engine speed.

X Shift back up once the desired speed isreached.

During kickdown, you cannot shift gears usingthe steering wheel paddle shifters.If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-mission shifts up to the next gear when themaximum engine speed is reached. This pre-vents the engine from overrevving.

152 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

7G-TRONIC:The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission no lon-ger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

9G-TRONIC:The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission no lon-ger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only partly possible to engage the gears or the transmission is inposition N.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

Transfer caseThis section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-mitted to both axles.

! Performance tests may only be carried outon a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake systemor transfer case could otherwise be damaged.Contact a qualified specialist workshop for aperformance test.

! Because ESP® is an automatic system, theengine and ignition must be switched off(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stopbutton in position 0 or 1) when the electricparking brake is being tested on a brake dyna-mometer (maximum 10 seconds).Braking triggered automatically by ESP® mayseriously damage the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised, asdoing so will damage the transmission.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

Refueling 153

Drivingandparking

Z

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

G WARNINGVehicles with a diesel engine:If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flashpoint is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.When the engine is running, exhaust systemcomponents could overheat without beingnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with gasoline. Nevermix gasolinewith diesel fuel.

! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with adiesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition ifyou accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and the

engine. The repair costs are high. Notify aqualified specialist workshop and have thefuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection systemcould otherwise be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic chargecould build up again.If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray outwhen the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 379).

Refueling

General informationPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 153).The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-matically when you unlock or lock the vehiclewith the SmartKey or using KEYLESS-GO.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow nextto the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-cle.

154 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Opening the fuel filler flap

: Opening the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled? Tire pressure tableX Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The vehicle electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.The driver’s door can be closed again.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise andremove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderbracket on the inside of filler flap;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in place andrefuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

Do not add any more fuel after the pump stopsfilling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leakout.Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck isdesigned for refueling at diesel filling pumps.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-cle.If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-sage appears in the multifunction display(Y page 259).In addition, the; Check Engine warninglamp may light up (Y page 283).

Refueling 155

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G WARNINGThe fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.Risk of explosion or fire.X Apply the electric parking brake.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as theSmartKey having been removed.

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart.

The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completelydry.X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel.X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 138).X Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runssmoothly.

If the engine does not start:X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds(Y page 138).

X Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until itruns smoothly.

If the engine does not start after three attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannotbe opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 74).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 76).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only)

General notesTo function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas after-treatment must be operated with the reducingagent DEF. Adding DEF is one of the tasks per-formed during maintenance. Under normal

operating conditions, a tank of DEF lasts untilthe next service due date.When the supply of DEF is almost used up, theCheck Additive See Operator's Manualmessage is shown in the multifunction display.If you drive the vehicle faster than 10 mph(16 km/h), the Check Additive See Opera‐

156 RefuelingDrivingandparking

tor's Manualmessage goes out after approx-imately one minute.When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, theRemaining Starts: 16 message is shown inthe multifunction display.If the Remaining Starts: 16 messageappears in the multifunction display, you canstart the engine another 16 times. If DEF is notrefilled, you will subsequently be unable tostart the engine.X Add at least 1 gal (3.8 l) of DEF.X Switch on the ignition for at least 60 seconds.X Start the engine.

i Have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Use the special DEF refill bottle when addingDEF between maintenance intervals. You canobtain further information from an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contactRoadside Assistance (Y page 27).If the outside temperature is below12‡ (Ò11†)it may be difficult to top up. If DEF is frozen andthere is an active warning indicator, it may notbe possible to add DEF. Park the vehicle in awarmer place, e.g. in a garage, until DEF hasbecome fluid again. It will then be possible toadd DEF again. Alternatively, have the DEF tankrefilled at a qualified specialist workshop.Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment and DEF is available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Important safety notesDEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gasaftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:Rnot poisonousRcolorless and odorlessRnot flammableWhen you open the DEF container, smallamounts of ammonia vapor may be released.Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and areparticularly irritating to the skin, to mucousmembranes and to the eyes. You may experi-ence a burning sensation in your eyes, nose andthroat. Coughing and watering of the eyes arepossible.Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tankonly in well-ventilated areas.

DEF must not come into contact with your skin,eyes or clothing and must not be swallowed.Keep DEF away from children.If you or other persons come into contact withDEF, observe the following:RRinse DEF from your skin immediately withsoap and water.RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly with cleanwater. Seek medical assistance withoutdelay.RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse your mouthout immediately. Drink plenty of water. Seekmedical assistance without delay.RChange out of clothing contaminated withDEF immediately.

! Only use DEF in accordance withISO 22241. Do not mix any additives withDEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. Thismay destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after-treatment system.

! The vehicle must be parked on level groundto fill the DEF tank. The DEF tank can only befilled as intended with the vehicle parked on alevel surface. This avoids false level readings.Filling the tank is not permitted if the vehicleis not parked on a level surface. There is adanger of overfilling, which could result indamage to components of the BlueTECexhaust gas aftertreatment.

! Rinse surfaces that have come into contactwith DEF immediately with water or removeDEF using a damp cloth and cold water. If theDEF has already crystallized, use a spongeand cold water to clean it. DEF residues crys-tallize after time and contaminate the affec-ted surfaces.

! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not beadded to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to thefuel tank, this can lead to engine damage.

For further information on DEF, see(Y page 381).

Refueling 157

Drivingandparking

Z

Opening/closing the DEF filler cap

The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-matically when you open or close the vehiclewith the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.X To open:switch the ignition off.X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn blue DEF fuel filler cap; counter-clock-wise and remove it.DEF filler cap; is secured with a plasticstrip.

X To close: place DEF filler cap; on the fillerneck and turn it clockwise.

X To close the fuel filler flap, press it in thedirection of arrow:.

X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h).The Check Additive See Operator'sManual message goes out after approx-imately one minute.i If the Check Additive See Operator'sManual message continues to be shown inthe multifunction display, you must add moreDEF.

DEF refill canisters! Do not screw the disposable hose on tootight. The disposable hose could otherwise bedamaged and DEF may leak out.

X Unscrew the cap from the opening on top ofDEF refill canister;.

X Place disposable hose: on the opening ofDEF refill canister; and screw it on clock-wise until hand-tight.Disposable hose: remains closed until youfasten disposable hose: to the DEF fillerneck of the vehicle.

X Place disposable hose: on the filler neck onthe vehicle and screw it on clockwise untilhand-tight. When you feel resistance, dispos-able hose: is sufficiently secured.

X Lift up and tip DEF refill canister;.Filling stops when the DEF tank is completelyfilled. Do not fill the DEF tank any further. DEFrefill canister; can be removed when it hasbeen only partially emptied.

X Turn disposable hose: on the filler neck ofthe vehicle counter-clockwise and remove it.

X Turn disposable hose: on the opening ofDEF refill canister; counter-clockwise andremove it.

X Reseal DEF refill canister; with the cap.DEF refill canisters are available at many gasstations or at a qualified specialist workshop.DEF refill canisters are often sold with a fillerhose. A filler hose that does not exactly fit thevehicle's DEF tank offers no protection against

158 RefuelingDrivingandparking

overfilling. DEFmay leak if overfilled. Mercedes-Benz offers a special disposable hose with over-fill protection. You can obtain this from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. DEF is avail-able in a variety of containers and receptacles.Only use the disposable hose with theMercedes-Benz DEF refill canisters.

DEF refill bottle! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle hand-tight. Otherwise, the thread of the DEF refillbottle could be damaged and DEF could leakout.

X Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refillbottle:.

X Place DEF refill bottle: on the filler neck asshown and screw it on clockwise until hand-tight.

X Press DEF refill bottle: towards the fillerneck.The DEF tank is filled. This may take up to oneminute.i When DEF refill bottle: is no longerpressed, filling stops and the bottle may betaken off again after being only partially emp-tied.

X Release DEF refill bottle:.X Turn DEF refill bottle: counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill bot-tle: again.

DEF refill canisters are available at many gasstations or at a qualified specialist workshop.Refill bottles without a threaded cap do not pro-vide overfill protection. DEF may leak if overfil-led. Mercedes Benz offers special refill bottleswith a threaded seal. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctly againstrolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-etrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmissionmust be in positionP and theSmartKey must be removed from the ignitionlock.Rthe front wheels must be turned towards thecurb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at thefront axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at therear axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Parking 159

Drivingandparking

Z

Switching off the engine

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

X Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey toposition 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X With KEYLESS-GO:Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 138)The engine stops and all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-sion shifts to N automatically.If you then open the driver's or front-passengerdoor, the automatic transmission shifts to Pautomatically.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehiclecleaned in an automatic car wash with a towingsystem:X Vehicles with a SmartKey: switch on theignition.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Switch on the ignition.X All vehicles: depress the brake pedal andkeep it depressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.i The engine can be switched off in an emer-gency while the vehicle is in motion by press-ing and holding the Start/Stop button forthree seconds.

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake isdependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction inthe system, it may not be possible to apply thereleased parking brake.X If this is the case, only park the vehicle onlevel ground and secure it to prevent it rollingaway.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionP.

It may not be possible to release an appliedparking brake if the on-board voltage is low orthere is a malfunction in the system. Contact aqualified specialist workshop.

i The electric parking brake performs a func-tion test at regular intervals while the engineis switched off. The sounds that can be heardwhile this is occurring are normal.

160 ParkingDrivingandparking

Applying or releasing manually

X To engage: push handle:.When the electric parking brake is engaged,theF (USA only) or! (Canada only)red indicator lamp lights up in the instrumentcluster.i The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the SmartKey is removed.

X To release: pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clustergoes out.i The electric parking brake can only bereleased:Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 138) orRif the ignition was switched on using theStart/Stop button

To ensure that you do not roll backwards whenpulling away on an uphill slope, engage the elec-tric parking brake (Y page 141).

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is automaticallyapplied when the transmission is in position Pand:Rthe engine is switched off orRthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and thedriver's door is opened

To prevent the electric parking brake from beingautomatically applied, pull handle:.

The electric parking brake is also engaged auto-matically if:RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicleto a standstill orRthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-tionaryRParking Pilot is keeping the vehicle stationaryIn addition, at least one of the following condi-tions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine is switched offRthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and thedriver's door is openedRthere is a system malfunctionRthe power supply is insufficientRthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy periodThe redF (USA only) or! (Canada only)indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup.The electric parking brake is not automaticallyengaged if the engine is switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.

Releasing automaticallyThe electric parking brake is released automat-ically when all of the following conditions arefulfilled:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe seat belt has been fastened.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.If the transmission is in position R, the trunk lidmust be closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of transmission positionP or you have previously driven faster than2 mph (3 km/h).

i Ensure that you do not depress the accel-erator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise theparking brake will be released and the vehiclewill start to move.

Parking 161

Drivingandparking

Z

Emergency braking

The vehicle can also be braked during an emer-gency by using the electric parking brake.X While driving, push handle: of the electricparking brake.The vehicle is braked for as long as the handleof the electric parking brake is pressed. Thelonger the electric parking brake handle isdepressed, the greater the braking force.

During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Release Park. Brakemessage appearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterflashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than sixweeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seekadvice.

i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Driving tips

General notes

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the countryin which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-hibit the driver from using a mobile phone whiledriving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-free mode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers adistance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-ond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-ommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof carriers when they are not nee-ded.

X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in the Main-

162 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-play.

Fuel consumption also increaseswhen driving incold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-rain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance with themanufacturer's specifications. Always havework on the engine carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, workrelevant to safety or on safety-related systemsmust be carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.The engine settings must not be changed underany circumstances. Furthermore, all specificservice work must be carried out at regularintervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO displayThe ECO display shows you how economicalyour driving style is. The ECO display assists youin achieving the most economical driving stylefor the selected settings and prevailing condi-tions. Your driving style can significantly influ-ence the vehicle's consumption.

: Acceleration; Coasting= Constant? Additional range achievedRange? is shownunder Bonus fr. Start andrepresents the additional range achieved sincethe beginning of the journey as a result of anadapted driving style.If the fuel level has dropped into the reserverange, the Reserve Fuel message is shown inthe multifunction display instead of range?.The8warning lamp in the instrument clusteralso lights up (Y page 283).

Driving tips 163

Drivingandparking

Z

The ECO display consists of three sections, withan inner and outer area. The sections corre-spond to the following three categories:

: Acceleration (evaluation of all accel-eration processes):Rthe outer area fills up and the innerarea lights up green: moderateacceleration, especially at higherspeedsRthe outer area empties and theinner area is gray: sporty acceler-ation

; Coasting (evaluation of all decelera-tion processes):Rthe outer area fills up and the innerarea lights up green: anticipatorydriving, keeping your distance andearly release of the accelerator.The vehicle can coast without useof the brakes.Rthe outer area empties and theinner area is gray: frequent heavybraking

= Constant(continuous evaluationover the entire journey):Rthe outer area fills up and the innerarea lights up green: constantspeed and avoidance of unneces-sary acceleration and decelerationRthe outer area empties and theinner area is gray: fluctuations inspeed

The three inner areas display the current drivingstyle and light up green as a result of a particu-larly economical driving style. Depending on thedriving situation, up to two areas may light upsimultaneously.At the beginning of the journey, the three outerareas are empty and fill up as a result of eco-nomical driving. A higher level indicates a moreeconomical driving style. If the three outer areasare completely filled at the same time, the driverhas adopted the most economical driving stylefor the selected settings and prevailing condi-tions. The ECO display border lights up.The ECOdisplay does not indicate the actual fuelconsumption. The additionally achieved rangedisplayed under Bonus fr. Start does notindicate a fixed consumption reduction.

In addition to driving style, the actual consump-tion is affected by other factors, such as:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.An economical driving style specially requiresdriving at moderate engine speeds.Achieving a higher value in the categories"Acceleration" and "Constant":Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive the vehicle in the Comfort drive pro-gram.

On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on thehighway, only the outer area for "constant" willchange.The ECO display summarizes the driving stylefrom the start of the journey to its completion.Therefore, there are more marked changes inthe outer areas at the start of a journey. On lon-ger journeys, there are fewer changes. For moremarked changes, perform a manual rest(Y page 233).For further information on the ECO display, see(Y page 232).

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shifting to alower gear in good time. This allows you totake advantage of the engine's braking effect.

164 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

This helps you to avoid overheating thebrakes and wearing them out excessively.When you take advantage of engine braking, adrive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g.on a slippery road surface. This could causedamage to the drive train. This type of damageis not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war-ranty.

Do not depress the brake pedal continuouslywhile the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing thebrakes to rub by constantly applying light pres-sure to the pedal. This results in excessive andpremature wear to the brake pads.Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifterto shift into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is especiallyimportant if the vehicle is laden.This also applies if you have activated cruisecontrol, the speed limiter or Distance PilotDISTRONIC.This will use the braking effect of the engine, sothat less braking will be required tomaintain thespeed. This relieves the load on the brake sys-tem and prevents the brakes from overheatingand wearing too quickly.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Driveon for a short while. This allows the airflow tocool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayed reac-tion from the brakes when braking for the first

time. This may also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.You then have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehiclewashed, brake firmly while paying attention tothe traffic conditions. This will warm up thebrake discs, thereby drying them more quicklyand protecting them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-due may form on the brake discs and brakepads. This can result in a significantly longerbraking distance.RBrake occasionally to remove any possiblesalt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster andRyou hear a warning tone while the engine isrunning

Observe additional warning messages in themultifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immediately.Consult a qualified specialist workshop toarrange this.

! A function or performance test should onlybe carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. Ifyou wish to operate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop in advance. You could oth-erwise damage the drive train or the brakesystem.

! Because ESP® is an automatic system, theengine and ignition must be switched off(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stopbutton in position 0 or 1) when the electric

Driving tips 165

Drivingandparking

Z

parking brake is being tested on a brake dyna-mometer (maximum 10 seconds).Braking triggered automatically by ESP® mayseriously damage the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on the brakesystem must be carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the functional-ity of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so,depress the brake pedal firmly when driving at ahigh speed. This improves the grip of the brakepads.You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS)on (Y page 64) or of BAS PLUS on (Y page 69).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only havebrake pads/linings installed on your vehiclewhich have been approved for Mercedes-Benzvehicles or which correspond to an equivalentquality standard. Brake pads/liningswhich havenot been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehiclesor which are not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only usebrake fluid that has been specially approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brakefluid which has not been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of anequivalent quality could affect your vehicle'soperating safety.

High-performance brake system(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)The high-performance brake system is designedfor heavy loads. This may lead to noise whenbraking. This will depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceREnvironmental conditions, such as tempera-ture and humidity

The wear of individual components of the brakesystem, such as the brake pads/linings or brakediscs, depends on the individual driving styleand operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-age thatwill be valid under all circumstances. Anaggressive driving style will lead to high wear.

You can obtain further information about thisfrom your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving andbraking accordingly during this break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-ingly high brake wear. Observe the# brakewear warning lamp in the instrument cluster andnote any brake status messages in the multi-function display. Especially for high perform-ance driving, it is important tomaintain and havethe brake system checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depth onthe road surface, there is a danger of hydro-planing occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Ravoid sudden steering movements.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas. Checkthe depth of any water before driving throughit. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-erwise, watermay enter the vehicle interior orthe engine compartment. This can damagethe electronic components in the engine orthe automatic transmission. Water can alsobe drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzlesand this can cause engine damage.

i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:select the raised vehicle level before drivingthrough a body of water.

166 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Off-road fording! Under no circumstances should you accel-erate before entering the water. The bowwave could cause water to enter and damagethe engine and other assemblies.

! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors whilefording. Otherwise, water could get into thevehicle interior and damage the vehicle'selectronics and interior equipment.REstablish how deep the water is and the char-acteristics of the body of water before ford-ing.RSelect the highest possible vehicle level.RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer-ing wheel paddle shifter.RAvoid high engine speeds.REnter and exit the water at a flat place and ata steady walking pace.RDrive slowly and at an even speed through thewater.REnsure that a bow wave does not form as youdrive.RDo not stop and do not switch off the engine.Water offers a high degree of resistance, andthe ground is slippery and in some casesunstable. Therefore, it is difficult and danger-ous to pull away in the water.RClean any mud from the tire tread after ford-ing.RApply the brakes to dry them after fording.Always observe the fording depth values(Y page 385).

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gases

such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering andbrakingmaneuvers. Do not use cruise control orDistance Pilot DISTRONIC.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.When driving in snow with or without snowchains, select driving program Slippery(Y page 145).

i Vehicles with a diesel engine:do notcover the radiator, e.g. with a protectivecover. The measuring function of the on-board diagnosis system may otherwise pro-vide inaccurate values. Some of these valuesare required by law andmust therefore alwaysbe accurate.

The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning device andis therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freezingpoint do not guarantee that the road surface isfree of ice. The roadmay still be icy, especially inwooded areas or on bridges. You should payspecial attention to road conditions when tem-peratures are around the freezing point.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 348).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 348).Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 366).

Driving tips 167

Drivingandparking

Z

Off-road driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is arisk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf the vehicle level is high, the vehicle center ofgravity is raised. This could cause the vehicleto tip over more easily on uphill or downhillgradients. There is a risk of an accident.Select the lowest possible vehicle level.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb, speed bumps or a pothole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the underbody orparts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under-body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could bedamaged without the damage being visible.Components damaged in this way can unex-pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, nolonger withstand the strain they are designedto.If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-bustible materials such as leaves, grass or

twigs can gather between the underbody andthe underbody paneling. If these materialscome in contact with hot parts of the exhaustsystem, they can catch fire.In such situations, have the vehicle checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

When driving off-road, substances such as sand,mud and water or water mixed with oil may getinto the brakes. This could result in a reducedbraking effect or in total brake failure and also inincreased wear and tear. The braking charac-teristics change depending on the materialingressing the brakes. Clean the brakes afterdriving off-road. If you detect a reduced brakingeffect or grinding noises, have the brake systemchecked in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible. Adapt your driving style to thedifferent braking characteristics.Driving off-road increases the likelihood of dam-age to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead tofailure of the mechanical assembly or systems.Adapt your driving style to suit the terrain con-ditions. Drive carefully. Have damage to thevehicle rectified immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Do not switch to transmission position N whendriving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicleusing the service brake, you could lose controlof the vehicle. If the gradient is too steep for yourvehicle, drive back down in reverse gear.

General notesRead this section carefully before driving yourvehicle off-road. Practice by driving over moregentle off-road terrain first.Familiarize yourself with the characteristics ofyour vehicle and the gear shift operation beforedriving through difficult terrain.The following driving systems are speciallyadapted to off-road driving:Rthe Offroad drive program (vehicles withoutOff-Road Engineering package)(Y page 217)ROffroad and Offroad Plus drive programs(vehicles with Off-Road Engineering package)(Y page 218)

168 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

RLOW RANGE offroad gear (vehicles with theOffroad Engineering package) (Y page 219)RDifferential lock (vehicles with the Off-RoadEngineering package) (Y page 218)ROff-road ABS (Y page 64)ROff-road 4ETS (Y page 67)ROff-road ESP® (Y page 68)RAIRMATIC package (vehicle level)(Y page 186)RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)(Y page 216)

Observe the following notes:RStop the vehicle before starting to drive alongan off-road route. If necessary, select the off-road program (Y page 218) or shift to theLOW RANGE off-road gear (Y page 219).RSelect a vehicle level that is suitable for theterrain. To avoid damaging the vehicle, makesure there is always sufficient ground clear-ance.RCheck that items of luggage and loads arestowed safely and are well secured(Y page 299).RAlways keep the engine running and in gearwhen driving on a downhill gradient. ActivateDSR (Y page 216).RAlways keep the engine running and in gearwhen driving on a slope.RAdapt your speed to the terrain. The rougher,steeper ormore ruts on the terrain, the sloweryour speed should be.RDo not jump with the vehicle as this will inter-rupt the vehicle's propulsion.RDrivewith extreme care on unfamiliar off-roadroutes where visibility is poor. For safety rea-sons, get out of the vehicle first and surveythe off-road route.RLook out for obstacles, such as rocks, holes,tree stumps and furrows.RAlways keep the doors, the tailgate, the sidewindows and the sliding sunroof closed whilethe vehicle is in motion.RDo not shift the automatic transmission totransmission position N.RObserve the notes on off-road fording(Y page 167).

i Do not use the HOLD function when drivingoff-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradientsor on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD

function cannot hold the vehicle on such sur-faces.

Checklist before driving off-road! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up whilethe vehicle is in motion, stop the vehicle in asafe place as soon as possible. Check theengine oil level. The engine oil warning lampwarning must not be ignored. Continuing thejourney while the symbol is displayed couldlead to engine damage.

X Engine oil level: check the engine oil leveland add oil if necessary.When driving on steep gradients, the engineoil level must be sufficiently high to ensure acorrect oil supply in the vehicle.

X DEF tank (BlueTEC vehicles): check thelevel and add if necessary (Y page 156).

X Tire-changing tool kit: check that the jack isworking and make sure you have the lugwrench, a robust tow cable and a foldingspade in the vehicle.

X Wheels and tires: check the tire tread depthand tire pressure.

X Check for damage and remove any foreignobjects, e.g. small stones, from the wheels/tires.

X Replace any missing valve caps.X Replace dented or damaged wheels.X Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a lossof tire pressure and damage the tire bead.Before driving off-road, check the wheels andreplace them if necessary.

Checklist after driving off-road! If you detect damage to the vehicle afterdriving off-road, have the vehicle checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Driving over rough terrain places greaterdemands on your vehicle than driving on normalroads. After driving off-road, check the vehicle.This allows you to detect damage promptly andreduce the risk of an accident to yourself andother road users.X If the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive programis selected: select the Individual, Sport,

Driving tips 169

Drivingandparking

Z

Comfort or Slippery drive program(Y page 145).

X Deactivate the LOW RANGE off-road gear(Y page 219).

X Deactivate DSR (Y page 216).X Lower the vehicle level again to a level suita-ble to the road conditions, e.g. to the normallevel.

X Clean the headlamps and rear lights andcheck for damage.

X Clean the front and rear license plates.X Clean the wheels and tires with a water jetand remove any foreign objects.

X Clean the wheels, wheel housings and thevehicle underside with a water jet; check forany foreign objects and damage.

X Check whether twigs or other parts of plantshave become trapped. These increase the riskof fire and can damage fuel pipes, brakehoses or the rubber bellows of the axle jointsand propeller shafts.

X After the trip, examine without fail the entireundercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes, body-work structure, steering, chassis and exhaustsystem for damage.

X After driving for extended periods acrosssand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirtyconditions, have the brake discs, wheels,brake pads/linings and axle joints checkedand cleaned.

X If you detect strong vibrations after off-roadtravel, check for foreign objects in the wheelsand drive train and remove them if necessary.Foreign objects can disturb the balance andcause vibrations.

Driving on sandObserve the following rules when driving onsand:RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicleswithout Off-Road Engineering package)(Y page 217).RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicleswith Off-Road Engineering package)(Y page 218).RSelect a higher vehicle level.RAvoid high engine speeds.RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate tothe terrain.

RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resist-ance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels couldbecome stuck in loose ground.RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles if possi-ble. Make sure that:- the tire ruts are not too deep.- the sand is sufficiently firm.- the ground clearance of the vehicle is suf-ficient.

Tire ruts and gravel roads! Check that the ruts are not too deep andthat your vehicle has sufficient clearance.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged orbottom out and get stuck.

Observe the following rules when driving alongruts in off-road terrain or on roads with loosegravel:RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicleswithout Off-Road Engineering package)(Y page 217).RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicleswith Off-Road Engineering package)(Y page 218).RSelect a higher vehicle level.RAvoid high engine speeds.RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer-ing wheel paddle shifter.RDrive slowly.RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with thewheels of one side on the center grassy area,if possible.

Driving over obstacles! Obstacles could damage the floor of thevehicle or components of the chassis. Askpassengers for guidance when driving overlarge obstacles. The passenger should alwayskeep a safe distance from the vehicle whendoing so in order to avoid injury as a result ofunexpected vehicle movements. After drivingoff-road or over obstacles, check the vehiclefor possible damage, especially to the under-body and the components of the chassis.

170 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Observe the following rules when driving overtree stumps, large stones and other obstacles:RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicleswithout Off-Road Engineering package)(Y page 217).RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicleswith Off-Road Engineering package)(Y page 218).RSelect LOW RANGE offroad gear (vehicleswith Off-Road Engineering package)(Y page 219)RRaise the vehicle level.RAvoid high engine speeds.RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer-ing wheel paddle shifter.RDrive very slowly.RDrive straight over the center of obstacles.

Traveling uphill

Approach/departure angle

G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is arisk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

RObserve the rules on off-road driving.RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines orgradients, but instead follow the direct line offall.

RWhen driving down an incline,make use of theengine's braking effect. Observe the enginespeed; do not overrev the engine.RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicleswithout Off-Road Engineering package)(Y page 217).RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicleswith Off-Road Engineering package)(Y page 218).RBefore driving on extreme uphill and downhillgradients, select the LOW RANGE offroadgear (vehicles with Off-Road Engineeringpackage) (Y page 219).RDrive slowly.RAvoid high engine speeds. Drive at appropri-ate engine speeds (maximum 3,000 rpm).RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter to shift into a lower gear in good timeon long and steep downhill gradients.RCheck the brakes after prolonged off-roaddriving.

Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away ona hill. For further information about hill startassist, see (Y page 141).Do not switch to transmission position N whendriving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicleusing the service brake, you could lose controlof the vehicle. If the gradient is too steep for yourvehicle, drive back down in reverse gear.Always observe the approach/departure anglevalues (Y page 386).

Maximum gradient-climbing capabilityAlways observe the maximum gradient climbingability values (Y page 386).

HilltopsWhen driving up an uphill gradient, slightlyreduce pressure on the accelerator immediatelybefore reaching the brow of the hill. Make use ofthe vehicle's own impetus to travel over thebrow.This style of driving prevents:Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on thebrow of a hillRthe vehicle from traveling too quickly downthe other side

Driving tips 171

Drivingandparking

Z

Driving downhillRDrive slowly.RDo not drive at an angle down steep inclines.Steer into the line of fall and drive with thefront wheels aligned straight. Otherwise, thevehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover.RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand pad-dle shifter before tackling steep downhill gra-dients.RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brakegently. When doing so, make sure that thevehicle is facing in the direction of the line offall.RCheck that the brakes are working normallyafter a long downhill stretch.

i The special off-road ABS setting enables aprecise, brief and repeated locking of thefront wheels. This causes them to dig intoloose earth. Be aware that the front wheelseasily skid across the ground surface if com-pletely braked and therefore lose their abilityto steer.

Driving systems

Intelligent DriveMercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno-vative driver assistance and safety systemswhich enhance comfort and support the driver incritical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi-nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile-stone on the path towards autonomous driving.Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces allelements of active and passive safety in onewellthought out system – for the safety of the vehi-cle occupants and that of other road users.Further information on driving safety systems(Y page 63).

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant road speedfor you. It brakes automatically in order to avoidexceeding the set speed. You must select alower gear in good time on long and steep down-hill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden ortowing a trailer. By doing so, youwill make use ofthe braking effect of the engine. This relieves the

load on the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steadyspeed for a prolonged period. You can store anyroad speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

i Cruise control should not be activated whendriving off-road.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-trol can neither reduce the risk of an accidentnor override the laws of physics. Cruise controlcannot take into account the road, traffic andweather conditions. Cruise control is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time and for staying in your lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: Activates or increases speed; Activates or reduces speed= Deactivates cruise control? Activates at the current speed/last stored

speed

172 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

When you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction display forfive seconds.

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe electric parking brake must be released.Ryou are driving faster than 20mph (30 km/h).RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.RDSR must be deactivated.Rthe Offroad Plus drive programmust be deac-tivated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineer-ing package).

Storing, maintaining and calling up aspeed

Storing and maintaining a speedX Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.X Briefly press the cruise control lever up: ordown?.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-matically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients by auto-matically applying the brakes.

Storing or calling up a speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is operational and when firstactivated stores the current speed or regu-lates the speed of the vehicle to the storedspeed.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in1 mphincre-ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in5 mphincre-ments (10 km/hincrements): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For example, ifyou accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise con-trol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished overtak-ing.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruise con-trol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20mph (30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou activate DSR

Driving systems 173

Drivingandparking

Z

Ryou activate the Offroad Plus program (vehi-cles with the Off-Road Engineering package)Ryou shift the transmission to position N whiledriving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐trol Offmessage in the multifunction displayfor approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

General notesDistance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speedand automatically helps you maintain the dis-tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehiclesare detected with the aid of the radar sensorsystem. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes auto-matically so that the set speed is not exceeded.You must select a lower gear in good time onlong and steep downhill gradients, especially ifthe vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doingso, you will make use of the braking effect of theengine. This relieves the load on the brake sys-tem and prevents the brakes from overheatingand wearing too quickly.If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there isa risk of a collision, you will be warned visuallyand acoustically. Without your intervention, Dis-tance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot prevent a colli-sion. An intermittent warning tone will thensound and the distance warning lamp will lightup in the instrument cluster. Brake immediatelyin order to increase the distance to the vehicle infront or take evasive action provided it is safe todo so.For Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to assist youwhen driving, the radar sensor system must beoperational.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the rangebetween 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph(200 km/h).Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC while driv-ing on roads with steep gradients.Since Distance Pilot DISTRONIC transmits radarwaves, it can resemble the radar detectors ofthe responsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCC asa "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensoris intended for use in an automotive radarsystem only. Removing, tampering with, oraltering the device will void any warranties,and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-per with, alter, or use in any non-approvedway.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDistance Pilot DISTRONIC does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary objects on the road, e.g. stoppedor parked vehiclesRoncoming vehicles and crossing trafficAs a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC mayneither give warnings nor intervene in suchsituations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDistance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot alwaysclearly identify other road users and complextraffic situations.

174 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONICmay:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONICwarns you.

G WARNINGDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehiclewith up to 50% of the maximum possibledeceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi-cient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts youwith a visual and acoustic warning. There is arisk of an accident.Apply the brakes yourself in these situationsand try to take evasive action.

! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or theHOLD function is activated, the vehiclebrakes automatically in certain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DistancePilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions. Dis-tance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in good timeand for staying in your lane.Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect nar-row vehicles driving in front, e.g.motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple, in parking garages

If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects avehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerateto the speed stored.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane oran exit laneRbe so high when driving in the right-hand lanethat you overtake vehicles in the left-handlaneRbe so high when driving in the left-hand lanethat you overtake vehicles in the right-handlane

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: Activates or increases speed; Activates or reduces speed= Deactivates Distance Pilot DISTRONIC? Activates at the current speed/last stored

speedA Sets a specified minimum distance

Driving systems 175

Drivingandparking

Z

Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

Activation conditionsTo activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take up totwo minutes of driving before Distance PilotDISTRONIC is ready for use.Rthe electric parking brake must be released.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmustbe closed.Rthe Offroad Plus drive programmust be deac-tivated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineer-ing package).RDSR must be deactivated.Rthe vehicle must not skid.

ActivatingX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=, up: or down?.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the Distance Pilot Passive mes-sage appears in themultifunction display. Theset distance to a slower-moving vehicle infront will then not be maintained. You will bedriving at the speed you determine by theposition of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONICwhen stationary. The lowest speed that can beset is 20 mph (30 km/h).X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=, up: or down?.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.

Activates at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-

ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC isactivated, it stores the current speed or reg-ulates the speed of the vehicle to the storedspeed.

Driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

Pulling away and drivingX If you want to pull away with DistancePilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from thebrake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speedto that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle isdetected in front, your vehicle accelerates tothe set speed.

The vehicle can also pull away when it is facingan unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle thenbrakes automatically.If there is no vehicle in front, Distance PilotDISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a slower-moving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. Inthis way, the distance you have selected ismain-tained.If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the drivingspeed. However, the vehicle is only acceleratedup to the speed you have stored.

176 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Selecting the drive programDistance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sportydriving style if you have selected the Sport orSport Plus drive program (Y page 149). Accel-eration behind the vehicle in front or to the setspeed is then noticeably more dynamic. If youhave selected the Comfort drive program, thevehicle accelerates more gently. This setting isrecommended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesIf you change to the overtaking lane, DistancePilot DISTRONIC supports you if:Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDistance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currentlydetect a danger of collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted ifchanging lanes takes too long or if the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle in frontbecomes too small.

i When you change lanes, Distance PilotDISTRONIC monitors the right lane (in left-side traffic) or the left lane (in right-side traf-fic).

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that thevehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicleto a stop.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-tionary and you do not need to depress thebrake.After a time, the electric parking brake securesthe vehicle and relieves the service brake.Depending on the specified minimum distance,your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-cient distance behind the vehicle in front. Thespecified minimum distance is set using thecontrol on the cruise control lever.The transmission is shifted automatically toposition P if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONICactivated and the vehicle stationary:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seatbelt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONICactivated and the vehicle stationary:Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there isa malfunction, the transmission may also beautomatically shifted into position P.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or downA for a lower speed

X To adjust the set speed in1 mphincre-ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in5 mphincre-ments (10 km/hincrements): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down;, the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

Driving systems 177

Drivingandparking

Z

i If you accelerate to overtake, Distance PilotDISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to thelast speed stored after you have finished over-taking.

Setting a specified minimum distance

You can set the specified minimum distance forDistance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the timespan between one and two seconds. With thisfunction you can set the minimum distance thatDistance Pilot DISTRONICmaintains to the vehi-cle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. Youcan see this distance in the multifunction dis-play (Y page 179).X To increase: turn control; in direction=.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains agreater distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control; in direction:.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains ashorter distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front.

i Make sure that you maintain a sufficientlysafe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjustthe distance to the vehicle in front if neces-sary.

Deactivates Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

There are several ways to deactivate DistancePilot DISTRONIC:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationaryWhen you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC,the Distance Pilot off message appears inthe multifunction display for approximately fiveseconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivatedif you depress the accelerator pedal. If youaccelerate to overtake, Distance PilotDISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to thelast speed stored after you have finished over-taking.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac-tivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if thevehicle is automatically securedwith the elec-tric parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towards youin order to pull away and the front-passengerdoor or one of the rear doors is openRyou activate Parking PilotRthe vehicle has skiddedA warning tone sounds. The Distance PilotOff message will appear in the multifunctiondisplay for approximately five seconds.

178 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac-tivated if:Ryou activate DSRRyou activate the Off-Road Program+ (vehicleswith the Off-Road Engineering package)

Theà DSR symbol appears in the multifunc-tion display.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Displays in the speedometer

Example: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in thespeedometerWhen Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated,one or two segments; in the stored speedrange light up.If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle infront, segments; between speed of the vehi-cle in front= and stored speed: light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayed inthe speedometer may differ slightly from thespeed stored for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.

Display in the assistance graphic whenDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to the

vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable? Own vehicleX Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer (Y page 237).

Display in the assistance graphic whenDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable= Own vehicle? Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activatedX Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer (Y page 237).

You will see the stored speed for approximatelyfive seconds when you activate Distance PilotDISTRONIC.

Driving systems 179

Drivingandparking

Z

Tips for driving with Distance PilotDISTRONIC

General notesPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: theability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detectvehicles during cornering is limited. Your vehi-cle may brake unexpectedly or late.RDriving on a different line: Distance PilotDISTRONICmay not detect vehicleswhich arenot driving in the middle of their lane. The dis-tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.ROther vehicles changing lanes: Distance PilotDISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cut-ting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will betoo short.RNarrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIChas not yet detected the vehicle in front onthe edge of the road because of its narrowwidth. The distance to the vehicle in front willbe too short.RObstacles and stationary vehicles: DistancePilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstaclesor stationary vehicles. If, for example, thedetected vehicle turns a corner and an obsta-cle or stationary vehicle is then revealed, Dis-tance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake forthem.RCrossing traffic: Distance Pilot DISTRONICmay mistakenly detect vehicles that arecrossing your lane. Activating Distance PilotDISTRONIC at, for example, a traffic light withcrossing traffic, could cause your vehicle topull away at the wrong time.

In such situations, brake if necessary. DistancePilot DISTRONIC will then be deactivated.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with SteeringPilot

General notes

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilotaids you in keeping the vehicle in the center ofthe driving lane by means of moderate steeringinterventions in a speed range from 0 - 125mph(0 - 200 km/h).It monitors the area in front of your vehicle bymeans of camera system: at the top of thewindshield.In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h),the advanced automatic pulling away functionfocuses on the vehicle in front, taking intoaccount lanemarkings, e.g. when following vehi-cles in a traffic jam.At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h),Steering Pilot focuses on clear lane markings(left and right), only focusing on the vehicle infront if clear lane markings are not present.If these conditions are not present, SteeringPilot cannot provide assistance.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC must be active inorder for the function to be available.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, DistancePilot DISTRONIC and Steering Pilot can neitherreduce the risk of an accident nor override thelaws of physics. It cannot take into accountroad, weather or traffic conditions. DistancePilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time and for staying in your lane.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilotdoes not detect road and traffic conditions anddoes not detect all road users. If you are follow-ing a vehiclewhich is driving towards the edge ofthe road, your vehicle could come into contact

180 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

with the curb or other road boundaries. Be par-ticularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists,that are directly next to your vehicle.Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane orprojecting out into the lane are not detected.An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. afterintentionally driving over a lane marking, can becorrected at any time if you steer slightly in theopposite direction.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Pilot cannotcontinuously keep your vehicle in lane. In somecases, the steering intervention is not sufficientto bring the vehicle back to the lane. In suchcases, you must steer the vehicle yourself toensure that it does not leave the lane.The support provided by the system can beimpaired if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflections (e.g. when the road surfaceis wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkingsfor a lane, e.g. in areas with road constructionworkRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the roadThe system is switched to passive and no longerassists you by performing steering interventionsif:Ryou actively change laneRyou switch on the turn signalRtake your hands off the steering wheel or donot steer for a prolonged period of time

i After you have finished changing lanes,Steering Pilot is automatically active oncemore.

Steering Pilot cannot provide assistance:Ron very sharp cornersRwhen towing a trailerRwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tirehas been detected and displayed

Observe the important safety notes on DistancePilot DISTRONIC (Y page 174).The steering interventions are carried out with alimited steering moment. The system requiresthe driver to keep his hands on the steeringwheel and to steer himself.If you do not steer yourself or if you take yourhands off the steering wheel for a prolongedperiod of time, the systemwill first alert youwitha visual warning. A steering wheel symbolappears in the multifunction display. If you havestill not started to steer and have not taken holdof the steering wheel after five seconds at thelatest, a warning tone also sounds to remind youto take control of the vehicle. Steering Pilot isthen switched to passive. Distance PilotDISTRONIC remains active.

Activating Steering PilotX Activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC withSteering Pilot using the on-board computer(Y page 237).The Steering Pilot Onmessage appears inthe multifunction display. Steering Pilot isactivated.

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Pilot is activated but not ready for asteering intervention, steering wheel symbol:appears in gray. If the system provides you withsupport by means of steering interventions,symbol: is shown in green.

Deactivating Steering PilotX Deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC withSteering Pilot using the on-board computer(Y page 237).The Steering Pilot Offmessage appearsin the multifunction display. Steering pilot isdeactivated.

Driving systems 181

Drivingandparking

Z

When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivatedor not available, Steering Pilot is deactivatedautomatically.

Level control (vehicles with the Off-road Engineering package)

Important safety notesLevel control adapts the vehicle level automati-cally to the current operating and driving situa-tion. This results in reduced fuel consumptionand improved handling.Make changes to the vehicle level while thevehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle toadjust to the new level as quickly as possible.The vehicle level may change visibly if you parkthe vehicle and the outside temperaturechanges. If the temperature drops, the vehiclelevel is lower; with an increase in temperature,the vehicle level rises.If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, thevehicle begins to compensate for load discrep-ancies while still parked. However, for signifi-cant level changes, such as after the vehicle hasbeen stationary for a long period, the enginemust be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle isonly lowered when the doors are closed. Low-ering is interrupted if a door is opened, and itcontinues once the door has been closed.Further information about "Driving off-road"(Y page 168).

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

G WARNINGWhen you drive with the vehicle raised, thedriving characteristics could be impaired bythe vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehi-cle could rollover more easily, for example ona bend. There is a risk of an accident.

Always select as low a vehicle level as possi-ble and adjust your driving style.

G WARNINGWhen you drive with the chassis lowered orraised, the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics can be significantly impaired. Youcould also exceed the permissible vehicleheight if the chassis is raised. There is a risk ofan accident.Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.

G WARNINGDue to the high center of gravity, the vehiclemay start to skid and roll over in the event ofan abrupt steering maneuver and/or whenthe vehicle's speed is not adapted to the roadconditions. There is a risk of an accident.Always adapt your speed and driving style tothe vehicle's driving characteristics and to theprevailing road and weather conditions.

! When driving on extremely rough terrain,select a high vehicle level in good time. Makesure there is always sufficient ground clear-ance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-over rate than other types of vehicles.Failure to operate this vehicle safely mayresult in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,and severe or fatal injury.RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-nificantly more likely to die than a personwearing a seat belt.You and all vehicle occupants should alwayswear your seat belts.

Basic settingsThe extent to which the vehicle is raised or low-ered depends on the basic setting selected.Select:Rthe Comfort or Sport drive program for driv-ing on normal roadsRthe Offroad drive program for driving on eas-ily negotiable off-road terrainRthe Offroad Plus drive program for off-roaddriving

182 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Roffroad level 1 for driving on easily negotiableoff-road terrainRoffroad level 2 for driving on normal off-roadterrainRoffroad level 3 for freeing the vehicle in par-ticularly rough terrain at low speeds only

The individual vehicle levels differ from the nor-mal level as follows:R–0.6 in (–15 mm) in the Sport drive programR+/–0 in (+/–0 mm) in the Comfort drive pro-gramR+ 1.2 in (+ 30 mm) in the Offroad drive pro-gramR+ 2.4 in (+ 60 mm) in the Offroad Plus driveprogramR+ 1.2 in (+ 30 mm) in offroad level 1R+ 2.4 in (+ 60 mm) in offroad level 2R+ 3.5 in (+ 90 mm) in offroad level 3

Setting the vehicle level! Make sure that there is enough groundclearance when the vehicle is being lowered.It could otherwise hit the ground, damagingthe underbody.

Set the vehicle level using the selector wheel.X Start the engine.X Press selector wheel:.Selector wheel: extends.

X To raise the vehicle: turn selector wheel:clockwise;.The vehicle is raised.

X To lower the vehicle: turn selector wheel:counter-clockwise?.The vehicle is lowered.

During the adjustment, the Lowering or Vehi‐cle Risingmessage appears in the multifunc-tion display.

If you press the% ora button on themultifunction steering wheel, the message willdisappear. Once normal level has been reached,all indicator lamps= go out.The vehicle automatically selects normal level ifyou:Rdrive at speeds above 70 mph (112 km/h) orRdrive at speeds between 65 mph (105 km/h)and 70 mph (112 km/h) for approximately20 seconds

The vehicle is lowered to low level if you aretraveling at higher speeds.

Normal level

Setting the vehicle to normal level:X Start the engine.X Press selector wheel:.Selector wheel: extends.

X To lower the vehicle: turn selector wheel:counter-clockwise?.The vehicle is lowered.

If one or more indicator lamps= are on:X Turn selector wheel: counter-clockwise?until all indicator lamps= that are lit start toflash.The vehicle is lowered to normal level. Assoon as the next lowest level is reached, theindicator lamp stops flashing and goes out.

Offroad levels

General notesOnly select an offroad level when this is appro-priate for road conditions. Otherwise, fuel con-sumption increases and handling may be affec-ted.

Driving systems 183

Drivingandparking

Z

You can select from the following:ROffroad level 1 at speeds up to 60 mph(96 km/h)ROffroad level 2 at speeds up to 40 mph(64 km/h)ROffroad level 3 at speeds up to 12 mph(20 km/h)

If you select an offroad level when driving at toohigh a speed, the Drive More Slowlymessageappears in the multifunction display.Offroad level 3 is only suitable for driving onextremely difficult off-road terrain under partic-ularly rough conditions.RAdjust your driving style to the altered han-dling characteristics.RDo not drive at speeds above 12 mph(20 km/h).

Indicator lamps= for the desired offroad levelflash:Rthe lower indicator lamp flashes, offroadlevel 1 is selectedRthe lower and center indicator lamps flash,offroad level 2 is selectedRall three indicator lamps flash, offroad level 3is selected

The vehicle adjusts to the offroad level selected.As soon as an offroad level is reached, the cor-responding indicator lamp stops flashing andlights up constantly.

Raising the vehicleSet the vehicle level using the selector wheel.X To raise the vehicle: turn selector wheel:clockwise;.The vehicle is raised to offroad level 1 by1.2 in(30 mm) compared to the normal level.

During the adjustment, the Vehicle risingmessage, for example, appears in themultifunc-tion display.

If you press the% ora button on themultifunction steering wheel, the message willdisappear.

i Up to offroad level 2, you can hide the mes-sages using the% ora button on themultifunction steering wheel.

While the adjustment from offroad level 2 to off-road level 3 is taking place, you will see a mes-sage such as the following in the multifunctiondisplay: Vehicle rising Max. speed12 mph (20 km/h).The Max. speed 12 mph (20 km/h) messagedraws your attention to the maximum speedpermitted for offroad level 3.If you drive above 12 mph (20 km/h) at offroadlevel 3, you will see the following messageshown in red in the multifunction display: Low‐ering Max. speed 12 mph (20 km/h).i You cannot clear these messages.You also hear a warning. The vehicle is loweredand offroad level 3 is canceled.If you continue to increase your speed, the redmessage continues to be shown in the multi-function display. The newly set level is not dis-played until the vehicle has been set to a levelsuitable for the current speed.

Lowering the vehicleIf you drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) whilethe vehicle level is being lowered, you will seethe following message shown in white in themultifunction display: Lowering Max. speed20 km/h.The vehicle is lowered to offroad level 2.You will see a message in the multifunction dis-play, for example: Lowering.Offroad level 2 is canceled and the vehicle islowered to offroad level 1 if you:Rdrive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) orRdrive at speeds between 40 mph (64 km/h)and 50 mph (80 km/h) for longer than20 seconds

Offroad level 1 is canceled. Depending on thevehicle's speed and the selected drive program,the vehicle is automatically lowered to normallevel or low level if you:Rdrive at speeds above 70 mph (112 km/h) orRdrive at speeds between 65 mph (105 km/h)and 70 mph (112 km/h) for longer than20 seconds

184 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without the driverhaving to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

i Do not use the HOLD function when drivingoff-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradientsor on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLDfunction cannot hold the vehicle on such sur-faces.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-ically in certain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 185).

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunctionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt isfastenedRthe electric parking brake is releasedRthe transmission is in position D, R or NRDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditions aremet.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil: appears in the multifunction display.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the first timedoes not activate the HOLD function, waitbriefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automaticallyif:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer-tain amount of pressure until: disappearsfrom the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park-ing brake.Ryou activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

Driving systems 185

Drivingandparking

Z

When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-mission is shifted automatically to position P if:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seatbelt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if the HOLD function is activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and:Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there isa malfunction, the transmission may also beautomatically shifted into position P.

AIRMATIC package

General notesAIRMATIC is an air suspension system with var-iable damping for improved driving comfort.Level control ensures the best possible suspen-sion and constant ground clearance, evenwith aladen vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle islowered automatically to improve driving safetyand to reduce fuel consumption. There is alsothe option to manually adjust the vehicle level.AIRMATIC consists of:Rlevel settingsRlevel control andRADS or ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping Sys-tem)

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): your vehicle may also be equipped withthe ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM (Y page 187).Mercedes-AMGvehicles: your vehicle is equip-ped with the ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM(Y page 187).Observe the notes on driving with a trailer(Y page 222).The vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMICSELECT controller (Y page 145) or the level but-ton (Y page 188). The setting always corre-sponds to the last selected function.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, thevehicle begins to compensate for load discrep-ancies while still parked. However, for signifi-cant level changes, such as after the vehicle hasbeen stationary for a long period, the enginemust be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle isonly lowered when the doors are closed. Low-ering is interrupted if a door is opened, and itcontinues once the door has been closed.

ADS and ADS PLUS (Adaptive DampingSystem)

General notesThe Adaptive Damping System automaticallycontrols the calibration of the dampers. Thedamping characteristics adapt to the currentoperating and driving situation.The damping is tuned individually to each wheeland depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface conditionsRthe drive program selectedRthe vehicle level setting

Selecting Comfort mode

186 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

In the Comfort drive program, the driving char-acteristics of your vehicle are more comforta-ble. Therefore, select this mode if you favor amore comfortable driving style. Also select theComfort drive program when driving fast onstraight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of high-way.X Select the Comfort drive program usingDYNAMIC SELECT controller:.The vehicle is adjusted to normal level.

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): in the Comfort drive program, the vehicleis:Rlowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) if you drive atspeeds above 78 mph (125 km/h)Rraised again if you drive at speeds below50 mph (80 km/h)

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: in the Comfort driveprogram, the vehicle is:Rlowered by 0.4 in (10 mm) if you drive atspeeds above 112 mph (180 km/h)Rraised again if you drive at speeds below87 mph (140 km/h)

Selecting Sport mode

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning inthe Sport drive program ensures even bettercontact with the road. Select this drive programwhen employing a sporty driving style, e.g. onwinding country roads.DSR is not available in the Sport drive program.For further information on DSR, see(Y page 216).X Select the Sport drive program usingDYNAMIC SELECT controller:.All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): the vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15mm)compared to the normal level.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehicleremains at the normal level.

Selecting Sport Plus tuning (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

The very firm setting of the suspension setting inthe Sport Plus drive program ensures the bestpossible contact with the road. Select this driveprogram when employing a sporty driving style,e.g. on winding country roads or primarily whendriving on race circuits.DSR is not available in the Sport Plus drive pro-gram. For further information on DSR, see(Y page 216).X Select the Sport Plus drive program usingDYNAMIC SELECT controller:.The vehicle is lowered by 0.4 in (10mm) com-pared to the normal level.

ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEMThe ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM uses active stabil-izers to optimize both driving comfort and vehi-cle dynamics. Depending on the drive programselected (Y page 149), the ACTIVE CURVE SYS-TEM also changes the setting.If you have selected theComfort drive program:Rrolling movement is reduced in the event ofchanging surface undulationsRthe roll angle when cornering is reducedRthe driving is dynamicIf you have selected the Sport drive program:Rthe roll angle is reduced significantlyRthe driving is even more dynamic

Driving systems 187

Drivingandparking

Z

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you have selectedthe Sport Plus drive program:Rthe roll angle is reduced even more signifi-cantlyRthe driving is designed for maximum dyna-mism

Vehicle level

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

G WARNINGWhen you drive with the vehicle raised, thedriving characteristics could be impaired bythe vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehi-cle could rollover more easily, for example ona bend. There is a risk of an accident.Always select as low a vehicle level as possi-ble and adjust your driving style.

G WARNINGWhen you drive with the chassis lowered orraised, the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics can be significantly impaired. Youcould also exceed the permissible vehicleheight if the chassis is raised. There is a risk ofan accident.Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.

G WARNINGDue to the high center of gravity, the vehiclemay start to skid and roll over in the event ofan abrupt steering maneuver and/or whenthe vehicle's speed is not adapted to the roadconditions. There is a risk of an accident.

Always adapt your speed and driving style tothe vehicle's driving characteristics and to theprevailing road and weather conditions.

! When driving on extremely rough terrain,select a high vehicle level in good time. Makesure there is always sufficient ground clear-ance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-over rate than other types of vehicles.Failure to operate this vehicle safely mayresult in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,and severe or fatal injury.RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-nificantly more likely to die than a personwearing a seat belt.You and all vehicle occupants should alwayswear your seat belts.

General notesOnly select raised level if this is appropriate forthe road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consump-tionmay increase and handlingmay be affected.Make changes to the vehicle level while thevehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle toadjust to the new level as quickly as possible.The vehicle level may change visibly if you parkthe vehicle and the outside temperaturechanges. If the temperature drops, the vehiclelevel is lower; with an increase in temperature,the vehicle level rises.If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, thevehicle begins to compensate for load discrep-ancies while still parked. However, for signifi-cant level changes, such as after the vehicle hasbeen stationary for a long period, the enginemust be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle isonly lowered when the doors are closed. Low-ering is interrupted if a door is opened, and itcontinues once the door has been closed.Vehicles with no trailer coupled: below aspeed of 37 mph (60 km/h), you can choosebetween the normal and raised vehicle level.Select the normal vehicle level for normal roadsurfaces and the raised vehicle level for drivingwith snow chains or on particularly poor roadsurfaces. Your selection remains stored even ifyou remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.If you try to select raised level at a speed above37 mph (60 km/h), the Drive More Slowlymessage appears in the multifunction display.

188 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Vehicleswith a trailer coupled: below a speedof 19 mph (30 km/h), you can choose betweenthe normal and raised vehicle level.

Setting the raised vehicle level

X Start the engine.If indicator lamp; is not lit:X Press button:.Indicator lamp; flashes while the vehicle isbeing raised, and lights up continuously assoon as the vehicle reaches the desired level.All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): the vehicle is raised by 2.4 in (60 mm)compared to the normal level.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehicle israised by 2 in (50 mm) compared to the nor-mal level.

The Vehicle Rising message appears in themultifunction display.The message remains until the raised level isreached.If you press the% ora button on themultifunction steering wheel, the message willdisappear.The raised level setting is canceled if you:Rdrive at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) (allvehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Rdrive at speeds above 43 mph (70 km/h)(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Rdrive at speeds between 40 mph (64 km/h)and 43 mph (70 km/h) for approximately 20seconds (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Rdrive at speeds above 19mph (30 km/h) witha trailer

The raised vehicle level remains savedwhen youare not driving within these speed ranges.

Setting the normal vehicle level! Make sure that there is enough groundclearance when the vehicle is being lowered.It could otherwise hit the ground, damagingthe underbody.

X Start the engine.If indicator lamp; is lit:X Press button:.Indicator lamp; flashes while the vehicle isbeing lowered, and goes out as soon as thedesired vehicle level is reached.Vehicles with no trailer coupled: the vehi-cle is adjusted to the height of the selecteddrive program (Y page 145).Vehicles with a trailer coupled: the vehicleis adjusted to normal level regardless of thedrive program selected (Y page 145). Thevehicle remains at the normal level, even if thedrive program is changed.During the adjustment, the Lowering mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

If you press the% ora button on themultifunction steering wheel, the message willdisappear.

AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-tem

General notesThe electronically controlled damping systemworks continuously. This improves drivingsafety and ride comfort.The damping is tuned individually to each wheeland depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection of Sport, Sport + orComfort

The suspension setting can be adjusted usingthe corresponding button in the center consoleor the DYNAMIC SELECT controller(Y page 145).Each time you start the engine with the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode isactivated. For further information about startingthe engine, see (Y page 139).

Driving systems 189

Drivingandparking

Z

Sport mode

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning inSport mode ensures even better contact withthe road. Select this mode when employing asporty driving style, e.g. on winding countryroads.X Press button: repeatedly until indicatorlamp= lights up.You have selected Sport mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

Sport + modeThe very firm setting of the suspension setting inSport + mode ensures the best possible contactwith the road. Select this mode only when driv-ing on race circuits.If indicator lamps; and= are off:X Press button: repeatedly until indicatorlamp; lights up.You have selected Sport + mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORT +mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

In "Sport +" mode, the vehicle is lowered by10 mm compared to the normal level.

Comfort modeIn Comfort mode, the driving characteristics ofyour vehicle are more comfortable. Select thismode if you favor a more comfortable drivingstyle, but also when driving fast on straightroads, e.g. highways.X Press button: repeatedly until indicatorlamps; and= go out.You have selected Comfort mode.The AMG Suspension System COMFORTmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesParking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronicparking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the areaaround your vehicle using six sensors in thefront bumper and six sensors in the rearbumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visuallyand audibly indicates the distance between yourvehicle and an object.Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It isnot a replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parking andexiting a parking space. When maneuvering,parking or pulling out of a parking space, makesure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you are maneuver-ing.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, such asflower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONICdoes not detect such objects when they are inthe immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Youcould damage the vehicle or the objects.The sensors may not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic carwash, the compressed-air brakes on a truckor a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONICto malfunction.PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.

! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer towhitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measuresthe minimum detection range to an obstaclefrom the bumper, not the ball coupling.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated forthe rear area when you establish an electricalconnection between your vehicle and a trailer.Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-matically when you:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the electric parking brakeParking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated atspeeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactiva-ted at lower speeds.

190 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Range of the sensors

General notesParking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take intoaccount obstacles located:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objects.Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhangingloads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side(example)

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.They can otherwise not function correctly. Cleanthe sensors regularly, taking care not to scratchor damage them (Y page 328).

Range

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-evant warning displays light up and a warningtone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-imum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Driving systems 191

Drivingandparking

Z

Warning displays

: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-cle

; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-cle

= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is located onthe dashboard above the center air vents. Thewarning display for the rear area is located onthe headliner in the rear compartment.The warning display for each side of the vehicleis divided into five yellow and two red segments.Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yel-low segments showing operational readiness=light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-mine which warning display is active when theengine is running.

Transmission posi-tion

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicle isrolling backwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-cle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-mittent warning tone for approximately twoseconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two seconds.This indicates that you have now reached theminimum distance.

Deactivating or activating ParkingAssist PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; Deactivating or activating Parking Assist

PARKTRONICIf indicator lamp: lights up, Parking AssistPARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Pilot isthen also deactivated.

i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-cally activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey toposition 2 in the ignition lock.

192 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Only the red segments inthe Parking AssistPARKTRONIC warningdisplays are lit. You alsohear a warning tone forapproximately two sec-onds.Parking AssistPARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately five seconds,and the indicator lamp inthe Parking AssistPARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deacti-vated.X If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

Only the red segments inthe Parking AssistPARKTRONIC warningdisplays are lit. ParkingAssist PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately five sec-onds.

The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is inter-ference.X Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 328).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-sound waves.X Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a differentlocation.

Parking Pilot

General notesParking Pilot is an electronic parking aid withultrasound. It measures the road on both sidesof the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suit-able parking space. Active steering interventionand brake application can assist you duringparking. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is alsoavailable (Y page 190).

Important safety notesParking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediate sur-roundings. You are always responsible for safemaneuvering, parking and exiting a parkingspace. Make sure that no persons, animals orobjects are in the maneuvering range.When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactiva-ted, Parking Pilot is also unavailable.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This couldresult in a collision with another road user.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharpangle. Otherwise, you may damage thewheels or tires.

Parking Pilot may show parking spaces whichare not suitable for parking, e.g.:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfaces

Driving systems 193

Drivingandparking

Z

Parking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parkingspace as possible.RParking spaces that are littered or overgrownmight be identified or measured incorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupied bytrailer drawbars might not be identified assuch or be measured incorrectly.RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the warning messages ofParking Pilot PARKTRONIC during the parkingprocedure (Y page 190)RYou can intervene in the steering procedureto correct it at any time. Parking Pilot will thenbe canceled.RWhen transporting a load that protrudes fromyour vehicle, you must not use Parking PilotRNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains areinstalled.RMake sure that the tire pressures are alwayscorrect. This has a direct influence on theparking characteristics of the vehicle.

Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. noton the pavement

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the detection range ofParking Pilot will not be detected when the park-ing space is measured. These are not taken intoaccount when the parking procedure is calcula-ted, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or load-ing ramps of trucks. Parking Pilot may thereforeguide you into the parking space too early.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range:RActive Park Assist may steer too earlyRthe vehicle may not stop in front of theseobjects

You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.

If objects are located above the detectionrange, stop and deactivate Active ParkingAssist.

For further information on the detection range(Y page 191).Parking Pilot does not assist you parking inspaces at a right angle to the direction of travelif:Rtwo parking spaces are located directly nextto one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a lowobstacle such as a low curbRyou park forwardsParking Pilot does not assist you parking inspaces parallel with or at a right angle to thedirection of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe system reads the parking space as beingblocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-ing blocksRthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-ver intoRthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightParking Pilot is activated automatically whendriving forwards. The system is operational atspeeds of up to approximately 22 mph(35 km/h). While in operation, the system inde-pendently locates andmeasures parking spaceson both sides of the vehicle.Parking Pilot will detect only parking spaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are parallel to the direction of travel andat least 59 in (1.5 m) wide

194 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel andat least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi-cleRthat are at right angles to the direction oftravel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider thanyour vehicle

i Note that Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC cannotmeasure the depth of parking spaces if theyare at right angles to the direction of travel.You need to judge whether your vehicle will fitinto the parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol; as astatus indicator in the instrument cluster. Whena parking space has been detected, an arrowtowards the right or the left also appears. Park-ing Pilot displays only parking spaces on thefront-passenger side as standard. Parkingspaces on the driver's side are displayed assoon as the turn signal on the driver's side isactivated. When parking on the driver's side,this must remain activated until you confirm theuse of Parking Pilot by pressing thea buttonon themultifunction steering wheel. The systemautomatically determines whether the parkingspace is parallel or at right angles to the direc-tion of travel.A parking space is displayed while you are driv-ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft(15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGIf you leave the vehicle when it is only beingbraked by Active Parking Assist it could rollaway if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.Before leaving the vehicle, always secure itagainst rolling away.

i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detectsobstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automaticallywhilst the vehicle is being parked. You areresponsible for braking in good time.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-bol shows the desired parking space in theinstrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:% message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure:press the%button on the multifunction steering wheel orpull away.

orX To park using Parking Pilot: press theabutton on the multifunction steering wheel.The Parking Pilot Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at alltimes. When backing up, drive at a speedbelow approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-erwise, Parking Pilot will be canceled.Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstillwhen the vehicle approaches the rear borderof the parking space.Maneuvering may be required in tight parkingspaces.

The Parking Pilot Active Select DObserve Surroundings message appears inthe multifunction display.X Shift the transmission to position D while thevehicle is stationary.Parking Pilot immediately steers in the otherdirection.The Parking Pilot Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill.

The Parking Pilot Active Select RObserve Surroundings message appears inthe multifunction display.As soon as the parking procedure is complete,the Parking Pilot Finished message

Driving systems 195

Drivingandparking

Z

appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicleis now parked. The vehicle is kept stationarywithout the driver having to depress the brakepedal. The braking effect is canceled when youdepress the accelerator pedal.Parking Pilot no longer supports you with steer-ing interventions and brake applications. WhenParking Pilot is finished, you must steer andbrake again yourself. Parking AssistPARKTRONIC is still available.Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park-ing space after parking is dependent on vari-ous factors. These include the position andshape of the vehicles parked in front andbehind it and the conditions of the location. Itmay be the case that Parking Pilot guides youtoo far into a parking space, or not far enoughinto it. In some cases, it may also lead youacross or onto the curb. If necessary, youshould cancel the parking procedure withParking Pilot.RYou can also select preselect transmissionpositionD. The vehicle redirects and does notdrive as far into the parking space. Should thetransmission change take place too early, theparking procedure will be canceled. A sensi-ble parking position can no longer be ach-ieved from this position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order for Parking Pilot to assist you:Rthe border of the parking space must be highenough at the front and the rear. A curb is toosmall, for example.Rthe border of the parking space must not betoo wide, as the position of the vehicle mustnot exceed an angle of 45° to the startingposition as it is maneuvering into the parkingspace.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

Parking Pilot can assist you with exiting a park-ing space only if you have parked the vehicleparallel to the direction of travel.

i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detectsobstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automaticallywhilst the vehicle is exiting the parking space.You are responsible for braking in good time.

X Start the engine.X Release the electric parking brake.

X Switch on the turn signal in the direction youwill drive out of the parking space.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:% message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure:press the%button on the multifunction steering wheel orpull away.

orX To exit a parking space using ParkingPilot: press thea button on the multi-function steering wheel.The Parking Pilot Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Donot exceed a maximum speed of approx-imately 6mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-ing space. Otherwise, Parking Pilot will becanceled.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R asrequired or according to the message whilethe vehicle is stationary.Parking Pilot immediately steers in the otherdirection. The Parking Pilot ActiveAccelerate and Brake Observe Sur‐roundings message appears in the multi-function display.i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Drive forwards and back up as prompted bythe Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-plays, several times if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely, the steering wheel is moved to thestraight-ahead position. You hear a tone and theParking Pilot Finishedmessage appears inthe multifunction display. You will then have tosteer and merge into traffic on your own. Park-ing Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. You cantake over the steering before the vehicle hasexited the parking space completely. This isuseful, for example when you recognize that it isalready possible to pull out of the parking space.

196 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Canceling Parking PilotX Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Parking Pilot is immediately canceled. TheParking Pilot Canceledmessage appearsin the multifunction display.

orX Press the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC button(Y page 192).Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched offand Parking Pilot is immediately canceled.The Parking Pilot Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

Parking Pilot is canceled automatically if:Rthe electric parking brake is engagedRtransmission position P is selectedRparking using Parking Pilot is no longer pos-sibleRyou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The

÷warning lamp lights up in the instrumentcluster

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-appears and themultifunction display shows theParking Pilot Canceled message.When Parking Pilot is canceled, you must steerand brake again yourself.If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle isbraked to a standstill. To drive on, depress theaccelerator again.

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your

vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-tem.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text shown in the multimedia systemdisplay depends on the language setting. Thefollowing are examples of rear view cameradisplays in the multimedia system.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsiblefor safemaneuvering andparking.Whenmaneu-vering or parking, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area in whichyou are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will function ina limited manner:Rif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-terRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedObserve the notes on cleaning(Y page 328)Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of the rearview camera may be restricted due to additionalaccessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.license plate holder, bicycle rack).For technical reasons, leaving the standardheight can result in inaccuracies in the guidelines on vehicles with a height-adjustable chas-sis.

i The rear view camera is protected from rain-drops and dust by means of a flap. When therear view camera is activated, this flap opens.

Driving systems 197

Drivingandparking

Z

The flap closes again when:Ryou have finished themaneuvering processRyou switch off the engineRyou open the cargo compartmentObserve the notes on cleaning (Y page 328).For technical reasons, the flap may remainopen briefly after the rear view camera hasbeen deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcameraX To activate: make sure that the SmartKey isin position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by R gearfunction is selected in themultimedia system;see the Digital Operator's Manual.

X Engage reverse gear.The rear view camera flap opens. The multi-media systemshows the area behind the vehi-cle with guide lines.The image from the rear view camera is avail-able throughout the maneuvering process.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-vates if you shift the transmission to P or afterdriving forwards a short distance.

Displays in the multimedia systemThe rear view cameramay show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.The rear view camera does not show objects inthe following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking of the tires at currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicleThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-sion is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

198 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

: Front warning display; Additional measurement operational readi-

ness indicator for Parking AssistPARKTRONIC

= Rear warning displayVehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC:when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-tional (Y page 191), additional measurementoperational readiness indicator; appears inthe multimedia system. If the Parking AssistPARKTRONIC warning displays are active orlight up, warning displays: and= are alsoactive or light up correspondingly in the multi-media system.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

? Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 198).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, carefullyback up until you reach the end position.Red guide line? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost parallelin the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 198).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the parkingspace until yellow guide line; reaches park-ing space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that position andback up carefully.

Driving systems 199

Drivingandparking

Z

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.The white lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possible.

: White guide line at current steering wheelangle

; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center positionwhile the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel

= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reached thefinal position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel in theparking space.

180° view

: Symbol for the 180° view function; Own vehicle= Warning displays for Parking Assist

PARKTRONICYou can also use the rear view camera to selecta 180° view.When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-tional (Y page 191), a symbol for your own vehi-cle appears in the multimedia system. If theParking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displaysare active, warning displays= light up in themultimedia system in yellow or red accordingly.

200 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

360° camera

General notesThe 360° camera is a system consisting of fourcameras.The system processes images from the follow-ing cameras:RRear view cameraRFront cameraRTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mirrorsThe cameras capture the immediate surround-ings of the vehicle. The system supports you,e.g. when parking or if vision is restricted at anexit.You can show pictures from the 360° camera infull-screen mode or in seven different split-screen views on the multimedia system display.A split-screen view also includes a top view ofthe vehicle. This view is calculated from the datasupplied by the installed cameras (virtual cam-era).The six split-screen views are:RTop view and picture from the rear view cam-era (130° viewing angle)RTop view and image from the front camera(130° viewing angle without displaying themaximum steering wheel angle)RTop view and enlarged rear viewRTop view and enlarged front viewRTop view and rear-view images from the exte-rior mirror cameras (rear wheel view)RTop view and forward-view images from theexterior mirror cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift thetransmission from D or R to N, the dynamicguidelines are hidden.When you change between transmission posi-tions D and R, you see the previously selectedfront or rear view.Distances measured by Parking AssistPARKTRONIC will also be optically displayed:Rin split screen view as red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle icon in the top view, orRat the bottom right as red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle symbol in full-screenmode

The line thickness and color of the bracketsshow how far the vehicle is away from an object:

Ryellow brackets with thin lines: Parking AssistPARKTRONIC is activeRyellow brackets with normal lines: an object ispresent in close range of the vehicleRred line: an object is present in the immediateclose range of the vehicle

i The camera in the rear area is protectedfrom raindrops and dust by means of a flap.When the camera is activated, this flap opens.The flap closes again when:Ryou have finished themaneuvering processRyou switch off the engineRyou open the cargo compartmentObserve the notes on cleaning (Y page 328).For technical reasons, the flap may remainopen briefly after the camera has been deac-tivated.

Important safety notesThe 360°camera is only an aid and may show adistorted view of obstacles, show them incor-rectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not asubstitute for attentive driving.You are always responsible for safe maneuver-ing and parking. When maneuvering or parking,make sure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you are maneuver-ing.You are always responsible for safety, and mustalways pay attention to your surroundings whenparking and maneuvering. This applies to theareas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle.You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth-ers.The 360° camera will not function or will func-tion in a limited manner:Rif the doors are openRif the exterior mirrors are folded inRif the tailgate is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the cameras are exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-ter

Driving systems 201

Drivingandparking

Z

Rif the camera lenses are dirty or coveredRif the vehicle components in which the cam-eras are installed are damaged. In this event,have the camera position and setting checkedat a qualified specialist workshop

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. Youcan otherwise injure others or cause damage toobjects or the vehicle.Guide lines are always shown at road level. Intrailer mode, the guide lines are shown at thelevel of the trailer coupling.The field of vision and other functions of thecamera system may be restricted due to addi-tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.license plate holder, bicycle rack).On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,depending on technical conditions, leaving thestandard height can result in:Rinaccuracies in the guide linesRinaccuracies in the display of generatedimages (top view)

Activation conditionsThe 360° camera image can be displayed if:Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° cameraRthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignitionlockRthe multimedia system is switched on

Switching on the 360° cameraX Press theØ button in the center consolefor longer than two seconds.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Ra split screen with top view and the imagefrom the front camera orRa split screen with top view and the imagefrom the rear view camera

orX Press theØ button in the center console.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Select 360° Camera and press7 to confirm.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Ra split screen with top view and the imagefrom the front camera orRa split screen with top view and the imagefrom the rear view camera

Activating the 360° camera usingreverse gearThe 360° camera images can be automaticallydisplayed by engaging reverse gear.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by R gearfunction is selected in themultimedia system;see the separate operating instructions.

X To show the 360° camera image: engagereverse gear.The multimedia system shows the areabehind the vehicle in split-screen mode. Yousee the top view of the vehicle and the imagefrom the rear view camera.

Selecting the split-screens or 180° viewSelecting split-screen viewX To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:slide5 the controller.

X To select one of the vehicle icons: turn3the controller.

X To switch to 180° View: turn3 the con-troller to select 180° View and press7 toconfirm.

i The 180° Viewoption is only available in thefollowing views:RTop view with picture from the rear viewcameraRTop viewwith picture from the front camera

Displays in the multimedia system

Important safety notesThe camera system may show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.Obstacles are not shown by the system in thefollowing locations:Runder the front and rear bumpersRvery close to the front and rear bumpersRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandleRvery close to the exterior mirrorsRin the transitional areas between the variouscameras in the virtual top view

202 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear viewcamera

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and rear view camera image

= Guide line for the maximum steering angle? Yellow lane marking of the tires at current

steering wheel angle (dynamic)A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

D BumperE Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicleThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-sion is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Top view with picture from the front cam-era

: Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking of the tires at currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

Driving systems 203

Drivingandparking

Z

A Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle

B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and rear view camera image enlarged

; Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

This view assists you in estimating the distanceto the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as anenlarged front view.

Top view with image from the camera inthe exterior mirrors

: Symbol for setting the top view with imagefrom the forward camera in the exterior mir-rors

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (right side ofvehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (left side ofvehicle)

i You can also select the camera setting in theexterior mirrors for the rear-facing view.

Top view with trailer view

: Symbol for the trailer view setting; Trailer drawbar marker assistant= Ball coupling? Red guide line at a distance of approximately

0.30 m from the ball couplingThe lines are shown at the level of the trailercoupling.

i For technical reasons, the ball coupling ofthe trailer tow hitch is only partially visible inthe multimedia system display.

180° view

: Symbol for the full screen setting with rearview camera image

; Own vehicle= Warning displays for Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC

i 180° view can also be selected as frontview.

Select this view when you are driving out of anexit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,for example.

204 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Exiting 360° camera display modeThe 360° camera display is stopped:Rwhen you select transmission position P, orRwhen you are driving at moderate speedsThe previous display appears in the multimediasystem. You can also switch the display byselecting the& symbol in the display andpressing the controller to confirm.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It isactive in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSISTdetects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-ing lapses in concentration on the part of thedriver, it suggests taking a break.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. Itmight not always recognize fatigue or increasinginattentiveness in time or fail to recognize themat all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed or notoccur at all:Rif the length of the journey is less than approx-imately 30 minutesRif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surfaceis uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-erationRif you are predominantly driving slower than37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph(200 km/h)Rif you are driving with the Steering Pilot ofDistance Pilot DISTRONIC activatedRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as when youchange lanes or change your speed

The attention level evaluation is deleted andrestarts when the journey is continued, if:Ryou switch off the engineRyou take off your seat belt and open the driv-er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or totake a break

Displaying the attention level

You can have current status information dis-played in the assistance menu (Y page 236) ofthe on-board computer.X Select the Assistance display for ATTENTIONASSIST using the on-board computer(Y page 237).

The following information is displayed:RLength of the journey since the last break.Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTIONASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levelsfrom high to low.RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculatethe attention level and cannot output a warn-ing, the System suspended messageappears. The bar display then changes thedisplay, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below37 mph (60 km/h) or above 125 mph(200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 237).The system determines the attention level ofthe driver depending on the setting selected:

Standard selected: the sensitivity with whichthe system determines the attention level is setto normal.Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher.The attention level detected by Attention Assist

Driving systems 205

Drivingandparking

Z

is adapted accordingly and the driver is warnedearlier.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theÀ symbol and OFF appear in the multifunc-tion display in the assistance display when theengine is running.WhenATTENTIONASSIST has been deactivated,it is automatically reactivated after the enginehas been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-responds to the last selection activated (stand-ard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction displayIf fatigue or increasing lapses in concentrationare detected, a warning appears in the multi-function display: Attention Assist: Take aBreak!In addition to the message shown in the multi-function display, you will then hear a warningtone.X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the message by pressing theabutton on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest. If you do not takea break, you will be warned again after15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happenif ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indi-cators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concen-tration.Vehicles with COMAND: if a warning is issuedin the multifunction display, a service stationsearch is performed in COMAND. You can selecta service station and navigation to this servicestation will then begin. This function can be acti-vated and deactivated in COMAND.

Traffic Sign Assist

General notesTraffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speedpermitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.The data stored in the navigation system andgeneral traffic regulations are used to determinethe current speed limit.As Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system,traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near road-works) are not detected.

If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle ispassed, the display of the speed limits is upda-ted.Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by anadditional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are alsoshown.The traffic signs are only displayed with therestrictions if:Rthe regulation must be observed with therestriction, orRTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determinewhether the restriction applies

If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine amaximumpermitted speed fromany of the avail-able sources, no speed limit is displayed in theinstrument cluster either.

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-tries. In this case, symbol: is shown in theassistance graphic display (Y page 237).

Important safety notesTraffic SignAssist is only an aid and is not alwaysable to correctly display speed limits. Trafficsigns always have priority over the Traffic SignAssist display.The system may be either functionally impairedor temporarily unavailable if the information inthe digital streetmap of the navigation system isincorrect or out of date.

Instrument cluster display

Displaying the assistance graphicX Call up the assistance graphics display func-tion using the on-board computer(Y page 237).

X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display.Detected traffic signs are displayed in theinstrument cluster.

206 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Speed limit with unknown restriction

: Maximum permitted speed; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for

which the restriction in the additional sign isrelevant

= Additional sign for unknown restrictionA maximum permitted speed of 80 mph(80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 mph(60 km/h) with an unknown restriction apply.

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 207) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 209).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist monitors the areas on eitherside of the vehicle that are not visible to thedriver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrorsdraws your attention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on the cor-responding turn signal to change lane, you willalso receive an optical and audible warning.Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving. Always ensure that there issufficient distance to the side for other roadusers and obstacles.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCC asa "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensoris intended for use in an automotive radarsystem only. Removing, tampering with, oraltering the device will void any warranties,and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-per with, alter, or use in any non-approvedway.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

Radar sensorsThe radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that thebumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. Thesensors must not be covered, for example bycycle racks or overhanging loads. Following asevere impact or in the event of damage to thebumpers, have the function of the radar sensorschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.

Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain or snowRnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles

Driving systems 207

Drivingandparking

Z

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next toyour vehicle, as shown in the diagram.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if there are vehicles driving at the inneredge of their lanes.On very wide lanes, vehicles in the adjacent lanemay not be shown if they are too far away.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid laneborders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, such astrucks.

Warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampWhen Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights up yellowat speeds of up to 20mph (30 km/h). At speedsabove 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lampgoes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the correspond-ing side lights up red. This warning is alwaysemitted when a vehicle enters the blind spotmonitoring range from behind or from the side.When you overtake a vehicle, the warning onlyoccurs if the difference in speed is less than7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assistis no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warning lampsis adjusted automatically according to the ambi-ent light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring range ofBlind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-sponding turn signal, a double warning tonesounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. If the turnsignal remains on, vehicles detected are indica-ted by the flashing of red warning lamp:.There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activatedin the on-board computer (Y page 238).

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors lightup red for approximately 1.5 seconds andthen turn yellow.

208 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Towing a trailerWhen you attach a trailer, make sure you havecorrectly established the electrical connection.This can be accomplished by checking the trailerlighting. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is deac-tivated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow inthe exterior mirrors and the Blind SpotAssist Not Available When Towing aTrailer See Operator's Manual messageappears in the multifunction display.

i You can deactivate the indicator lamps inthe exterior mirrors.To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist when:Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignitionlockRthe engine is not running

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

: Lane Keeping Assist cameraLaneKeepingAssistmonitors the area in front ofyour vehicle with camera:, which is mountedat the top of thewindshield. Active LaneKeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andcan warn you before you leave your lane unin-tentionally.This function is available in the range between40mph and 120mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).A warning may be given if a front wheel passesover a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel forup to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.

In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-ing Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. LaneKeeping Assist cannot take into account theroad, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsiblefor the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-ing in your lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi-cle in the lane.The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. ifthe road surface is wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkingsfor a lane, e.g. in areas with road constructionworkRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or merge

Driving systems 209

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the road

Switching on Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandard or Adaptive (Y page 238).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 237) are shown in green. Lane Keep-ing Assist is ready for use.

StandardIf Standard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

AdaptiveWhen Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark-ing, the system recognizes certain conditionsand warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Driving Assistance PLUS package

General notesThe Driving Assistance Plus package consists ofDistance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 174), ActiveBlind Spot Assist (Y page 210) and Active LaneKeeping Assist (Y page 213).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas oneither side of the vehicle that are not directlyvisible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facingradar sensors. A warning lamp lights up in theexterior mirrors and draws your attention tovehicles detected in the monitored area. If youthen switch on the corresponding turn signal tochange lanes, you will also receive a visual andaudible collision warning. If a risk of lateral col-lision is detected, corrective braking may helpyou avoid a collision. Before a course-correctingbrake application, Active Blind Spot Assist eval-uates the space in the direction of travel and atthe sides of the vehicle. For this, Active BlindSpot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sen-sors.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is nota substitute for attentive driving.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only: This device has been approved bythe FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". Theradar sensor is intended for use in an auto-motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-ing, or altering of the device will void any war-

210 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Donot tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

Radar sensorsThe Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors areintegrated into the front and rear bumpers andbehind a cover in the radiator trim. Make surethat the bumpers and the cover in the radiatorgrill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The sensorsmust not be covered, for example by cycle racksor overhanging loads. Following an accident orin the event of damage to the bumpers, have thefunction of the radar sensors checked at a quali-fied specialist workshop. Active Blind SpotAssist may otherwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring areaG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an accident.Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or sprayVehicles in the monitoring range are then notreliably indicated.Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrowvehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, ormay only detect them too late.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if there are vehicles at the edge of theirlane.On very wide lanes, vehicles in the adjacent lanemay not be shown if they are too far away.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid laneborders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.trucks, for a prolonged time.

Driving systems 211

Drivingandparking

Z

Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampActive Blind Spot Assist is not active at speedsbelow approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehi-cles in the monitoring range are then not indi-cated.When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indi-cator lamp: in the exterior mirrors lights upyellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). Atspeeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicatorlamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist isoperational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange at speeds above approximately 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the correspond-ing side lights up red. This warning lamp alwayslights up when a vehicle enters the blind spotmonitoring range from behind or from the side.When you overtake a vehicle with a difference inspeed of less than 7 mph (12 km/h), a delayedwarning occurs.The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is notoperational.The brightness of the indicator/warning lampsis adjusted automatically according to thebrightness of the surroundings.

Visual and acoustic collision warningIf you switch on the turn signals to change lanesand a vehicle is detected in the side monitoringrange, you receive a visual and acoustic collisionwarning. You then hear a double warning toneand red warning lamp: flashes. If the turn sig-nal remains on, detected vehicles are indicatedby the flashing of redwarning lamp:. There areno further warning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationIf Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat-eral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. Thisis meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.

G WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk of anaccident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou ormakes a course-correcting brake appli-cation. Always maintain a safe distance at thesides.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs,red warning lamp: flashes in the exterior mir-ror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition,display underlining the danger of a side collisionappears in the multifunction display.In very rare cases, the system may make aninappropriate brake application. A course-cor-recting brake application may be interrupted atany time if you steer slightly in the oppositedirection or accelerate.The course-correcting brake application is avail-able in the speed range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Either no braking application, or a course-cor-recting brake application adapted to the drivingsituation occurs if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crashbarriers, close to both sides of your vehicle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at theside.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds.Ryou brake or accelerate significantly.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Rthe offroad program is activated (vehicleswithout the Offroad Engineering package).Rthe Offroad or Offroad Plus drive program isactivated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engi-neering package).

212 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Rthe LOW RANGE offroad gear is activated(vehicles with the Offroad Engineering pack-age).Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire isdetected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 238).

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors lightup red for approximately 1.5 seconds andthen turn yellow.

Towing a trailerWhen you attach a trailer, make sure you havecorrectly established the electrical connection.This can be accomplished by checking the trailerlighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is then deacti-vated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in theexterior mirrors and the Active Blind SpotAsst. Not Available When Towing aTrailer See Operator's Manual messageappears in the multifunction display.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of multifunctioncamera: at the top of the windshield. Variousdifferent areas to the front, rear and side of yourvehicle are also monitored with the aid of theradar sensor system. Active Lane KeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andcan warn you before you leave your lane unin-tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a

lane-correcting application of the brakes canbring the vehicle back into the original lane.This function is available in a speed rangebetween 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist youwhen driving, the radar sensor system must beoperational.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, Active LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics. ActiveLane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountroad, weather or traffic conditions. Active LaneKeeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsi-ble for the distance to the vehicle in front, forvehicle speed, for braking in good time and forstaying in your lane.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuouslykeep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenmake a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-ing situation.

The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. ifthe road surface is wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the camera

Driving systems 213

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkingsfor a lane, e.g. in areas with road constructionworkRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are highly variable shade conditions onthe roadwayRno vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane andthere are broken lane markings

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheel passesover a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel forup to 1.5 seconds.In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark-ing, the system detects certain conditions andwarns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abendRthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highwayRthe system detects solid lane markingsThe warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanesRyou cut the corner on a bend

Lane-correcting brake applicationG WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-cation.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist does not detecttraffic conditions or road users. In very rarecases, the systemmaymake an inappropriate

brake application, e.g. after intentionally driv-ing over a solid lane marking. There is a risk ofan accident.An inappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly inthe opposite direction. Alwaysmake sure thatthere is sufficient distance on the side forother traffic or obstacles.

If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan-ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side.This ismeant to assist you in bringing the vehicleback to the original lane.If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,display: appears in the multifunction display.A lane-correcting brake application can bemadeafter driving over a lane marking recognized asbeing solid or broken. Before this, a warningmust be given bymeans of intermittent vibrationin the steering wheel. In addition, a lane withlane markings on both sides must be recog-nized.In the case of a broken lane marking beingdetected, a lane-correcting brake applicationcan only be made if a vehicle has been detectedin the adjacent lane. The following vehicles canhave an influence on brake application: oncom-ing traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehi-cles that are driving parallel to your vehicle.

i A further lane-correcting brake applicationcan only occur after your vehicle has returnedto the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-erate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou have switched on the turn signal.

214 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-eration.RESP® is switched off.Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the elec-trical connection to the trailer has been cor-rectly established.Rthe offroad program is activated (vehicleswithout the Offroad Engineering package).Rthe Offroad or Offroad Plus drive program isactivated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engi-neering package).Rthe LOW RANGE offroad gear is activated(vehicles with the Offroad Engineering pack-age).Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane inwhich you are driving.Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tirehas been detected and displayed.

There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keep-ing Assist could misjudge the given traffic sit-uation. An inappropriate brake application maybe interrupted at any time if you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction.Rswitch on the turn signal.Rclearly brake or accelerate.A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-ted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.Rlane markings are no longer detected.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandard or Adaptive (Y page 238).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 237) are shown in green. Active LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.If Standard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:

Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

When Adaptive is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

Towing a trailerWhen you attach a trailer, make sure you havecorrectly established the electrical connection.This can be accomplished by checking the trailerlighting. Lane-correcting brake application doesnot take placewhen towing a trailer. Active LaneKeeping Assist is not activated and the lines inthe assistance graphic are gray.

Off-road driving systems

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are perma-nently driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, itimproves the traction of your vehicle whenevera drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip.If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC canneither reduce the risk of accident nor overridethe laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot takeaccount of road, weather and traffic conditions.4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible forthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.This may damage the transfer case. Damageof this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels mustremain either on the ground or be fully raised.Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-cle with all wheels in full contact with theground.

Driving systems 215

Drivingandparking

Z

! A function or performance test should onlybe carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.Before you operate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualifiedworkshop. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.

i In wintry driving conditions, the maximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if youuse winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chainsif necessary.

Further information about "Driving off-road"(Y page 168).

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

General notesDSR is an aid to assist you when driving down-hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speedselected on the on-board computer. The steeperthe downhill gradient, the greater the DSR brak-ing effect on the vehicle. When driving on flatstretches of road or on an uphill gradient, theDSR braking effect is minimal or nonexistent.DSR controls the vehicle’s speed when it is acti-vated and the transmission is in position D, R orN. You can drive at a higher or a lower speedthan that set on the on-board computer at anytime by accelerating or braking.

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf the speed driven and the set speed deviateand you activate DSR on a slippery road sur-face, the wheelsmay lose traction. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Before switching DSR on, please take intoconsideration the road surface and the differ-ence between driving speed and the setspeed.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR canneither reduce the risk of accident nor overridethe laws of physics. DSR cannot take account ofroad, weather and traffic conditions. DSR is onlyan aid. You are responsible for the distance tothe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for brak-ing in good time and for staying in your lane.You are always responsible for keeping controlof the vehicle and for assessing whether thedownhill gradient can bemanaged. DSRmay notalways be able to keep to the set speed, depend-

ing on road surface and tire conditions. Select aset speed suitable for the prevailing conditionsandwhen necessary, apply the brakesmanually.

Activating DSR

X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.Theà DSR symbol appears in the multi-function display.

You can only activate DSR when driving atspeeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).If the current vehicle speed is too high, theÃDSR symbol appears in themultifunction displaywith the Max. speed 25 mph message (Can-ada: 40 km/h).If you have activated DSR and you change thedrive program, DSR is deactivated. If you switchbetween the offroad and offroad plus drive pro-grams, DSR remains activated.

Deactivating DSRX Press button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.Theà DSR symbol appears in the multi-function display with the Off message.

On vehicles with the Offroad Engineering pack-age, if you select a different drive program, DSRis also deactivated. If you switch between theOffroad programs, DSR remains activated.DSR switches off automatically if you drivefaster than 28 mph (Canada: 45 km/h). Theà DSR symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay with the Off message. The status indi-cator in the multifunction display goes out. Youalso hear a warning. On vehicles with the Off-road Engineering package, if you select a differ-ent onroad/offroad program, DSR is also deac-tivated.

216 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Changing the set speed

X To increase or reduce the set speedin1 mphincrements (Canada:1 km/hincrements): briefly press the cruisecontrol lever up: for a higher set speed ordown; for a lower set speed.The set speed appears in the multifunctiondisplay with theà DSR symbol.

When DSR is activated, you can change the setspeed to a value between 1 mph and 11 mph(Canada: between 2 km/h and 18 km/h).

i The DSR set speed is always changed in1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h incre-ments). This is regardless of whether youpress the cruise control lever to or beyond thepressure point.

Offroad program (vehicles without theOffroad Engineering package)

General notesSelect the Offroad program for easily negotia-ble off-road terrain, e.g. dirt tracks, gravel orsandy surfaces. The engine's torque is restric-ted to a limited degree and the drive wheels canspin. The spinning wheels produce a cuttingeffect for better traction. ABS, ESP® and 4ETSprograms especially adapted to off-road drivingare activated. A gentle accelerator pedal curveis also selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal mustbe depressed much further in order to acceler-ate.You can select the Offroad drive program atspeeds below 60 mph (96 km/h). The Driveprogram "Offroad" Max. Speed 60 mphmessage appears in the multifunction display. Ifyou drive at speeds of more than 60 mph(96 km/h) and select the Offroad drive pro-gram, the Drive More Slowly message

appears in the multifunction display. The lastactive drive program is selected again.Do not use the Offroad program on roads thatare snow-covered or icy or if you have installedyour vehicle with snow chains.

Selecting the Offroad program

Selecting the Offroad programX To select drive program: turn DYNAMICSELECT controller: until indicator lamp;lights up.The Drive Program "Offroad1" Max.Speed 60 mph message appears in the mul-tifunction display.The vehicle is raised by +2.4 in (60 mm).

The vehicle is lowered to normal level again ifyou:Rdrive at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) (allvehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Rdrive at speeds above 43 mph (70 km/h)(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Rdrive at speeds between 40 mph (64 km/h)and 43 mph (70 km/h) for approximately20 seconds (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

The vehicle changes from theOffroad drive pro-gram to the Comfort drive program if you drivefaster than 70 mph (112 km/h).The Drive More Slowly message appears inthe multifunction display.Further information about "Driving off-road"(Y page 168).

Driving systems 217

Drivingandparking

Z

Offroad programs (vehicles with Off-road Engineering package)

General notesThe Offroad and Offroad Plus drive programsassist you when driving off-road. The engine'sperformance characteristics and the gearshift-ing characteristics of the automatic transmis-sion are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP®and 4ETS programs especially adapted to off-road driving are activated. An accelerator pedalcurve suitable for the terrain is selected, i.e. theaccelerator pedal must be depressed further toaccelerate.Do not use the Offroad or Offroad Plus driveprograms on roads that are snow-covered or icy,or if you have installed your vehicle with snowchains.

Offroad drive program

: DYNAMIC SELECT controller; Offroad program indicator lampSelect the Offroad program for easily negotia-ble off-road terrain, e.g. dirt tracks, gravel orsandy surfaces. The engine's torque is restric-ted to a limited degree and the drive wheels canspin. The spinning wheels produce a cuttingeffect for better traction. ABS, ESP® and 4ETSprograms especially adapted to off-road drivingare activated. A gentle accelerator pedal curveis also selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal mustbe depressed much further in order to acceler-ate.You can select the Offroad drive program atspeeds below 60 mph (96 km/h). The DriveProgram "Offroad" Max. Speed 60 mphmessage appears in the multifunction display. Ifyou drive at speeds above 60 mph (96 km/h)and select the Offroad drive program, theDrive More Slowly message appears in the

multifunction display. The last active drive pro-gram is selected again.

Selecting the Offroad programX To select a drive program: turn DYNAMICSELECT controller: until indicator lamp;lights up.The Drive program "Offroad" Max.speed 60 mph message appears in the mul-tifunction display.The vehicle is raised by +1.2 in (30 mm).

The vehicle changes from theOffroad drive pro-gram to the Comfort drive program if you drivefaster than 70 mph (112 km/h).The Drive more slowly message appears inthe multifunction display.

Offroad Plus drive program

: DYNAMIC SELECT controller; Offroad Plus drive program indicator lampSelect theOffroadPlus drive program for roughterrain, e.g. for steep and/or uneven terrain orfor driving on rocky terrain.Your vehicle has an automatically activated dif-ferential lock for the transfer case. It controlsthe balance between the front and rear axles.The differential lock improves the vehicle's trac-tion. 4ETS (Y page 67) controls the balancebetween both wheels on an axle.

Selecting the Offroad Plus drive programX To select drive program: turn DYNAMICSELECT controller: until indicator lamp;lights up.The Drive program "Offroad Plus"Max. speed 25 mphmessage appears in themultifunction display.

218 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

RThe Offroad Plus program is selected andthe vehicle is raised by +1.2 in (30 mm)compared with the Offroad drive program.RDSR is switched on.RThe differential lock is closed.

You can select the Offroad Plus drive program atspeeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).The Offroad Plus drive program automaticallyswitches to the Offroad drive program if youdrive faster than 30mph (45 km/h). The Drivemore slowly message appears in the multi-function display.Further information about "Driving off-road"(Y page 168).

LOWRANGE offroad gear (vehicles withthe Offroad Engineering package)

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear ona slippery road surface, the wheels could losetraction:Rif you remove your foot from the accelera-tor pedal when drivingRif off road ABS intervenes when brakingIf the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can nolonger be steered. There is an increased dan-ger of skidding and accidents.Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gearwhen driving on slippery road surfaces.

G WARNINGIf you do not wait for the transfer case gearchange process to complete, the transfercase could remain in the neutral position. Thepower transmission to the driven wheels isthen interrupted. There is a danger of thevehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is arisk of an accident.Wait until the transfer case shift process iscompleted.

Do not turn off the engine while changing gearand do not shift the automatic transmission toanother position.

General notes

: LOW RANGE offroad gear button; LOW RANGE offroad gear indicator lamp

HIGH RANGE Position for all normal on-road driving conditions

LOW RANGE Offroad position for drivingoff-road and fordingThe transmission ratiobetween the engine andwheels is only approx-imately one third of that inthe HIGH RANGE road posi-tion. Drive torque is thusproportionately higher.Do not use LOW RANGE:Ron slippery road surfaces,e.g. in the case of slushRon snow or ice-coveredroadsRif you have mounted snowchains to your vehicle

The LOW RANGE offroad gear assists you indriving off-road and when fording. When LOWRANGE is engaged, the engine’s performancecharacteristics and the gearshifting character-istics of the automatic transmission are adaptedfor this purpose.Further information about "Driving off-road"(Y page 168). You will find information aboutdriving safety systems in conjunction withLOWRANGE in the "Safety" section (Y page 63).

Driving systems 219

Drivingandparking

Z

From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGHRANGE if:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position NRyou are driving at a speed below 40 km/h

X Press LOW RANGE button:.Indicator lamp; flashes.When the gear change is complete, indicatorlamp; lights up. LOW RANGE indicatorappears in themultifunction display and in thestatus indicator.While indicator lamp; is flashing, you cancancel the gear change by pressing LOWRANGE button: again.

i You cannot activate LOW RANGE if theSPORT drive program is activated. The LOWRANGE Not in Drive Program "Sport"message then appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

From LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGHRANGE if:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position NRyou are driving at a speed below 70 km/h

X Press LOW RANGE button:.Indicator lamp; flashes.When the gear change is complete, indicatorlamp; goes out. In the multifunction dis-play, the LOW RANGE Off message appearsand the status indicator goes out.While indicator lamp; is flashing, you cancancel the gear change by pressing LOWRANGE button: again.

Messages in the multifunction displayIf a gear change process has not been successful, the following messages may be displayed in themultifunction display:

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

LOW RANGE Max.Speed 24 mph You have been driving faster than 24mph (40 km/h). Additionally, theindicator lamp on the button in the center console is flashing.X Drive more slowly to carry out the gear change process.

LOW RANGE Shift toPosition N Briefly The transmission is in position D and you are driving at below40 km/h.X Shift the transmission to N to complete the gear change process.

220 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

LOW RANGE ShiftingCanceled PleaseReactivateThe gear change process was not carried out.X Ensure that all gear change conditions are fulfilled and carry out thegear change process again.

LOW RANGE StopApply Parking Brake A warning tone also sounds. The gear change process has not beencompleted. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position. There is no con-nection between the engine and the drive wheels.

! Do not drive any further. You could otherwise damage the vehi-cle's drive train.

X Stop the vehicle. Take into account the road and traffic conditionswhen doing this.

X Depress the electric parking brake (Y page 160).X Carry out the gear change process again.If the gear change process has been carried out, the LOW RANGEStop Apply Parking Brake message disappears.

Driving dynamics display in theCOMAND display (vehicles with the Off-road Engineering-package)

General notesThe driving dynamics display allows you to seethe selected drive program and additional infor-mation about the vehicle's operating status inthe COMAND display.

: Drive program selected; Status of the differential lock for the transfer

case= Accelerator pedal position shown in %? Brake pedal position shown in %A Condition of the LOW RANGE offroad gearB Angle of inclinationC Steering angleD Uphill or downhill gradient in percentageE Level controlF Compass with angle scale

Activating the driving dynamics display

X Switch on COMAND. You can find furtherinformation in the separate COMAND operat-ing instructions.

X Press button:.The driving dynamics display appears in theCOMAND display.

Towing a trailer

Important safety notes

G WARNINGInstalling an unsuitable ball coupling mayresult in overloading of the trailer tow hitchand the rear axle. This applies especially if theball coupling in question is longer or angleddifferently. This could seriously impair the

Towing a trailer 221

Drivingandparking

Z

driving characteristics and the trailer cancome loose. There is a risk of an accident.You should only ever install a ball couplingthat has the permissible dimensions and thatis designed to meet your trailer-towingrequirements. Do not modify the ball couplingor the trailer tow hitch.

You will find the values approved by the manu-facturer on the vehicle identification plates andthose for the towing vehicle under "Technicaldata" (Y page 387).

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed correctly ornot secured with the bolt provided and thecorresponding spring cotter, the trailer maycome loose. There is a risk of an accident.Always install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed. Before every journey, ensure thatthe ball coupling is secured with the bolt andthe corresponding spring cotter.

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle/trailer combination beginsto lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi-cle/trailer combination could even rollover.There is a risk of an accident.On no account should you attempt tostraighten up the vehicle/trailer combinationby increasing the speed. Reduce vehiclespeed and do not countersteer. Apply thebrake as necessary.

Please observe the manufacturer's operatinginstructions for the trailer coupling if a detach-able trailer coupling is used.Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If youdo not couple the trailer to the towing vehiclecorrectly, the trailer could become detached.Make sure that the following values are notexceeded:Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweightRthe permissible trailer loadRthe permissible rear axle load of the towingvehicleRthe maximum permissible gross vehicleweight of both the towing vehicle and thetrailer

The applicable permissible values, which mustnot be exceeded, can be found:Rin the vehicle documentsRon the identification plates for the trailer towhitch and the trailerRon the vehicle identification plateIf the values differ, the lowest value applies.When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonwith when driving without a trailer.The vehicle/trailer combination:Ris heavierRis restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capabilityRhas an increased braking distanceRis affected more by strong crosswindsRdemands more sensitive steeringRhas a larger turning circleThis could impair the handling characteristics.When towing a trailer, always adjust your speedto the current road and weather conditions. Donot exceed the maximum permissible speed foryour vehicle/trailer combination.

Notes on towing a trailer

General notes! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,changes to the cooling system and drive trainmay be necessary, depending on the vehicletype.If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,observe the anchorage points on the chassisframe.RDo not exceed the legally prescribed maxi-mum speed for vehicle/trailer combinationsin the relevant country.This lowers the risk of an accident.ROnly install an approved trailer coupling onyour vehicle.Further information on availability and oninstallation is available from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suitablefor installing detachable trailer couplings.

222 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

RDo not install hired trailer couplings or otherdetachable trailer couplings on the bumpersof your vehicle.RIf you no longer need the ball coupling,remove it from the ball coupling recess. Thiswill reduce the risk of damage to the ball cou-pling.

When towing a trailer, set the tire pressure onthe rear axle of the towing vehicle for the max-imum load. You will find the values in the tirepressure table in the fuel filler flap of the vehicle(Y page 364).Please note that when towing a trailer, the fol-lowing driving systems have limited availabilityor are not available at all:RParking Assist PARKTRONIC (Y page 190)RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 207)RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 213)On vehicles without level control, the height ofthe ball coupling will alter according to the loadplaced on the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailerwith a height-adjustable drawbar.You will find installing dimensions and loadsunder "Technical data" (Y page 387).

Driving tipsObserve the information on ESP® trailer stabili-zation (Y page 68) and on pulling away with atrailer (Y page 141).The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type oftrailer. Before beginning the journey, check thetrailer's documents to see what the maximumpermissible speed is. Observe the legally pre-scribedmaximum speed in the relevant country.For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maxi-mum permissible rear axle load is increasedwhen towing a trailer. See "Technical data" tofind out whether this applies to your vehicle(Y page 387). If you utilize any of the addedmaximum rear axle load when towing a trailer,the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceeda maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) forreasons concerning the operating permit. Thisalso applies in countries in which the permissi-ble maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combi-nations is above 60 mph (100 km/h).When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonwith when driving without a trailer.

Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifterto shift into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients.This also applies if you have activated cruisecontrol or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.This will use the braking effect of the engine, sothat less braking will be required tomaintain thespeed. This relieves the load on the brake sys-tem and prevents the brakes from overheatingand wearing too quickly. If you need additionalbraking, depress the brake pedal repeatedlyrather than continuously.

Driving tipsIf the trailer swings from side to side:X Do not accelerate.X Do not counter-steer.X Brake if necessary.RMaintain a greater distance from the vehiclein front than when driving without a trailer.RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gen-tly at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then,increase the braking force rapidly.RThe values given for gradient-climbing capa-bilities from a standstill refer to sea level.When driving in mountainous areas, note thatthe power output of the engine and, conse-quently, the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-bility, decreases with increasing altitude.

Installing the ball coupling

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not correctly installedand secured, it can come loose during thejourney and endanger other road users. Thereis a risk of an accident and injury.Always install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed. Before every journey, ensure thatthe ball coupling is secured with the bolt andthe corresponding spring cotter.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed correctly ornot secured with the bolt provided and thecorresponding spring cotter, the trailer maycome loose. There is a risk of an accident.

Towing a trailer 223

Drivingandparking

Z

Always install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed. Before every journey, ensure thatthe ball coupling is secured with the bolt andthe corresponding spring cotter.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed and securedcorrectly the trailer may come loose. There isa risk of an accident.Install and secure the ball coupling as descri-bed in the ball coupling installation instruc-tions. Make sure that the ball coupling isinstalled and secured correctly before everyjourney.

X Pull protective cap: in the direction of thearrow, out of the ball coupling recess.

X Stow protective cap: so that it cannot bethrown around.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 294)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 294).

X Insert the ball coupling horizontally into ballcoupling recess; in the direction of thearrow until the holes in ball coupling= are inline with the holes in ball coupling recess?.

X Slide boltA into the hole in the ball couplingrecess and the ball coupling to the stop.

224 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

X Secure the bolt using spring cotterB.

X Check the ball coupling, bolt and spring cotterfor correct installation.

If the ball coupling cannot be correctlymounted,remove the ball coupling. Under these circum-stances, the ball coupling must not be used fortrailer towing.Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

Coupling up a trailer! Do not connect the trailer's brake system (iffeatured) to the hydraulic brake system of thetowing vehicle, as the latter is equipped withan anti-lock brake system. Doing so will resultin a loss of function of the brake systems ofboth the vehicle and the trailer.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.X Start the engine.X Vehicles with AIRMATIC package: selectnormal level and the Comfort drive program.

X Switch off the engine.X Close the doors and tailgate.X Couple up the trailer.

X Establish the electrical connection betweenthe vehicle and the trailer.

X Check that the trailer lighting system is work-ing.

X Push the combination switch upwards/down-wards and check whether the correspondingturn signal on the trailer flashes.

A trailer that is connected is recognized onlywhen the electrical connection is establishedcorrectly and when the lighting system is work-ing properly. The function of other systems alsodepends on this, for example:RESP®RParking Assist PARKTRONICRParking PilotRActive Blind Spot AssistRActive Lane Keeping Assist

i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: if youcouple up a trailer, the vehicle always remainsat normal level. When coupling up a trailer,please observe the following:RIf the normal level has not been set man-ually, the vehicle is automatically loweredto normal level. This is the case if a speed of5 mph (8 km/h) is reached.RThe Sport drive program is not available.These restrictions apply to all accessoriespowered through a connection to the trailerpower socket of your vehicle, e.g. a bicyclecarrier.

Observe the maximum permissible trailerdimensions (width and length).Most U.S. states and all Canadian provincesrequire by law:RSafety chains between the towing vehicle andthe trailer. The chains should be cross-woundunder the trailer drawbar. They must be fas-tened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not tothe bumper or the axle.Leave enough play in the chains to make tightcornering possible.RA separate brake system for certain types oftrailer.RSafety switch for braked trailers. Check thespecific legal requirements applicable to yourstate.If the trailer becomes detached from the tow-ing vehicle, the safety switch applies thetrailer brakes.

Towing a trailer 225

Drivingandparking

Z

Towing a trailerThere are numerous legal requirements con-cerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed restric-tions. Make sure that your car/trailer combina-tion complies with the local regulations:Rin your place of residenceRin the location to which you are drivingThe police and local authorities can provide reli-able information.Observe the following when towing a trailer:RTo gain driving experience and to becomeaccustomed to the new handling characteris-tics, you should practice the following in atraffic-free location:- cornering- stopping- backing upRBefore driving, check:

- trailer tow hitch- safety switch for braked trailers- safety chains- electrical connections- lights- wheelsRAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide anunobstructed view of the rear section of thetrailer.RIf the trailer has electronically controlledbrakes, pull away carefully. Brake manuallyusing the brake controller and check whetherthe brakes function correctly.RSecure any objects on the trailer to preventthe cargo from slipping when the vehicle is inmotion.RWhen you couple up a trailer, check at regularintervals that the load is firmly secured. If thetrailer is equipped with trailer lights andbrakes, check the trailer to ensure that theseare working.RBear in mind that the handling will be lessstable when towing a trailer than when drivingwithout one. Avoid sudden steering move-ments.RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,accelerates more slowly, has a decreasedgradient climbing capability and a longerbraking distance.It is more susceptible to side winds andrequires more careful steering.

RIf possible, do not brake suddenly, but insteaddepress the brake pedalmoderately at first sothat the trailer can activate its brakes. Thenincrease the pressure on the brake pedal.RIf the automatic transmission repeatedlyshifts between gears on uphill or downhill gra-dients, shift to a lower gear using the left-handsteering wheel paddle shifter.A lower gear and lower speed reduce the riskof engine failure.RWhen driving downhill, shift to a lower gear toutilize the engine's braking effect.Avoid continuous brake application as thismay overheat the vehicle brakes and, if instal-led, the trailer brakes.RIf the coolant temperature increases dramat-ically while the air-conditioning system isswitched on, switch off the air-conditioningsystem.Coolant heat can also be dissipated by open-ing the windows and switching the ventilationblower and the interior temperature to thehighest level.RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention tothe extended length of your vehicle/trailercombination.Due to the length of the vehicle/trailer com-bination, you require additional road space inrelation to the vehicle you are overtakingbefore you can change back to the originallane.

Decoupling a trailer

G WARNINGIf you uncouple a trailer with the overrunbrake engaged, you could trap your handbetween the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.There is a risk of injury.Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brakeis engaged.

G WARNINGVehicles with level control:The vehicle is lowered as soon as you discon-nect the trailer cable. This could result in yourlimbs or those of other people that arebetween the vehicle body and tires or under-

226 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

neath the vehicle being trapped. There is arisk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the immediatevicinity of the wheel housings or under thevehicle when you disconnect the trailer cable.

! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engagedoverrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle couldbe damaged by the rebounding of the overrunbrake.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.X Start the engine.X Close the doors and tailgate.X Apply the trailer's parking brake.X Detach the trailer cable and decouple thetrailer.

X Switch off the engine.

Permissible trailer loads and drawbarloads

Weight specifications

Maximum allowable gross massThe gross vehicle weight of the trailer is calcu-lated by adding the weight of the trailer to theweight of the load and equipment on the trailer.You will find installing dimensions and loadsunder "Technical data" (Y page 387).

Permissible noseweightYou will find installing dimensions and loadsunder "Technical data" (Y page 387).

Loading a trailerRWhen loading the trailer, make sure that nei-ther the permissible grossweight of the trailernor the gross vehicle weight are exceeded.The permissible gross vehicle weight is indi-cated on the identification plate located onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.You can find themaximum permissible valueson the type plates of your vehicle and thetrailer. When calculating how much weight

the vehicle and trailer may carry, pay atten-tion to the respective lowest values.RThe trailer drawbar load on the ball couplingmust be added to the rear axle load to avoidexceeding the permissible gross axle weight.The permissible gross vehicle weight is indi-cated on the identification plate located onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.

i Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailer loadwhere the trailer drawbar noseweightaccounts for 8 % to 15 % of the trailer's per-missible gross weight.

i The weight of additional accessories, pas-sengers, and cargo reduces the permissibletrailer load and drawbar load for your vehicle.

Checking the vehicle and trailer weightRTo check that the weights of the towing vehi-cle and the trailer comply with the maximumpermissible values, have the vehicle/trailercombination (including the driver, passen-gers, and cargo with a fully laden trailer)weighed on a calibrated weighbridge.RCheck the gross axle weight rating of the frontand rear axles, the gross weight of the trailerand the trailer drawbar noseweight.

Removing the ball couplingX Remove the spring cotter.X Remove the bolt from the ball couplingrecess.

X Remove the ball coupling from the ball cou-pling recess.

X Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty.X Stow the ball coupling so that it cannot bethrown around.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 294)and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces(Y page 294).Information on cleaning and care of the trailertow hitch (Y page 329).

Trailer power supply! Accessories with a maximum power con-sumption of 180 W can be connected to thepermanent power supply.

Towing a trailer 227

Drivingandparking

Z

Youmust not charge a trailer battery using thepower supply.

The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped atthe factory with a permanent power supply.The permanent power supply is supplied viatrailer socket pin 4.The trailer's permanent power supply isswitched off in the event of low vehicle supplyvoltage and after six hours at the latest.A qualified specialist workshop can providemore information about installing the trailerelectrics.

228 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the on-board computer.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.Contact a qualified specialist workshop.The on-board computer only showsmessages orwarnings from certain systems in the multifunc-tion display. You should therefore make sureyour vehicle is operating safely at all times.For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-tration (Y page 34).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lightingThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis-plays and the controls in the vehicle interior canbe adjusted using the brightness control knob.The brightness control knob is located on thebottom left of the instrument cluster(Y page 34).

X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise orcounter-clockwise.If you turn the light switch toÃ, T orL, the brightness is dependent upon thebrightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness of themultifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 172):The segments light up from the stored speedto the maximum speed.RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated(Y page 174):One or two segments in the set speed rangelight up.RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle infront moving more slowly than the storedspeed:The segments between the speed of the vehi-cle in front and the stored speed light up.

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as thiscould damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-play indicates the temperature measured anddoes not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in the multi-function display (Y page 231).

Displays and operation 229

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

There is a short delay before a change in outsidetemperature appears in the multifunction dis-play.

Coolant temperature gauge

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The enginewill otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gage is in the instru-ment cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 34).Under normal operating conditions and with thespecified coolant level, the coolant temperaturemay rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Right control panel= Left control panelX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position1 in the ignition lock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer using thebuttons on the multifunction steering wheel.Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia system:you can find further information on the VoiceControl System in the separate operatinginstructions.Vehicles with the Audio 20 multimedia system:you can find further information on voice-oper-ated navigation in the manufacturer's operatinginstructions.

230 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the Audio menu: selects theprevious or next station, when thepreset list or station list is active,or an audio track or video sceneRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephone num-ber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the Audio menu: selects a pre-set list or a station list in thedesired frequency range, or anaudio track or video scene usingrapid scrollingRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open

a RConfirms the selection or displaymessageRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andstarts dialing the selected number

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off voice-operated navi-gation or the Voice Control SystemRHides displaymessages or calls upthe last Trip menu function usedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in theTrip menu

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

? RSwitches on voice-operated navi-gation or the Voice Control System

Multifunction display

: Permanent display: outside temperature orspeed (Y page 238)

; Time= Text field? Menu barA Drive program (Y page 148)B Transmission position (Y page 148)X To display menu bar?: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.If you do not press any other button, menubar? fades out after a few seconds.Text field= shows the selectedmenu or sub-menu as well as display messages.

i Set the time using the multimedia system;see the Digital Operator's Manual.

Displays and operation 231

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Possible displays in the multifunction dis-play:RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shiftingmanually (Y page 150)Rj Parking Pilot (Y page 193)RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 172)R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist(Y page 116)Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 142)Rë HOLD function (Y page 185)RaDistance Pilot DISTRONIC Steering Pilot(Y page 237)RDSR Downhill Speed Regulation(Y page 216)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress the= or; button on the steeringwheel to call up themenu bar and select amenu.Operating the on-board computer (Y page 230).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTrip menu (Y page 232)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 233)RAudio menu (Y page 234)RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 235)RDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 236)RServ. menu (Y page 236)RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 238)RON&OFFROAD menu (Y page 241)RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)(Y page 241)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on the steer-ing wheel until the Tripmenu with trip odom-eter: and odometer; appears.

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

: Distance; Driving time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectFrom start or From reset.The values in the From Start submenu are cal-culated from the start of a journey, while thevalues in the From Reset submenu are calcu-lated from the last time the submenu was reset(Y page 233).The From Start trip computer is automaticallyreset if:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The From reset trip computer is automaticallyreset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or99,999 miles.

ECO displayThe ECO display is not available for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select ECODISPLAY.If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For more information on the ECO display, see(Y page 163).

232 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only dis-plays approximate range:.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

Digital speedometerX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.A gear shift recommendation Z can alsoappear.Observe the information on gearshift recom-mendation Z when shifting manually(Y page 150).Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recom-mendation is shown in the status bar of themultifunction display and not in the digitalspeedometer display.

Resetting valuesX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press: to select Yes and pressa toconfirm.

You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO displayIf you reset the values in the ECO display, thevalues in the "From Start" trip computer are alsoreset. If you reset the values in the "From Start"

trip computer, the values in the ECO display arealso reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions.Observe the additional information on naviga-tion in the separate multimedia system operat-ing instructions.X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Navi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Menus and submenus 233

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is to be made, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indicatorshortens towards the top of the display as youapproach the point of the announced change ofdirection. The change of direction starts oncethe distance display reaches zero.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lanes not recommended? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of directionA Change-of-direction symbolOn multilane roads, lane recommendations canbe displayed for the next change of direction ifthe digital map supports this data. During thechange of direction, new lanes may be added.Lane not recommended=: you will not be ableto complete the next change of direction if youstay in this lane.Recommended lane and new lane during achange of direction?: in this lane you will beable to complete the next two changes of direc-tion without changing lane.

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion system

The navigation system displays additional infor-mation and the vehicle status.Possible displays:RNew Route... or Calculating Route...A new route is calculated.RRoad Not MappedThe vehicle position is inside the area of thedigitalmap but the road is not recognized, e.g.newly built streets, car parks or private land.RNo RouteNo route could be calculated to the selecteddestination.RO

You have reached the destination or an inter-mediate destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Active station list; Station frequency with memory positionThe multifunction display shows station; withstation frequency or station name. The presetposition is only displayed alongwith station; ifthis has been stored. You can store TV chan-nels; in the multimedia system.X Switch on the multimedia system and selectradio; see the separate operating instruc-tions.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Audio menu.

234 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X To select a preset list or station list: pressand briefly hold the9 or: button untilthe preset list or station list in the desiredfrequency range is shown in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To select a station: briefly press9or:.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.For more information on radio operation, see"Satellite radio" in the separate operatinginstructions.

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

Audio data from various audio devices or mediacan be played, depending on the equipmentinstalled in the vehicle.X Switch on the multimedia system and selectaudio CD or MP3 mode; see the separateoperating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select the next/previous track: brieflypress the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list (rapidscrolling): press and hold the9 or:button until desired track: has beenreached.If you press and hold9 or:, the rapidscrolling speed is increased. Not all audiodrives or data carriers support this function.

If track information is stored on the audio deviceor medium, the multifunction display will showthe number and title of the track. The currenttrack does not appear in audio AUX mode(Auxiliary audio mode: external audio sourceconnected).

Video DVD operation

X Switch on the multimedia system and selectvideo DVD; see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select the next or previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired scene: hasbeen reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe the legalrequirements for the country in which you arecurrently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-facturer’s operating instructions).

X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to themul-timedia system; see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.

Menus and submenus 235

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found a net-work and is ready to receive.RPhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searching fora network.

Accepting a call

If someone calls you when you are in the Telmenu, a display message appears in the multi-function display.You can accept a call at any time regardless ofthe menu selected.X Press the6 button on the steering wheelto accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a callYou can end or reject a call even if you are not inthe Tel menu.X Press the~ button on the steering wheelto reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry from the telephonebookX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Authorize access to the phone book on thephone.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.

orX To start rapid scrolling: press and hold the9 or: button for longer than one sec-ond.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored fora name: press the6 ora button tostart dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name:press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the telephone book: press the~or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last names ornumbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to the redialmemory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the redial memory: press the~or% button.

Assistance menu

IntroductionDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theDriveAssist menu:RDisplaying the assistance graphic(Y page 237)RActivating or deactivating Steering Pilot(Y page 237)RActivating or deactivating Active Brake Assist(Y page 237)RActivating or deactivating Active Brake Assistwith cross-traffic function (Y page 237)RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST(Y page 237)RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist orActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 238)RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assistor Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 238)

236 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Displaying the assistance graphic

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press9 or: to select AssistanceGraphic.X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.The multifunction display shows the DistancePilot DISTRONIC distance display in the assis-tance graphic display.The assistance graphic displays the status ofand information from the following drivingsystems or driving safety systems:RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 206)RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 174)RActive Brake Assist (Y page 64)RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-tion (Y page 70)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 205)RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 209) or ActiveLane Keeping Assist (Y page 213)RDSR (Y page 216)ROff-road program (vehicles with Off-RoadEngineering package) (Y page 218)RRear window wiper (Y page 120)

X Press: to display the ATTENTION ASSISTassessment.

Activating/deactivating Steering PilotX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press9 or: to select SteeringPilot.X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.When the Steering Pilot is activated, the mul-tifunction display displays a Steering PilotOn message.

Further information about Distance PilotDISTRONIC with Steering Pilot (Y page 180).

Activating or deactivating Active BrakeAssistYou can use these functions to activate/deac-tivate Active Brake Assist or, on vehicles withthe Driving Assistance package, to activate ordeactivate Active Brake Assist with cross-trafficfunction.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBrake Assist.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.When Active Brake Assist or Active BrakeAssist with cross-traffic function is deactiva-ted, theæ symbol appears in the multi-function display in the assistance graphic dis-play.

Further information on Active Brake Assist(Y page 64) and Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function (Y page 69).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectAttention Assist.X Press thea button.The current selection appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set Off,Standard or Sensitive.X Press thea button to save the setting.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in themultifunction dis-play in the assistance graphics display.

For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 205).

Menus and submenus 237

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot Assist.X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.

For further information about Blind Spot Assist,see (Y page 207).For further information about Active Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 210).

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectLane Keeping Assist.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set Off,Standard or Adaptive.When Lane Keeping Assist or Active LaneKeeping Assist is activated, the multifunctiondisplay shows the lane markings as brightlines in the assistance graphic.

X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 209).For further information about Active Lane Keep-ing Assist, see (Y page 213).

Service menuDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theServ. menu:RCalling up display messages in messagememory (Y page 244)RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning sys-tem (Y page 353) or checking the tire pres-sure electronically (Y page 355)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 323)

Settings menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, In the Sett.menu you have the follow-ing options:RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 238)RChanging the light settings (Y page 239)RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 239)RChanging the convenience settings(Y page 240)RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 240)

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the distance unitThe Display Unit Speedometer / Odome‐ter: function allows you to choose whethercertain displays appear in kilometers or miles inthe multifunction display.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speedometer / Odometerfunction.You will see the selected setting: km or miles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for distanceapplies to:RDigital speedometer in the Trip menuROdometer and the trip odometerRTrip computerRCurrent consumption and the rangeRNavigation instructions in the Navi menuRCruise controlRDistance Pilot DISTRONICRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting permanent displayThe Permanent Display: function allows youto choose whether the multifunction displayalways shows the outside temperature or thespeed.

238 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

The speed display is inverse to the speedome-ter.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent Display: function.The current setting, Outside Temperature,Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer[mph] appears.

X To change the setting: pressa again.

Light submenu

Setting the daytime running lampsThis function is not available in Canada.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLight submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the DaytimeRunning Lights function.If the Daytime Running Lights function hasbeen switched on, the cone of light and theW symbol in the multifunction display areshown in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime running lamps(Y page 112).

Switching the Intelligent Light Systemon/offX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLight submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theIntell. Light System function.If the Intell. Light System function hasbeen switched on, the cone of light and theL symbol in the multifunction display areshown in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.When you activate Intell. Light System,you activate the following functions:

RHighway modeRActive light functionRCornering light functionRExtended range fog lampsROff-road lightsFurther information on the Intelligent Light Sys-tem (Y page 114).

Vehicle submenu

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismIf you activate the Automatic Door Lock func-tion, the vehicle is centrally locked above aspeed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicle submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAutomatic Door Lock function.When the Automatic Door Lock function isactivated, the vehicle doors are displayed inorange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information on the automatic lockingfeature, see (Y page 81).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, anacoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehi-cle.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Settings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicle submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic Lock function.If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,the& symbol in the multifunction displaylights up orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Menus and submenus 239

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Convenience submenu

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Using: or9, select the Easy Entry/Exit function.If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated,the vehicle steering wheel is displayed inorange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 106).

Switching the seat belt adjustment on/offX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Settings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBelt Adjustment function.If the Belt Adjustment function is activated,the vehicle seat belt is shown in orange in themultifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

For further information on belt adjustment, see(Y page 45).

Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-ing feature on/offThis function is only availablewhen the vehicle isequipped with the electrical fold-in function.When you activate the Auto. Mirror Foldingfunction, the exterior mirrors are folded in whenthe vehicle is locked. The exterior mirrors foldout automatically again as soon as you unlockthe vehicle.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror Folding function isswitched on, the multifunction display showsthe exterior mirror in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

If you have switched the Auto. Mirror Fold‐ing on and you fold the exterior mirrors in usingbutton:, they will not fold out automatically(Y page 108).You can then only fold out the exterior mirrorsusing button:.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory Setting submenu.X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings? messageappears.

240 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press the: or9 button to select No orYes.X Pressa to confirm the selection.If you select Yes, the multifunction displayshows a confirmation message.

If you want to reset the Daytime RunningLights function in the Light submenu, youmust turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock.

ON&OFFROAD menuX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the ON&OFFROAD menu.

You can view the current off-road program set-tings in the ON&OFFROAD menu:RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-age (Y page 218)RVehicles without the Offroad Engineeringpackage (Y page 217)

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Warm-up

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Transmission oil temperatureX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.Upshift indicator: upshift indicator Up=indicates that the engine has reached theoverrevving range when in the manual driveprogram.Engine/transmission oil temperature:when the engine and transmission are at nor-mal operating temperature, oil tempera-ture? andB are displayed in white in themultifunction display.

If the multifunction display shows oil temper-ature? orB in blue, the engine or thetransmission are not yet at normal operatingtemperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-put during this time.

SETUP

: Engine mode (Comfort/Sport/Sport +); Suspension setting Comfort/Sport/Sport += Transmission position D/M? ESP® mode (ON/OFF)SETUP displays the following information/func-tions:Rthe digital speedometerRthe gear indicatorRthe engine modeRthe suspension modeRthe transmission positionRthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) modeX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until SETUPis displayed.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the function onpublic roads.

: Lap; RACETIMER

Menus and submenus 241

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

You can start theRACETIMERwhen the engine isrunning or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER is shown.

X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. Time.X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Pressa to confirm New Lap.i It is possible to store a maximum of sixteenlaps. The 16th lap can only be completed withFinish Lap.

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the% button on the steering wheel.X Confirm Yes witha.The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop thevehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 inthe ignition lock. If you turn the SmartKey toposition 3 and then pressa to confirmStart, timing is continued.Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press the= or; button to selectReset Lap.X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER isreset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. If youhave stopped 16 laps, the current lap does nothave to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Pressa to confirm Reset.Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi-function display.

X Press the: button to select Yes and pressthea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speed

242 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

This function is shown if you have stored at leastone lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation is shown.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time

= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lapThis function is only available if you have storedat least two laps and have stopped the RACE-TIMER.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until the lapevaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. Thefastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol:.

X Press the9 or: button to select a dif-ferent lap evaluation.

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manualand may therefore differ from the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 185)RParking (Y page 159)

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel.The multifunction display hides the display message.

High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-prioritydisplay messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messageshave been remedied.

Display messages 243

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages in themessage memory. You can call upthe display messages:X Press= or; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-prioritydisplay messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, thecorresponding display messages are also deleted.

244 Display messagesOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

!÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) are temporarily not available.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.The$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only), ÷, å and !warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 245

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

ESP® is temporarily unavailable.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

246 Display messagesOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

T!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunc-tioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On the Igni‐tion to Release theParking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp lightsup.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignitionwas switched off.X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please Release Park‐ing Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of theelectric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 160).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking(Y page 160).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeOperator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 247

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp and the redF (USA only) or!(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 160).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand the yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.If the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-tinues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 367).X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

248 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten secondsafter the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It thengoes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 160).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the redF (USA only) or!(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to applythe electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake Inop‐erative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten secondsafter the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It thengoes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 249

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition,the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.USA only: the$ red brake system warning lamp is lit while theengine is running.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

GInoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Brake AssistFunctions CurrentlyLimited See Opera‐tor's Manual

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is temporarily inopera-tive.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiationRthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS isfunctional again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Restart the engine.

250 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Active Brake AssistFunctions LimitedSee Operator's Man‐ual

Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. AdaptiveBrake Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE Inopera‐tive See Operator'sManualImportant functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Active Brake AssistFunctions CurrentlyLimited See Opera‐tor's Manual

Active Brake Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snowRthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiationRMercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivatedRthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Active Brake Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is operative again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Restart the engine.X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP® on again (Y page 67).

Active Brake AssistFunctions LimitedSee Operator's Man‐ual

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS isnot available due to a malfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 251

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Radar Sensors DirtySee Operator's Man‐ualThe radar sensor system is malfunctioning.Possible causes are:RDirt on sensorsRHeavy rain or snowRWhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,e.g. in desert-like areas

At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioningor is temporarily unavailable:RPRE-SAFE® PLUSRActive Brake AssistRActive Lane Keeping AssistRActive Blind Spot AssistRDistance Pilot DISTRONICIf the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist willnot perform a course-correcting brake application.A warning tone also sounds.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving anddrive safety systems will be available again. The display message dis-appears.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Switch off the engine.X Clean all sensors (Y page 328).X Restart the engine.The display message disappears.

6SRS Malfunction Ser‐vice Required

The restraint system is malfunctioning.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 41).

6Front Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequiredorFrontRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system hasmalfunctioned at the front on the left or right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

252 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6Rear Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired or RearRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Rear Center Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Left Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionServiceRequiredorRightSide Curtain AirbagMalfunction ServiceRequired

The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 253

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Air‐bag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualThe front-passenger front air bag is deactivated during the journey,even though:Ran adultorRa person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seatIf additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpretthe occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-neously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light upand remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 49)Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the mul-tifunction display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-pant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about theOccupant Classification System, see(Y page 49).

254 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Air‐bag Enabled SeeOperator's ManualThe front-passenger front air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system'sweight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe systemmay detect objects or forces applying additional weight onthe seat.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-neously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light upand remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 49)Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the mul-tifunction display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-pant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.

Display messages 255

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsX Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about theOccupant Classification System, see(Y page 49).

Lightsi Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamphave failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

bCheck Left LowBeam(Example)

The bulb in question is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.orX Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

bActive HeadlampsInoperative

The active light function is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Check the fuses (Y page 343).X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes.If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAuto Lamp FunctionInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off Lights

You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tonealso sounds.X Turn the light switch to theà position.

256 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

bSwitch On Headlamps

You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.X Turn the light switch to the L orà position.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogX Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, theAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Availablemessage is displayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

+Check Coolant LevelSee Operator's Man‐ual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 322).

If you have to add coolant frequently:X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine coolingsystem checked.

? The fan motor is malfunctioning.X At coolant temperatures below 248‡ (120†), drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

Display messages 257

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

?Coolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catchfire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhichcan occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Donot start the engine again until the displaymessage goes out andthe coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, theengine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.If the temperature increases again:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

#See Operator's Man‐ual

The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

258 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

#Stop Vehicle SeeOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level istoo low.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Observe the instructions in the# See Operator's Manualdisplay message.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Engine Oil AtNext Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 321).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 321).If the engine oil needs topping up more often:X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the enginechecked.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 quart)

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 321).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 321).If the engine oil needs topping up more often:X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the enginechecked.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Engine Oil LevelLow Stop VehicleTurn Engine Off

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.There is a risk of engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Check the engine oil level (Y page 321).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 321).

8Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

Display messages 259

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap Loose

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

8Ultra Low-sulfurDiesel Fuel Only

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel level has fallen below thereserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFURHIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm sulfur MAXIMUM).

¸Replace Air Filter

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must bereplaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!Check Fuel Filter

Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The watermust be drained off.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ØCheck Additive SeeOperator's Manual

The DEF tank is almost empty.X Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop (Y page 156).

ØRemaining Starts: 16

The DEF level has fallen to a minimum. You can start the engine afurther 16 times.X Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop (Y page 156).

i You can start the engine a further 16 times. If DEF is not added, itwill then not be possible to restart the engine. Refill the DEF tankwith approximately 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF (Y page 156).

260 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÀAttention Assist:Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue ora lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone alsosounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention AssistInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÁDrive More Slowly

You cannot change the vehicle level.Possible causes are:Ryou are driving too fast for the selected vehicle levelRyou are driving too fast with a trailer or the trailer-coupling socket isbeing used, e.g. for a bicycle rack

X Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again.RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package (Y page 182)RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package (Y page 188)

X Observe the notes on towing a trailer (Y page 222).

ÁCompressor Is Cool‐ing

You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first needsto cool down because of frequent level changes.X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level.X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.X Allow the compressor to cool down.When the compressor has cooled down, the display message dis-appears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected level.

ÁMalfunction

AIRMATIC is malfunctioning.X Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level, but do not exceed50 mph (80 km/h).

X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 261

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÁMax. Speed 12 mph

You are exceeding the speed permissible for the selected off-roadlevel.In addition, the vehicle level display appears above the display mes-sage, and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle could tip and rollover.There is a risk of an accident.X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.X Onlymake slight steeringmovements and avoid fast steeringmove-ments.

X Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached off-road level 2.

ÁRaising Max. Speed12 mph

The vehicle is being adjusted to off-road level 3.In addition, the vehicle level display appears above the display mes-sage.The display message refers to the maximum speed permissible(depending on the model type) for off-road level 3.X Do not drive at speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h).

gLowering Max. Speed12 mph

The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3 to off-road level 2.In addition, the vehicle level display appears above the display mes-sage.The display message refers to the maximum speed permissible(depending on the model type) for off-road level 3.X Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached off-road level 2.

ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEMMalfunction The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handlingcharacteristics may be affected.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEMMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualThe ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handlingcharacteristics are severely impaired. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThere is a risk of an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.X Avoid sudden acceleration around tight corners and fast steeringmovements.

X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

262 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

8Different. LockSys. Malfunction

The differential lock is malfunctioning.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

8Different. LockingSys. Cooling DownPlease Wait

The differential lock is too hot and has been disengaged.X Drive on carefully.X Allow the differential lock to cool down.The differential lock re-engages as soon as it has cooled down.

LOW RANGE StopApply Parking Brake A gearshift process has been canceled. LOW RANGE is in the neutralposition. There is no connection between the engine and the drivewheels.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Apply the electric parking brake. Do not continue driving under anycircumstances.

X Repeat the gearshift process.

LOW RANGE Malfunc‐tion To Park, ApplyBrakeLOW RANGE is malfunctioning.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X When parking, secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

LOW RANGE Max.Speed 25 mph You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.X Drive more slowly.The gear change is made.

LOW RANGE Max.Speed 40 mph You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.X Drive more slowly.The gear change is made.

LOW RANGE Shift ToPosition N Briefly You have reduced the vehicle speed, but the automatic transmissionis not in position N.X Briefly shift the automatic transmission to position N.

LOW RANGE ShiftingCanceled PleaseReactivateThe gearshift process has been canceled.X Repeat the gearshift process.

ÃInoperative

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a malfunction.X Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 263

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Traffic Sign AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogX Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the displaymessage disappears.Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.

Traffic Sign AssistInoperative Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 185).

Lane Keeping AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManualorActive LaneKeeping Assist Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated andtemporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogRthere have been no lane markings for an extended periodRthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snowWhen the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operationalagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping AssistInoperativeorActiveLane Keeping AssistInoperative

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

264 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Blind Spot AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManualorActiveBlind Spot AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot AssistNot Available WhenTowing a TrailerSee Operator's Man‐ualorAct. BlindSpot Asst. NotAvailable When Tow‐ing a Trailer SeeOperator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while tow-ing a trailer.You have established the electrical connection between the trailer andyour vehicle.X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.

Blind Spot AssistinoperativeorActiveBlind Spot Assistinoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Pilot Can‐celed The driver's door is open.X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with thedriver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched themultifunction steeringwheel whilesteering intervention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Parking Pilot again later (Y page 193).

Parking Pilot Inop‐erative PARKTRONIC Parking Assist is malfunctioning or faulty.X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems withPARKTRONIC Parking Assist" section (Y page 193).

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 265

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Parking Pilot is unavailable or malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.If the Parking Pilot continues to be unavailable (thej symbol doesnot appear in the multifunction display):X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Pilot Fin‐ished The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

Distance Pilot off Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.If a warning tone also sounds, Distance Pilot has deactivated auto-matically (Y page 174).

Distance Pilotavailable again Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again after having been tem-porarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Distance PilotDISTRONIC (Y page 174).

Distance Pilot Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative.Steering Pilot is also temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiationRthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe on-board voltage is too lowA warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Restart the engine.

Distance Pilot inop‐erative Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.The following may have also failed:RActive Brake AssistRActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionA warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Distance Pilot Sus‐pended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONICis no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

266 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Distance Pilot- - - mph

A condition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not beenmet.X Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC(Y page 174).

Steering Pilot Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

Steering Pilot is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogRthere have been no lane markings for an extended periodRthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snowWhen the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Steering Pilot is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Clean the windshield.

Steering Pilot inop‐erative Steering Pilot is malfunctioning.However, the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC functions are still available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise control inop‐erative Cruise control is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise control--- mph

RA condition for activating cruise control has not been met.You have tried to store a speed below 20mph (30 km/h), for exam-ple.RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and storethe speed.

orX Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 172).orX Reactivate ESP® (Y page 67).

Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated.If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-matically (Y page 172).

Display messages 267

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Check Tire PressureSoon The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant lossin pressure.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installednew wheels and tires.Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 331).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-sure is correct (Y page 353).

Check Tire PressureThen Restart RunFlat IndicatorThe tire pressure loss warning system generated a display messageand has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 353).

Run Flat IndicatorInoperative The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Please Correct TirePressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 353).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 355).

268 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. Thewheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 331).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 353).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning Tire Mal‐function The tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheelposition is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGDriving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 331).

Tire Press. MonitorCurrently Unavaila‐bleBecause there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, nosignals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressuremonitor is temporarily malfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been resolved.

Tire Press. Sen‐sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the mul-tifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-ist workshop.

Display messages 269

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Tire Pressure Moni‐tor Inoperative NoWheel SensorsThe wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. Thetire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving fora few minutes.

Tire Press. MonitorInoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Shift to 'P' or 'N'to Start Engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-tion R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Apply Brake toShift from 'P' You have attempted to shift the transmission to position D, R or Nwithout depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N,Depress Brake andStart EngineWith the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the trans-mission out of position P or N into another transmission position.X Depress the brake pedal.X Start the engine.

Transmission Not inP Risk of VehicleRolling AwayThe driver's door is open/not completely closed and the transmissionis in position R, N or D.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Close the driver's door completely.

Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle is Sta‐tionaryThe vehicle is moving.X Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

270 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Service Required DoNot Shift GearsVisit DealerYou cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-mission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Possi‐ble Service Required You cannot shift into the transmission positionR due to amalfunction.The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐function Stop A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-nents.A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to posi-tion N.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Auxiliary BatteryMalfunction The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer beingcharged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before youswitch off the engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

A The tailgate is open.

G WARNINGWhen the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle inte-rior if the tailgate is open.There is a risk of poisoning.X Close the tailgate.

Display messages 271

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

? The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open.A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

_2nd Seat Row, LeftNot Locked or 2ndSeat Row, Right NotLocked

The second row of seats is not engaged on the left-hand or right-handside.X Fold back the second row of seats until it engages.

_3rd Seat Row, LeftNot Locked or 3rdSeat Row, Right NotLocked

The third row of seats is not engaged on the left-hand or right-handside.X Fold back the third row of seats until it engages.

ÐPower Steering Mal‐function See Opera‐tor's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.If you are able to steer safely:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If you are unable to steer safely:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiverrange.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appearsin the multifunction display.

272 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped belowthe minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 322).

Wiper Malfunction‐ing The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard WarningFlashers Malfunc‐tioningThe hazard warning lamps are faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÂKey Does Not Belongto Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTake Your Key fromIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.A warning tone also sounds.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂReplace Key Battery

The SmartKey battery is discharged.X Change the battery (Y page 77).

ÂDon't Forget YourKey

The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver'sdoor with the engine switched off.A warning tone also sounds.This display message is displayed for amaximum of 60 seconds and issimply a reminder.X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not Detected(white display message)

The SmartKey is currently undetected.X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Display messages 273

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÂKey Not Detected(red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-trally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Locate the SmartKey.

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, theSmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKeymode.

ÂRemove 'Start' But‐ton and Insert Key

RThe SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or isfaulty.RThe SmartKey is continually undetected.A warning tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notesSome systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicatorand warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicatorand warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine orwhilst driving.

274 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten theirseat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, awarning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).The warning tone ceases.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as thedriver's or the front-passenger door is closed.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warningsounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15mph(25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven fasterthan 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 275

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

J$ N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is litwhile the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect ismalfunctioning and the braking characteristicsmay beaffected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

J$ N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is litwhile the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThere is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The multifunction display also shows a display message with the# symbol.The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

276 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrumentcluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, suchas the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 277

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ABS is temporarily unavailable.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrumentcluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance,making slight steeringmovements at a speedabove 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goesout.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

278 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.EBD is not available due to a malfunction.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrumentcluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

$J֌!

N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brakewarning lamp and the yellowESP®, ESP® OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 279

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or atleast one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 67), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 67).

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. ActiveBlind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applica-tions.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 67), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 67).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked.

280 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP®OFFwarning lamps are lit while the engine is running.ESP®, BAS, Active Brake Assist, Active Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist,ESP® trailer stabilization, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, the HOLD function, hillstart assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist andActive Blind Spot Assist are not available due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP®OFFwarning lamps are lit while the engine is running.ESP®, BAS, Active Brake Assist, Active Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist,ESP® trailer stabilization, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, the HOLD function, hillstart assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist andActive Blind Spot Assist are not available due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance,making slight steeringmovements at a speedabove 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goesout.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 281

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F! NF (USA only),! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electricparking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electricparking brake is lit.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The restraint system is malfunctioning.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 41).

282 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Engine

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)Rin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergencymode.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 156).X Start the engine three to four times after refueling.If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode iscanceled. The vehicle need not be checked.

In some states, youmust immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soonas the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal require-ments in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulationsapply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and thecoolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of enginedamage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 283

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked orthe electric engine radiator fan may be defective.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 322).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrainand stop-and-go traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engineradiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids whichmay have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occurjust by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 322).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.

284 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrainand stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is inmotion. A warningtone also sounds.You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line oftravel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or takeevasive action.

Further information on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 174).Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist(Y page 64).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 285

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Tires

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h N The yellow tire pressuremonitorwarning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.The tire pressuremonitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-tion.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle withoutmaking any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Payattention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire(Y page 331).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 353).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

286 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

General notes

The multimedia system section in this Opera-tor's Manual describes the basic principles foroperation. More information can be found in theDigital Operator's Manual.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the multimedia system.The multimedia system calculates the route tothe destination without taking the following intoaccount, for example:Rtraffic lightsRstop and yield signsRparking or stopping restrictionsRroad narrowingRother road and traffic rules and regulationsThe multimedia system may give incorrect nav-igation recommendations if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with thedigital map's data.For example:Ra diverted routeRthe road layout or the direction of a one-waystreet has been changed

For this reason, you must always observe roadand traffic rules and regulations during yourjourney. Road and traffic rules and regulationsalways have priority over multimedia systemdriving recommendations.Navigation announcements are intended todirect you while driving without diverting yourattention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of con-sulting the map display for directions. Lookingat the icons ormap display can distract you fromtraffic conditions and driving, and increase therisk of an accident.This equipment complies with FCC radiationexposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.This equipment has very low levels of RF energythat is deemed to comply without maximumpermissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-ever, it is recommended to install it at a distanceof at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between theradiation source and a person's body (notincluding limbs such as hands, wrists, feet andlegs).

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some functions are restric-ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.You will notice this, for example, because eitheryou will not be able to select certain menu itemsor a message will appear to this effect.

Function restrictions 287

Multim

ediasystem

Z

Operating system

Overview

General notes! Do not use the space in front of the displayfor storage. Objects placed here could dam-age the display or impair its function. Avoidany direct contact with the display surface.Pressure on the display surface may result inimpairments to the display, which could beirreversible.

Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair yourability to read the display.The display has an automatic temperature-con-trolled switch-off feature. The brightness isautomatically reduced if the temperature is toohigh. The display may temporarily switch offcompletely.

Cleaning instructions! Do not touch the display. The display has avery sensitive high-gloss surface; there is arisk of scratching. If you have to clean thescreen, however, use a mild cleaning agentand a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and havecooled down before you start cleaning. Do notapply pressure to the display surface whencleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam-age to the display.

Switching the multimedia systemon/offX Press the q control knob.

Adjusting the volumeX Turn the q control knob.The volume is adjusted:Rfor the currently selected media sourceRduring traffic or navigation announcementsRin hands-free mode during a phone call

Switching the sound on or offX Press the8 button on the control panel.If the audio output is switched off, the statusline will show the8 symbol. If you switch

themedia source or set the volume, the soundis automatically switched on.i Navigation announcements will be heardeven if the sound is muted.

FunctionsThe multimedia system has the following func-tions:RRadio modeRMedia mode with media searchRSound systemsRNavigation systemCOMAND: navigation via the hard driveAudio 20: navigation via SD cardRCommunication functionsRSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)RVehicle functions with system settingsRFavorites functions

ControllerThe controller in the center console lets you:Rselect menu items on the displayRenter charactersRselect a destination on the mapRsave entriesThe controller can be:Rturned3Rslid left or right1Rslid forwards or back4Rslid diagonally2Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7

Back buttonYou can use the% button to exit amenu or tocall up the basic display of the current operatingmode.X To exit the menu: briefly press the%button.The multimedia system changes to the nexthigher menu level in the current operatingmode.

X To call up the basic display: press the%button for longer than two seconds.The multimedia system changes to the basicdisplay of the current operating mode.

288 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

Favorites

Calling up and exiting favoritesX To call up: press theg button on the con-troller.

X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle.The favorites are displayed.

X To exit: press theg button again.

Adding favorites

Adding a predefined favorite

: Adds a new favorite; Renames a selected favorite= Moves a selected favorite? Deletes a selected favoriteX Press theg button.X Slide6 the controller.The menu bar is shown.

X Select Reassign.The categories are displayed.

X Select a category.The favorites are displayed.

X Select a favorite.X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Adding your own favoriteX Select VehicleQClimate Control.X Press and hold theg button until thefavorites are displayed.

X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Navigation mode

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the navigation system.

General notesAmong other things, correct functioning of thenavigation systemdepends onGPS reception. Incertain situations, GPS reception may beimpaired, there may be interference or theremay be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels orparking garages.Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT(see themanufacturer's operating instructions).The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructionsare stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SDcard box contains a quick guide.The following descriptions apply to navigationwith COMAND. Further information can befound in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Selecting a route type and route optionsMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select OptionsQRoute Settings.Notes for route types:REco RouteRDynamic Traffic RouteTraffic reports on the route for the route guid-ance are taken into account (not available inall countries).

Operating system 289

Multim

ediasystem

Z

RDynamic TRF. Route After RequestYou can decide whether or not current trafficreports should be included in the route cal-culation (not available in all countries).RCalculate Alternative RoutesDifferent routes are being calculated. In orderto do so, instead of Start, select the menuitem Continue.

X To avoid/use route options: select AvoidOptions.

X Select a route option.Notes for route options:RUse Toll RoadsThe route calculation includes roads whichrequire you to pay a usage fee (toll).RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle:(only available in the USA)Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the accessconditions for carpool lanes.Carpool lanes will be included if the carpoollanes option is activated.

Entering an addressMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select DestinationQAddress Entry.Enter an address, e.g. as follows:Rcity or ZIP code, street, house numberRstate/province, city or ZIP codeRcity or ZIP code, centerRstreet, city or ZIP code, intersectionX Select City.The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-ted (current vehicle position) is at the top.Below this, you will see locations for whichroute guidance has already been carried out.

X Enter the city.TheG symbol: the location is contained onthe digital map multiple times.

X To switch to the list: slide the5 control-ler.

X Select the location.If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there aredifferent ZIP codes available for the location,

the corresponding digits are displayedwith anX.X Enter the street and house number.The address is in the menu.

Further options for destination entry:Rsearch for a keywordThe keyword search finds destinations usingfragments of words.Rselect the last destinationRselect a contactRselect a POIYou can search for a POI by location, name ortelephone number.Rselect destination on the mapRenter intermediate destinationYou can map the route to the destinationyourself with up to four intermediate destina-tions.Rselect destinations from Mercedes-BenzAppsRselect geo-coordinates

Calculating the routePrerequisite: the address has been entered andis in the menu.X Select Start or Continue.The route is calculatedwith the selected routetype and the selected route options.If route guidance has already been activated,a prompt will appear asking whether you wishto end the current route guidance.

X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance orSet as Intermediate Destination.Cancel Active Route Guidance cancelsthe current route guidance and starts routecalculation to the new destination.Set as Intermediate Destination addsthe new destination in addition to the existingdestination and opens the intermediate des-tinations list.

Connecting a mobile phone

PrerequisitesFor telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, yourequire a Bluetooth®-capablemobile phone. Themobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile1.0 or above.

290 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

Multimedia system:X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐tingsQActivate Bluetooth.X Activate Bluetooth® O.Mobile phone:X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue-tooth® visibility for other devices (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth® device names for all of oneman-ufacturer's products might be identical. Tomake it possible to clearly identify your mobilephone, change the device name (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (PhoneBook Access Profile) and MAP (MessageAccess Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow-ing information will be transmitted after youconnect:RPhone bookRCall listsRText messages and e-mail

i Further information on suitable mobilephones can be found at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

i In the USA, you can get in touch with theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centeron 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Searching for and authorizing (connect-ing) a mobile phoneBefore using your mobile phone with the multi-media system for the first time, you will need tosearch for the phone and then authorize (con-nect) it. Depending on themobile phone, author-ization either takes place by means of SecureSimple Pairing or by entering a passkey. Themultimedia system automatically makes theprocedure that is relevant for yourmobile phoneavailable. The mobile phone is always connec-ted automatically after authorization. Furtherinformation on using a mobile phone with themultimedia system (see the Digital Operator'sManual).If the multimedia system does not detect yourmobile phone, this may be due to particularsecurity settings on your mobile phone (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).

Only one mobile phone can be connected to themultimedia system at any one time.Searching for a mobile phoneMultimedia system:X Select Tel/®QConnectDeviceQSearch for PhonesQStartSearch.The available mobile phones are displayed.

Symbols in the device list

Sym-bol

Explanation

Ï New mobile phone found, not yetauthorized.

Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but isnot connected

# Mobile phone is authorized andconnected

Connecting a mobile phoneAuthorization using Secure Simple Pairing:X Select mobile phone.A code is displayed in the multimedia systemand on the mobile phone.

X If codesmatch: select Yes on themultimediasystem.

X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-ing on the mobile phone used, confirm theconnection to the multimedia system and forthe PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. Theprompt to confirm may take up to twominutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-er's operating instructions).

X If the codes are different: select No on themultimedia system.The process is canceled.Repeat authorization.

Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode):X Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobilephone.The input menu for the passkey is displayed.

X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-nation as a passkey.

X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.X Press ¬ to confirm.X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobilephone. Depending on the mobile phone used,confirm the connection to themultimedia sys-

Operating system 291

Multim

ediasystem

Z

tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®profiles. The prompt to confirm may take upto two minutes to be displayed (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).

Switching between mobile phonesIf you have authorized more than one mobilephone, you can switch between the individualphones.Multimedia system:X Select Connect Device.X Select a mobile phone from the device list.

Media mode

General notesIf you wish to play external media sources, thedefault display must already be turned on. Fur-ther information on media mode (see the DigitalOperator's Manual).The following external media sources can beused:RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)(Y page 292)RCDRDVD (COMAND)RSD cardsRvia devices connected by Bluetooth®

i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVDchanger (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Using the device listMultimedia system:X Select MediaQDevices.The available media sources will be shown.The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the media source.Playable files are played.

Inserting/removing an SD card

Important safety notesG WARNINGSD cards are small parts. They can be swal-lowed and cause choking. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-tion immediately.

! If you are no longer using the SD card, youshould remove it and store it outside the vehi-cle. High temperatures can damage the card.

Inserting an SD cardThe SD card slot is on the control panel.X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot untilthe SD card engages. The side with the con-tacts must face downwards.

Removing an SD cardX Press the SD card.The SD card is ejected.

X Remove the SD card.

Connecting USB devices

There are two USB ports in the stowage spaceunder the armrest.X Connect the USB device to the USB port.X Select the media source (Y page 292).

292 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks (Rear SeatEntertainment System)

: Disc slot; AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal

(red)= AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal

(white)? AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)A Disc eject buttonThe AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive.Identical jacks can be found on the right-handside of the rear-compartment screens (AUX dis-play).

Operating system 293

Multim

ediasystem

Z

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicleweight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, sparewheel, installed accessories, vehicle occupantsand luggage/cargo.Do not exceed the load limit or permitted grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle.The gross load limit and the GVWR are specifiedon the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillarof the driver's door (Y page 356).The load must also be distributed so that theweight on each axle never exceeds the grossaxle weight rating (GAWR) for the front and rearaxles. The specifications for GVWR and GAWR

are on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door (Y page 356).Observe the notes on loading the vehicle(Y page 356).The handling characteristics of a laden vehicleare dependent on the distribution of the loadwithin the vehicle. For this reason, you shouldobserve the following notes when transporting aload:RNever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle mass or the gross axle weightrating for the vehicle (including occupants).RThe cargo compartment is the preferred placeto carry objects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the cargo compart-ment as possible.RThe load must not protrude above the upperedge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load against the rear or frontseat backrests. Make sure that the seatbackrests are securely locked into place.RAlways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcelnets to transport loads and luggage.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening mate-rials appropriate for the weight and size of theload.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges forprotection.

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you transport objects in the vehicle interiorand these are not adequately secured, theycould slip or be flung around and therebystrike vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobilephone brackets may not always be able tohold the objects placed in them in the event ofan accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sharp braking or suddenchanges of direction.

294 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

RAlways stow objects in such a way that theycannot be tossed about in these or similarsituations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude out of the stowage spaces, luggagenets or stowage nets.REnsure that closable stowage spaces areshut before beginning your journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects inthe cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 294).

Glove box

X To open: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwards untilit engages.

i The glove box can be cooled and ventilated(Y page 135).

1 Glove box unlocked2 Glove box lockedThe glove box can be locked and unlocked usingthe mechanical key.

Partition: for stowing flat objects is located inthe upper section of the glove box. It can beremoved to increase the stowage space in theglove box.X To remove: pull out partition:X To install: insert partition: and push it backuntil it engages.

Stowage compartment under the arm-rest

Vehicles without touchpadX To open: pull handle: up.The armrest folds out.

Stowage areas 295

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vehicles with touchpad and COMANDX To open: press button: at the front.Armrest; folds out.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a multi-media connector unit with 2 USB ports (MediaInterface), e.g. for use with an iPod®, iPhone® orMP3 player is installed in the stowage compart-ment.

i There is a removable stowage tray in thestorage compartment, in which objects suchas an iPod® can be stored.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:.The eyeglasses compartment opens down.

X To close: press marking: again and theeyeglasses compartment moves up andengages.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment isalways closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartment in the front cen-ter console

X To open: slide cover: forwards.Stowage compartment; appears.

X Toclose:pull cover:back as far as it will go.

Stowage compartment in the rear cen-ter console

X To open: briefly press the stowage compart-ment marking.The stowage compartment opens.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,theremay be open stowage spaces above andbelow the stowage compartment.

Stowage net

G WARNINGVehicles with the Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS):If the gross weight of the objects in the stow-age net on the back of the front-passengerseat is greater than 4.4 lb (2 kg), OCS cannotcorrectly assess the occupant's weight cate-gory. The front-passenger front air bag coulddeploy without cause, or may fail to deploy inthe event of an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always observe the permissible gross weightof 4.4 lb (2 kg). Stow and secure heavyobjects in the cargo compartment.

296 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

: stowage net in front-passenger footwell

: Stowage net on the back of the front seats

: Stowage net in cargo compartmentObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 294)and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces(Y page 294).

Through-loading facility in the rearIf objects or loads are not secured when beingtransported in the through-loading facility, theycould slip or be thrown around and thereby hitvehicle occupants.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 294)and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces(Y page 294).

The through-loading facility is opened from thecargo compartment.X If necessary, fold the third row of seatsforward (Y page 99).

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X Pull the center head restraint on the rearbench seat into the uppermost position(Y page 96).

X Slide release catch: to the left and swingflap; to the left until it is lying on the rearside of the rear bench seat.

X Push cover= forward until it is lying on therear seat armrest.

Cargo compartment enlargement

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear bench

Stowage areas 297

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-partment cannot be restrained by the seatbackrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

Make sure that the seat backrest and the seatcushion are correctly engaged in position. To doso, pull firmly on the seat backrest.

! Release and fold the seat cushion upwardsbefore folding the rear bench seat forward.Otherwise, the backrests may be damaged.When the backrest is folded forwards, thefront seats cannot bemoved to their rearmostposition. Otherwise, the front seats and therear bench seat could be damaged.

! The backrest is heavy. Therefore, take carewhen folding it down.Make sure that the headrestraints are pushed all the way in so that thebackrests and seat cushions are not dam-aged.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 294).The left-hand and right-hand backrests in thesecond row of seats can be folded forwardsseparately to increase the cargo compartmentcapacity.On vehicles with a third row of seats, you mustfold down the third row of seats beforehand(Y page 99) to obtain maximum cargo compart-ment enlargement.

Folding the rear bench seat forwards

If the driver's or front-passenger seat is set for alarger person, it may not be possible to fold therear bench seat forward. In this case, move thefront seats as far forward as possible.X Move the head restraints to the lowest posi-tion (Y page 97).

X Pull release loop: of seat cushion;.X Fold seat cushion; up.

X Pull release handle= in the direction of thearrow.The backrest is released.

X Fold the backrest forward until it reaches thecargo compartment position.

298 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

X Guide seat belts; under respective clips:.

Folding the rear bench seat back

X Fold seat backrest; back until it engages.Make sure not to trap the seat belt while doingso.

X Swing seat cushion: back.X Pull up and adjust the head restraints if nec-essary (Y page 97).

Securing loads

Cargo tie-down rings

G WARNINGThe Top Tether anchorages cannot secure aload. If you secure a load with the Top Tetheranchorages, the Top Tether anchorages couldbe pulled out during braking, abrupt changesin direction or in the event of an accident. Theload could slip, tip over or be flung around andthereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a riskof injury.Only use the cargo tie down rings when secur-ing a load.

Observe the following notes on securing loads:RSecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-downrings evenly.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure aload, as these are only intended as an anti-slipprotection for light loads.

RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges orcorners.RPad sharp edges for protection.

There are four cargo tie-down rings: in thecargo compartment.

Bag hook

G WARNINGThe bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objectsor items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-gage could be flung around and thereby hitvehicle occupants when braking or abruptlychanging directions. There is a risk of injury.Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragileobjects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to securea load.

There is a bag hook in the cargo compartmenton the right-hand side.X Press bag hook marking:.X Turn bag hook: until it engages.

Stowage areas 299

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Cargo compartment cover

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo compartment covercannot secure or restrain heavy objects,items of luggage and heavy loads. You couldbe hit by an unsecured load during suddenchanges in direction, braking or in the event ofan accident. There is an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo compartment cover.

! When loading the vehicle, make sure thatyou do not stack the load in the cargo com-partment higher than the lower edge of theside windows. Do not place heavy objects ontop of the cargo compartment cover.

The cargo compartment cover may be installedbehind the 2nd or 3rd row of seats.

Extending/retracting the cargo com-partment cover

X To extend: pull the cargo compartment coverback by grab handle: and clip it into retain-ers; on the left and right.

X To retract: unhook the cargo compartmentcover from left-hand and right-hand retain-ers;.

X Guide cargo compartment cover forwards bygrab handle: until it is completely rolled up.

Installing/removing the cargo compart-ment cover

X To remove: make sure that cargo compart-ment cover: is rolled up.

X Push end cap= of cargo compartmentcover: in the direction of the arrow on theright or left-hand side.

X Push cargo compartment cover: into oppo-site anchorage;.

X Remove cargo compartment cover:.X To install: if installed, remove the protectivecaps from the side panels of the seat row inwhich the cargo compartment cover is to beinstalled. Use a suitable object here, e.g. acoin.

X Install the protective caps to the side panelsof the other seat row.

X Place cargo compartment cover: intoanchorage; on the right or left-hand side.

X Push in opposite end cap= of cargo com-partment cover: in the direction of thearrow and insert cargo compartmentcover: into opposite anchorage;.

Coat hooks on the tailgate

: Coat hook

300 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Stowage well under the cargo com-partment floor

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you drivewhen the cargo compartment flooris open, objects could be flung around, thusstriking vehicle occupants. There is a risk ofinjury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.Always close the cargo compartment floorbefore a journey.

The TIREFIT kit, tire-change tool kit, etc. arelocated in the stowage compartment.

Opening/closing the cargo compart-ment floor

X To open: holding the ribbing, press handle:down;.Handle: folds up.

X Swing the cargo compartment floor upwardsusing handle: until it rests against the cargocompartment cover.

X Fold out hook= on the underside of thecargo compartment floor in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Attach hook= to the cargo compartment'supper seal?.

X To close: detach hook= from the cargocompartment's upper seal?.

X Fasten hook= to the bracket on the under-side of the cargo compartment floor.

X Fold the cargo compartment floor down.X Press the cargo compartment floor down;until it engages.

Locking/unlocking the cargo compart-ment floor

1 Cargo compartment floor unlocked2 Cargo compartment floor lockedThe cargo compartment floor can be locked andunlocked using the mechanical key.

Stowage areas 301

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse roof carriers that have been tested andapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Thishelps to prevent damage to the vehicle.Position the load on the roof carrier in such away that the vehicle will not sustain damageeven when it is in motion.Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensurethat when the roof carrier is installed you can:Rraise the sliding sunroof fullyRopen the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel fullyRopen the tailgate fully

You will find information on the maximum roofload in the "Technical data" section(Y page 384).An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof loadmay become detached from the vehicle. Youmust therefore ensure that you observe the roofcarrier manufacturer's installation instructions.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Secure the roof carrier to roof rails:. Indoing so, observe the manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you transport objects in the vehicle interiorand these are not adequately secured, theycould slip or be flung around and therebystrike vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobilephone brackets may not always be able tohold the objects placed in them in the event ofan accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sharp braking or suddenchanges of direction.RAlways stow objects in such a way that theycannot be tossed about in these or similarsituations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude out of the stowage spaces, luggagenets or stowage nets.REnsure that closable stowage spaces areshut before beginning your journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects inthe cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 294).

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. The drinkscould otherwise spill.

! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cupholder in the center console to continuous,strong and direct sunlight. The passengercompartment in the area of the center con-sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-centrated and reflected sunlight.

Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the tem-perature-controlled cup holder (Y page 303).Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be rec-ognized.

302 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The stowage compartments in the doors providespace for bottles with a capacity of up to34 fl. oz. (1.0 l).The bottles are not secured or prevented fromtipping over. Therefore, do not place any opendrink containers in the stowage compartments.

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter console

: Cup holder; CoverX To open: slide cover; to its foremost posi-tion.

X Toclose:pull cover;back as far as it will go.You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat forcleaning. Cleanwith clear, lukewarmwater only.

Temperature-controlled cup holder inthe front-compartment center console

: Cup holder; Residual heat indicator lamp= SwitchThe temperature-controlled cup holder can beused to keep cold drinks cool and warm drinkswarm.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X To switch on the cooling function: pressand hold button= until the blue indicatorlamp on the button lights up.

X To switch on the heating function: pressand hold button= until the red indicatorlamp on the button lights up.

X To switch off the function: press and holdbutton= until the indicator lamp on the but-ton goes out.

When the heating function is used, the metalinsert of the cup holder is heated. Once a certaintemperature is reached, residual heat indicatorlamp; lights up. This means that the metalinsert of the cup holder is hot. For this reason,you must not reach into the cup holder metalinsert.Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean thecup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest! Do not sit on or support your body weight onthe rear seat armrest when it is folded down,as you could otherwise damage it.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.Cup holder: is located in the rear seat arm-rest.

Features 303

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Cup holder in the third row of seats

: Cup holderThe cup holders are located in the side trim onthe left and right-hand sides.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Additional sun visor= Bracket? Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticketA Vanity mirrorB Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visor isclipped into retainer= andmirror coverB hasbeen folded up.

Glare from the side

X Fold down sun visor:.X Pull sun visor: out of retainer=.X Swing sun visor: to the side.Vehicles with additional sun visor:X Slide sun visor: horizontally as required.X Fold down additional sun visor; to the wind-shield.

Roller sunblinds on the rear side win-dows! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Donot let it snap back suddenly as this woulddamage the automatic roller mechanism.

! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sun-blind hooked in and the side windows openedsimultaneously. The roller sunblind can jumpout of the retainers and spring back suddenlywhen driving at high speeds, e.g. when drivingon the freeway. This could damage the inertiareel. Therefore, either close the side windowor retract the roller sunblind before driving athigh speeds.

304 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out bytab: and hook it onto retainers; at theback of the window.

The roller sunblind can be hooked back intoplace should it pop out from the top of the guiderail.X Tilt pull-out profile: as illustrated.X Slip guide bush; into open area of guide rail=.

X Straighten up pull-out profile: again.

Ashtray

Front ashtray! The holder under the ashtray is not heatresistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in theashtray, make sure that the ashtray is prop-erly engaged. Otherwise, the holder could bedamaged.

X To open: slide cover: to its foremost posi-tion.

X Fold cover= of the insert upwards.X To remove the insert: push insert= to theleft?.Insert= slides out slightly to the right.

X Lift insert= up; and out.X To re-install the insert: place insert= intothe holder and press it down on the right untilit engages.

X Toclose:pull cover:back as far as it will go.

Rear-compartment ashtray! Close the ashtray when it is not in use andbefore you fold the rear seats forward. Youcan otherwise damage the ashtray.

Vehicleswithout a Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-tem have an ashtray in the center console in therear compartment.X To open: briefly press cover; at the top.The ashtray opens.

X To remove the insert: push into recess=from the right.Ashtray insert: slides out slightly to theright.

Features 305

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Lift insert: up and out.X To re-install the insert: place insert: intothe holder and press down on the right until itengages.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

! The cigarette lighter in the center console inthe front compartment is not intended foroperating the tire inflation compressor.

Your attention must always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighterwhen road and traffic conditions permit.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X To open: slide cover: to its foremost posi-tion.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter;will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.

X Toclose:pull cover:back as far as it will go.

12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

With the exception of the socket in the frontcenter console, all sockets can be used foraccessories with a maximum current draw of240 W (20 A). The socket in the front centerconsole can be used for accessories with amax-imumcurrent draw of 180W (15 A). Accessoriesinclude such items as chargers for mobilephones.If you use the sockets for long periods when theengine is switched off, the battery may dis-charge.

i An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to thesockets is automatically cut. This ensuresthat there is sufficient power to start theengine.

Socket in the front center console! The socket is not suitable for operating thetire inflation compressor.

X To open: slide the cover to its foremost posi-tion.

X Lift up the cover of the socket.X To close: pull the cover back as far as it willgo.

Socket in the rear compartment centerconsoleVehicles with the Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-tem have two sockets in the center console inthe rear compartment.X Lift up the cover of the socket.

306 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Socket in the cargo compartment

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

115 V socket

Important safety notes

G DANGERWhen a suitable device is connected, the115 V power socket will be carrying a highvoltage. You could receive an electric shock ifthe connector cable or the 115 V powersocket is pulled out of the trim or is damagedor wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.RUse only connector cables that are dry andfree of damage.RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the115 V power socket is dry.RHave the 115 V power socket checked orreplaced immediately at a qualified speci-alizedworkshop if it is damagedor has beenpulled out of the trim.RNever plug the connector cable into a 115Vpower socket that is damaged or has beenpulled out of the trim.

G DANGERIf you reach into the power socket or pluginappropriate devices into the power socket,you could receive an electric shock. There is arisk of fatal injury.Only connect appropriate devices to thepower socket.

! Note that work and repairs on the 115 Vpower socket should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel.

General notesThe 115 V power socket provides an alternatingvoltage of 115 V so that small electronic devicescan be connected. These devices, such asgames consoles, chargers and laptops,must notconsume more than a maximum of 150 wattsaltogether.Requirements for operation of these devices:Rthe electronic device that you connect has asuitable connector and conforms to stand-ards specific to the country you are in.Rthe plug of the electronic device is pluggedcorrectly into 115 V power socket.Rthe maximum wattage of the device to beconnected must not exceed 150 watts.Rthe on-board power supply is within a permis-sible voltage range.Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment andthe cargo compartment are operational.

Using the 115 V power socket

X To switch on: switch the ignition on.X Open flap=.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into115 V power socket:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To switch off: disconnect the plug from115 V power socket:.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

Features 307

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Problems with the 115 V power socket

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The warning lamp on the115 V power socket isnot lit.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.X Start the engine.orX Charge the battery (Y page 338).If the indicator lamp still does not light up:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down theconverter:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominalpower of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current.This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 115 Vpower socket will not supply it with power.X Connect a suitable electronic device.

mbrace

General notesThe mbrace system is only available in the USA.You must have a license agreement to activatethembrace service. Make sure that your systemis activated and operational. To log in, press theï MB Info call button. If any of the stepsmentioned are not carried out, the system maynot be activated.If you have questions about the activation, con-tact one of the following telephone hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service, a user ID and password will besent to you by mail. You can use this passwordto log onto the mbrace area under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.

The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableDetermining the location of the vehicle on amapis only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to theCustomer Assistance Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the multi-function steering wheel.

orX Use the volume control on the multimediasystem.

308 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callYou can find information and a description of allavailable features under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, the sys-tem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has been detectedif one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does notcome on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diagnosisof the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-lowing buttons continues to light up red afterthe system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRThe Inoperative or the Service NotActivated message appears in the multi-function display after the system self-diagno-sis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,the system may not operate as expected. In theevent of an emergency, help will have to besummoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearest author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the fol-lowing service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notesObserve the notes on system activation(Y page 308).An emergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-gered. You cannot end an automatically trig-gered emergency call yourself.An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been initi-ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting Call messageappears in the multifunction display.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, the CallConnected message appears in the multifunc-tion display.All important information relating to the emer-gency is transferred, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determinedby the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been initi-ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-

Features 309

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

lished between theCustomer AssistanceCenterand the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerattempts to get more information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu-pants, an ambulance is immediately sent tothe vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,the system has been unable to initiate an emer-gency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. The indi-cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-ously.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press and hold the SOS button for at least onesecond;.The indicator lamp in SOS button; flashesuntil the emergency call is concluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.If the mobile phone network is unavailable,mbrace will not be able to make the emergencycall. If you leave the vehicle immediately afterpressing SOS button;, you do not know ifmbrace has successfully made the emergencycall. In this case, always summon assistance byother means.

Breakdown assistance button

X To call Roadside Assistance: press Road-side Assistance button:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active. TheConnecting Call message appears in themultifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe multimedia system display indicates that acall is active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on the multimedia system, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.From the remote malfunction diagnosis, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercan ascertain the nature of the problem(Y page 313).The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter either sends a qualifiedMercedes-Benz tech-nician or makes arrangements for your vehicleto be transported to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such as repairwork and/or towing.

310 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

You can find more information in the separatembrace manual.The system has not been able to initiate a Road-side Assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistancecall button F is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

MB Info call button

X To call MB Info: pressMB Info call button:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in MB Info call button:flashes while the connection is being made.The Connecting Call message appears inthe multifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

The multimedia system display indicates that acall is active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.You can find further information on the mbracesystem under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.The system has not been able to initiate an MBInfo call, if:Rthe indicator lamp inMB Info call button ïis flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergency callcan still be initiated. In this case, an emergencycall will take priority and override all other activecalls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steeringwheelRthe corresponding button in the multimediasystem to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system ismuted.

Features 311

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

The mobile phone is no longer connected to themultimedia system.However, if you want to use your mobile phone,do so only when the vehicle is stationary and ina safe location.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you access to adatabase with over 15 million points of interest(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-gation system in your vehicle. If you know thedestination, the address can be downloaded.Alternatively, you can obtain the location ofPoints of Interest (POIs)/important destinationsin the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes with upto four way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidance tothe address entered.X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.

The destination download function is availableif:Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys-tem.Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa-ble and data transfer is possible.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of thembrace PLUS Packageand cannot be purchased separately.You can use the Route Assistance function evenif the vehicle is not equipped with a navigationsystem.Within the framework of this service, you receivea professional and reliable form of navigationsupport without having to leave your vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-rent position and the desired destination. Youwill then be guided live through the current routesection.

Search & Send

General notesTo use "Search & Send", your vehicle must beequipped with mbrace and a navigation system.Additionally, an mbrace service subscriptionmust be completed."Search & Send" is a destination entry service. Adestination address which is found on GoogleMaps® can be transferred via mbrace directly toyour vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://maps.google.comand enter a destination address into the entryfield.

X To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account:click on the corresponding button on theweb-site.Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address willbe sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specified whensetting up your mbrace account into the cor-responding field.

X Click "Send".Information on specific commands such as"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on thewebsite.

Calling up a transmitted destinationaddressX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).The transmitted destination address is loadedinto the vehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, asking whethernavigation should be started.

X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.

312 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

If you have sent more than one destinationaddress, each individual destination must beconfirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the sameorder as the order in which they were sent.If you ownmultipleMercedes-Benz vehicleswithmbrace and activated mbrace accounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination will besent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle and areplacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlockingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa-ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-able and a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed uponwith the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRthe telephone application (e. g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

Vehicle remote closingThe vehicle remote-closing feature can be usedwhen you have forgotten to lock the vehicle andyou are no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

The vehicle can be immediately remotely lockedwithin four days of the ignition being turned off.After this time, remote closing may be delayedby 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehiclecan no longer be locked remotely.The vehicle remote closing feature is available ifthe relevant mobile phone network is availableand a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and youswitch on the ignition, the Doors LockedRemotelymessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRthe telephone application (e. g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centertogether with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercontacts you and the local law enforcementagency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agency isinformed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated forlonger than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center is automaticallynotified.

Vehicle Health CheckWith the Vehicle Health Check, the CustomerAssistance Center can provide improved sup-port for problems with your vehicle. During an

Features 313

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

existing call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance Center.The customer service representative can usethe received data to decide what kind of assis-tance is required. You are then, for example,guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz ServiceCenter or a recovery vehicle is called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred during anMB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this isinitiated by the Customer Assistance Center.The Roadside Assistance Connected mes-sage appears in the display. If the Vehicle HealthCheck can be started, the Request for Vehi‐cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐cle diagnostics? message appears in thedisplay.X Press the Yes button to confirm themessage.X When the Vehicle Diagnostics PleaseStart Ignition message appears: turn theSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 138).

X If the Please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehi‐cle to a safe position. messageappears: please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehicle to asafe position.The message in the display disappears.The vehicle operating state check begins.During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐cle Diagnostics Active message.If you select Cancel, the Vehicle HealthCheck is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the Sendingvehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐nection may be interrupted duringdata transfer)message appears. The vehicledata can now be sent.X Press the OK button to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance Center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ring Data... message appears.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-tion is re-established after the transfer is com-plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at alater time by another means, e.g. by e-mail orphone.

Another function of the Vehicle Health Check isthe transfer of service data to the CustomerAssistanceCenter. If a service is due, the displayshows a message to this effect together withinformation about any special offers at yourworkshop.This information can also be called up under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 30).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 27).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transfer andsave predefined routes in the navigation sys-tem.A route can be prepared and sent by either acustomer service representative or under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Each route can include up to four way points.Once a route has been received by the naviga-tion system, you will see the Do you want tostart route guidance? DestinationReceived destination has been savedin "Previous destinations". message onthe multimedia system display.The route is saved.X To start route guidance: select Yes.An overview of the route is shown in the dis-play.If you select No, the saved route can be calledup later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start.Route guidance starts.

Downloaded and saved routes can be called upagain.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle,a message will be sent to the Customer Assis-tance Center. The Customer Assistance Centerthen forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.

314 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit was excee-dedRthe time at which the speed limit was excee-dedRthe selected speed limit which was exceeded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areaswhich thevehicle should not enter or leave. You will beinformed if the vehicle crosses the boundariesof the selected areas. You can select the way inwhich you receive this information beforehand.Possible options include textmessage, e-mail oran automated call.The area can be determined as either a circle ora polygon with a maximum of ten corners. Youcan specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-ferent settings are possible for each area.These settings can be called up under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger anMB Info call andinform the customer service representative thatyou wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated by textmessage.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehicle'spanic alarm via text message. An alarm soundsand the exterior lighting flashes. Depending onthe setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notesThe HomeLink® garage door opener integratedin the rear-view mirror allows you to operate upto three different door and gate systems.Use the integrated garage door opener only ongarage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remote

control. Please also read the operating instruc-tions for the garage door system.When programming a garage door opener, parkthe vehicle outside the garage. Do not run theengine while programming.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integrated garagedoor opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free ofcharge)

More information on HomeLink® and/or com-patible products is also available online athttp://www.homelink.com.Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 28).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Features 315

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Programming

Programming buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 315).

Garage door remote controlA is not includedwith the integrated garage door opener.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use to con-trol the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? on the integratedgarage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ming mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: lights up yellow.Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soon asbutton;,= or? is stored for the first time.If the selected button has already been pro-gramed, indicator lamp: will only light upyellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote controlA towards but-tons; to? on the rear-view mirror at a dis-tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code (Y page 316).

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doing

so, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 315).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror. To do this youwillneed to use the programming button on the doordrive control panel. The programming buttonmay be located in different places depending onthe manufacturer. It is usually located on thedoor drive unit on the garage ceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage door driveoperating instructions, e.g. under "Program-ming additional remote controls", before carry-ing out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of the garagedoor or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects arepresent within the sweep of the door or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programming button on the doordrive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiatethe next step.

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programed button;,=or? on the integrated garage door openerrepeatedly and in quick succession until thedoor closes.The rolling code synchronization is then com-plete.

Notes on programming the remote con-trolCanadian radio frequency laws require a "break"(or interruption) of the transmission signalsafter broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,these signals may not last long enough for theintegrated garage door opener. The signal is notrecognized during programming. Comparable

316 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

with Canadian law, someU.S. garage door open-ers also feature a "break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of where youlive) when using the programming steps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? on theintegrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lights upyellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remote con-trolA for two seconds, then release it for twoseconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB of remotecontrolA until indicator lamp: lights upgreen.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA of thegarage door drive.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprogramming process for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problems programingthe integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instruc-tions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA andwhether it is supported. The transmitter fre-quency can usually be found on the back ofremote controlA for the garage door drive.The integrated garage door opener is com-patible with devices that have units which

operate in the frequency range of 280 to433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage door remotecontrolA. This increases the likelihood thatgarage door remote controlA will transmit astrong and precise signal to the integratedgarage door opener.RWhen programming, hold remote controlAat varying distances and angles and from but-tons; to?which you are programming. Tryvarious angles at a distance between 2and8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle butat varying distances.RIf another remote controlA is available forthe same garage door drive, repeat the sameprogramming steps with this remote controlA. Before performing these steps,make surethat new batteries have been installed ingarage door drive remote controlA.RNote that some remote controls only transmitfor a limited amount of time (the indicatorlamp on the remote control goes out). PressbuttonB on remote controlA again beforetransmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function of thegarage door system remote control. Please alsoread the operating instructions for the garagedoor system.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X Press buttons;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-cator lamp: flashes green.The transmitter will transmit a signal as longas the button is pressed. The transmission ishalted after a maximum of ten seconds andindicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Press button;,= or? again if necessary.

Features 317

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before selling thevehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X Press and hold buttons; and?.The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.

X Release buttons; and?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

X Driver's seat/front-passenger seat: slidethe respective seat back.

X Rear seats: slide the corresponding frontseat forwards.

X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.X Press studs: onto retainers;.

X To remove: pull the floormat from retain-ers;.

X Remove the floormat.

318 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation area

Rremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshield wip-ers or the hood.

Engine compartment 319

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle;up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in(40 cm), the hood is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a height ofapproximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and close itwith a little more force.

RadiatorVehicles with a diesel engine: do not coverthe radiator, for example with a winter front orbug cover. The readings of the on-board-diag-nostic system may otherwise be inaccurate.Some of these readings are required by law andmust be accurate at all times.

Engine oil

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption maybe higher than this when the vehicle is new or ifyou frequently drive at high engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstickmay bein a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off for approx-imately five minutes if the engine is at normaloperating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operating tem-perature, e.g. if the engine was only startedbriefly, wait about 30minutes before carryingout the measurement.

320 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine

Example: vehicles with a diesel engineX Pull dipstick: out of the dipstick tube.X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guide tubeto the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= and MAXmark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= orbelow, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil.

Adding engine oil

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Use only engine oils and oil filters that areapproved for vehicleswith a service system. Alist of the engine oils and oil filters that havebeen tested and approved in accordance withMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts is available at any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

The following cause engine failure or damageto the exhaust system:RUse of engine oils and oil filters that havenot been expressly approved for the servicesystemRReplacement of engine oil and oil filter afterthe replacement interval specified by theservice system has expiredRUse of engine oil additives

! Do not add too much oil. adding too muchengine oil can result in damage to the engineor to the catalytic converter. Have excessengine oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil capX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and remove it.X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) ofengine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and tightenclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick(Y page 321).

Further information on engine oil (Y page 381).

Additional service products

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.

Engine compartment 321

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGThe cooling system is pressurized, particularlywhen the motor is warm. If you open the cap,you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before you open thecap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowlyopen the cap to relieve pressure.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

Checking coolant level

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 140).

X Check the coolant temperature gauge in themultifunction display.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button (Y page 140).

X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 140).X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clock-wise and allow excess pressure to escape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) abovemarker bar= in the filler neckwhenwarm, there is enough coolant in expan-sion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as far asit will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 382).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system

Example: washer fluid reservoirX To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-mended minimum of 1 liter, a message appearsin the multifunction display prompting you toadd washer fluid (Y page 273).Further information on windshield washer fluid(Y page 383).

322 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

ASSYST PLUS

Service messageThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate Maintenance Book-let).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on the engineoil level. Observe the notes on the engine oillevel (Y page 320).

The multifunction display shows a service mes-sage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. DaysRService A DueRService A Overdue by .. DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance until thenext service due date is displayed.The letter A or B, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, shows the type of ser-vice. A stands for a minor service and B for amajor service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval display doesnot take into account any periods of time duringwhich the battery is disconnected.Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-ule:X Note down the service due date displayed inthe multifunction display before disconnect-ing the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtract thebattery disconnection periods from the ser-vice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press the% ora button on the steeringwheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by press-ing thea button.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval displayhas been inadvertently reset, this setting canbe corrected at a qualified specialist work-shop.Have service work carried out as described intheMaintenance Booklet. This may otherwiselead to increased wear and damage to themajor assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset theASSYST PLUS service interval display after theservice work has been carried out. You can alsoobtain further information on maintenancework, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specified maintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditions orincreased load on the vehicle, maintenancework must be carried out more frequently, forexample:Rregular city drivingwith frequent intermediatestopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travel shortdistancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long periodsUnder these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires must becheckedmore often. Further information can be

ASSYST PLUS 323

Maintenance

andcare

Z

obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Driving abroadAn extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network isalso available in other countries. You can obtainfurther information from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any ofthe following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protective filmswith hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.You could otherwise scratch or damage thesurfaces and protective film.

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period oftime directly after cleaning, particularly aftercleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Byheating up the brakes, the brake discs andpads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for along period of time.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! Before driving into an automatic car wash,make sure that it is suitable for the dimen-sions of the vehicle. In particular, make surethat:Rthere is enough ground clearance betweenthe vehicle underbody and the guide rails ofthe automatic car wash.Rthe clearance width of the automatic carwash is sufficient, particularly the width ofthe guide rails.Ryou enter the automatic car wash straightand in the center of the guide rails in orderto avoid damaging the tires or wheel rims.

Fold in the exterior mirrors before the vehicleis washed. The exterior mirrors could other-wise be damaged.

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-ically in certain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (theOFF button has been pressed).Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position 0.Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.

324 CareMaintenance

andcare

! In car washes with a towing mechanism,make sure that the automatic transmission isin transmission position N, otherwise thevehicle could be damaged.RVehicles with a SmartKey:Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lock. Do not open the driver's door orfront-passenger door when the engine isswitched off. Otherwise, the automatictransmission selects park position P auto-matically and locks the wheels. You canprevent this by shifting the automatic trans-mission to N beforehand.RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO:Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine isswitched off. Otherwise, the automatictransmission selects park position P auto-matically and locks the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that theautomatic transmission stays in position N:X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and theignition is switched off.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stopbutton on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe off waxfrom the windshield and the wiper blades. Thiswill prevent smears and reduce wiping noisescaused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in all countriesconcerned.

X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-tle jet of water.

X Do not point thewater jet directly towards theair inlets.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the spongefrequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-work.

When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information about thecorrect distance is available from the equip-ment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle around whencleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RTiresRDoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.RElectrical componentsRBatteryRConnectorsRLampsRSealsRTrimRVentilation slots

Care 325

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Damaged seals or electrical components canlead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected bycorrosion and damage caused by inadequatecare cannot always be completely repaired. Insuch cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover andrinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse offthe treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,fuels and greases by rubbing gently with acloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighterfluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recommen-ded and approved byMercedes-Benz. This is thecase approximately every three to five months,depending on the climate conditions and thecare product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if thepaint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benzshould be used.Do not use these care products in the sun or onthe hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-work quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork withunsuitable materialsRfrequent use of automatic car washesRwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishingproducts, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for thepurpose of paintwork care. These productsare only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Theiruse on vehicles with matte paintwork leads toconsiderable surface damage or, more spe-cifically, to shiny, spotted areas.Always have paintwork repairs carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clearmatte finish. This will help you to avoid damageto the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheels witha clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should ideally be washed byhand using a soft sponge, car shampoo andplenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

326 CareMaintenance

andcare

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period oftime directly after cleaning, particularly aftercleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Byheating up the brakes, the brake discs andpads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for along period of time.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of the windows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. Thereis otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals andpollen may under certain circumstances pre-vent water from draining away. This can leadto corrosion damage and damage to elec-tronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the windowswith a damp cloth and a cleaning product thatis recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, thewiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and donot rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-ite coating could be damaged. This couldcause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged if thewiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from thewindshield (Y page 120).

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a dampcloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothswhich are suitable for plastic light lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning clothscould scratch or damage the plastic light len-ses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaningagent, e. g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo orcleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothsthat are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitablecleaning agents or cleaning cloths couldscratch or damage the plastic lenses of themirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wetsponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the side running board! Do not clean the aluminum inserts of theside running board with alkaline or acidiccleaners, such as wheel cleaner. Do not useacidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust.The aluminum inserts could otherwise bedamaged.

Care 327

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a distanceof at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicleand the power washer nozzle. Informationabout the correct distance is available fromthe equipment manufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systems withwater, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear viewcamera and360°camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera or 360° camerawith a power washer.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Open the camera cover for cleaning via themultimedia system (see the separate operat-ing instructions).

X To clean the camera: use clean water and asoft cloth to clean the camera lens:.

360°camera: if you drive at speeds above20mph (30 km/h) or with the SmartKey in posi-tion 0 or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the360° camera closes automatically.

Cleaning the exhaust pipe

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 vehicles with blackexhaust pipes: black chromed exhaust tipsshould not be polished with a chrome polish.They will otherwise lose their black shine. Foroptimal care, the faceplates should be rubbedwith a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash.Commercially available engine and care oilsare suitable for this.For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paint-work polish with a microfiber cloth. Removethe excess polish residue after polishing.

Impurities combined with the effects of road gritand corrosive environmental factors may causeflash rust to form on the surface. You canrestore the original shine of the exhaust pipe bycleaning it regularly, especially in winter andafter washing.X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome careproduct tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

328 CareMaintenance

andcare

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch

H Environmental noteDispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

! Do not clean the ball coupling with a powerwasher. Do not use solvents.

! Please note the care instructions in thetrailer coupling manufacturer's operatinginstructions.

The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomesdirty or corroded.X Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling,e.g. with a wire brush.

X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or abrush.

X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball cou-pling:.

X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch isworking properly.

i You can also have the maintenance work onthe ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch car-ried out by a qualified specialist workshop.

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household cleaningagents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surface when

cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-age to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure that itis switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCDdisplay cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibercloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent orsunscreen to come into contact with the plas-tic trim. Thismaintains the high-quality look ofthe surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Care 329

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishesor waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-ing the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum and canlose their shine if chrome polish is used. Usea damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaningthe trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you areunsure as to whether the trim pieces arechrome-plated or not, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with adamp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Donot use amicrofiber cloth to clean coversmade out of real leather, artificial leather orDINAMICA. If used often, these can damagethe cover.

i Note that regular care is essential to ensurethat the appearance and comfort of the cov-ers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefully witha damp cloth and then wipe the coversdown with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwise becomerough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.

It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and always wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning resultsdepend on the type of dirt and how long ithas been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts byheating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80†)or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarmwater and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush ordry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaningagents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

330 CareMaintenance

andcare

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowagewell under the cargo compartment floor.Apart from certain country-specific variations,the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-changetool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel arespecific to the vehicle. For more information onwhich tools are required to perform a wheelchange on your vehicle, consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Necessary tire-changing tools can include, forexample:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrenchRRatchet wrenchRAlignment bolt

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

: Lug wrench; Towing eye= Ratchet wrench? Alignment boltA Tire sealant filler bottleB Tire inflation compressorC Folding wheel chockD JackE Wheel boltsX Open the tailgate.X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards(Y page 301).

X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 333).

Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergencyspare wheel

: Alignment bolt; Velcro fastener= Folding wheel chock? Ratchet wrenchA Lug wrenchB JackC Wheel boltsD Towing eyeX Open the tailgate.X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards(Y page 301).

X Remove the "Minispare" emergency sparewheel (Y page 373).

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper-ties)Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-cles with MOExtended tiresRa TIREFIT kit (Y page 331)Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certaincountries)

Information on changing and mounting wheels(Y page 366).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 159).

Flat tire 331

Breakdow

nassistance

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:make sure that the normal vehicle level isselected (Y page 188).

X Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineeringpackage: make sure that the normal level isselected (Y page 182).

X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driv-er's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 138).

X Make sure that the passengers are not endan-gered as they do so. Make sure that no one isnear the danger area while a wheel is beingchanged. Anyone who is not directly assistingin the wheel change should, for example,stand behind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to trafficconditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.X Unload heavy luggage.

i Only operate the tire inflation compressorusing a 12 V socket, even if the ignition isturned off (Y page 306).An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to thesockets is automatically cut. This ensuresthat there is sufficient power to start theengine.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in oneor more tires. The affected tire must not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on the

sidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bear-ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 361).MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-tion with an active tire pressure loss warningsystem or with an active tire pressure monitor.If a pressure losswarningmessage appearsin the multifunction display:Robserve the instructions in the display mes-sages (Y page 268).Rcheck the tire for damage.Rif driving on, observe the following notes.The driving distance possible in run-flat mode isapproximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-cle is partially laden and approximately 18miles(30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:Rvehicle speedRroad conditionRoutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving conditionsor maneuvers, or it can be increased through amoderate style of driving.The driving distance possible in run-flat mode iscounted from the moment the tire pressure losswarning appears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

i When replacing one or all tires, pleaseobserve the following specifications for yourvehicle's tires:RsizeRtype andRthe "MOExtended" markIf a tire has gone flat and cannot be replacedwith a MOExtended tire, a standard tire maybe used as a temporary measure. Make surethat you use the proper size and type (sum-mer or winter tire).

i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the fac-tory. It is therefore recommended that youadditionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFITkit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kitmay be obtained from a qualified specialistworkshop.

332 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressorfor longer than eightminutes at a timewithouta break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be operatedagain once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-pressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Donot remove any foreign objectswhich havepenetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation

Flat tire 333

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

compressor from the stowage well under-neath the cargo compartment floor(Y page 331).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker to theinstrument cluster within the driver's field ofvision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Pull connector? with the cable and hoseAout of the tire inflation compressor housing.

X Screw hoseA onto flangeB of tire sealantbottle:.

X Place tire sealant bottle: head downwardsinto recess; of the tire inflation compres-sor.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC.X Insert connector? into a socket in your vehi-cle.Cigarette lighter socket: (Y page 306)12 V sockets: (Y page 306)

Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter(Y page 306). Observe the notes on sockets(Y page 306).

X Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X Press on and off switch= on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switched on.The tire is inflated.i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. Thepressure can briefly rise to approximately500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximumof fiveminutes. The tire should thenhave attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-sure reached" (Y page 335).If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been attained after five minutes, see "Tirepressure not reached" (Y page 334).If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affectedareas as quickly as possible. Use plain water ifpossible.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, havethem cleaned with perchloroethylene at a drycleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has notbeen attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.Note that tire sealant may escape when youunscrew the filler hose.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-imately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of five minutes the tire pres-sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badly

334 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum permissible speed for a tiresealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must beaffixed to the instrument cluster in the driver'sfield of vision.

! Residue from the tire sealant may come outof the filler hose after use. This could causestains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-tion compressor.

X Pull away immediately.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure with thetire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In cases such as the one mentioned above,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver'sside B-pillar or the tire pressure table in thefuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch on thetire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: press pressurerelease buttonE on the filler hose.

X The tire pressure is shown on pressure gaugeF.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew thefiller hose from the valve of the sealed tire.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of thesealed tire.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-tion compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

Flat tire 335

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-shop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soonas possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery (vehicle)

12 V battery - important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge are requiredwhen working on the battery, e.g. removal andinstallation. You should therefore have all workinvolving the battery carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or theESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuversand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®,see (Y page 63) and (Y page 66).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.

Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms whencharging the battery as well as when jump-start-ing.Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up ofelectrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-ple:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across the car-pet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with

336 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-nanceBooklet or contact a qualified specialistworkshop for more information.

! Always havework on batteries carried out ata qualified specialist workshop. Should it, inexceptional circumstances, be absolutelynecessary to disconnect the 12-volt batteryyourself, observe the following:Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.Rswitch off the ignition.Ralways disconnect the negative terminalclamp first, followed by the positive termi-nal clamp.

After the battery has been disconnected, thetransmission is locked in position P.After the work has been done, install the bat-tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-minal clamp firmly.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contactwith skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact a physicianif necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehicleoccupants from suffering acid burns should thebattery be damaged in the event of an accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maximumpossible service life, it must always be suffi-ciently charged.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use the vehicle.In this case, have the battery disconnected at aqualified specialist workshop. You can alsocharge the batterywith a charger recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-ist workshop for further information.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it standing idle for alengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked for a long period of time.Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicleand do not require any electrical consumers.

Battery (vehicle) 337

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

The vehicle will then use very little energy, thusconserving battery power.If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. ifyou reconnect the battery, you will have to:Rset the clock; see the Digital Operator's Man-ualOn vehicles with a multimedia system andnavigation system, the clock is set automati-cally.Rreset the function for folding the exterior mir-rors in/out automatically, by folding the mir-rors out once (Y page 108).

Charging the 12 V battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases

can escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maximumcharging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 338).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the same orderas when connecting the donor battery in thejump-starting procedure (Y page 338).

Keep away from fire and open flames. Do notlean over a battery. Never charge the battery if itis still installed in the vehicle, unless you use abattery charger which has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery chargerunit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits thecharging of the battery in its installed position.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor further information and availability. Read thebattery charger's operating instructions beforecharging the battery.If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do notlight up, it is highly likely that the dischargedbattery has frozen. In this case you may neitherjump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.The service life of a thawed-out battery may beshorter. The starting characteristics can beimpaired, particularly at low temperatures. Havethe thawed-out battery checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.

338 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty ofclean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Vehicleswith agasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, thecatalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.

If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the dis-charged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge thebattery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can beimpaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, theengine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaustsystem are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.

Jump-starting 339

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected fora few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:RThe jumper cables are not damaged.RBare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with othermetal parts while the jumpercables are connected to the battery.RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must beoff. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it(Y page 138).

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-startingdevice.X Slide cover: of positive terminal; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryB using thejumper cable, always begin with positive terminal; on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle using thejumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicleB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointA and negative terminal?, then from pos-itive clamp; and positive terminal=. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

X Close cover: of positive terminal; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

340 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicle weightof your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-tification plate (Y page 377).

! When Active Brake Assist, Distance PilotDISTRONIC or theHOLD function is activated,the vehicle brakes automatically in certainsituations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivatethese systems in the following or similar sit-uations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Make sure that the electric parking brake isreleased. If the electric parking brake is faulty,visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes, or the trailer tow hitch, if availa-ble. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.

! Observe the following points when towingwith a tow rope:RSecure the tow rope on the same side onboth vehicles.REnsure that the tow cable is not longer thanlegally permitted. Mark the tow cable in themiddle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm).This will make other road users aware thatthe vehicle is being towed.ROnly secure the tow cable to the towingeye.RObserve the brake lamps of the towingvehicle while driving. Alwaysmaintain a dis-tance so that the tow rope does not sag.RDo not use steel cables or chains to towyour vehicle. You could otherwise damagethe vehicle.

! Do not use the trailer tow hitch for recoveryor towing. Do not use the towing eye forrecovery. this could damage the vehicle. If indoubt, have the vehicle recovered using acrane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. Pull the towed vehicle as straight aspossible and not at an acute angle. Excessivetractive power could damage the vehicles.

When towing, it is preferable to use a rigid tow-ing bar as opposed to a tow rope. A rigid towingbar helps to keep the tractive power low.

! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,use the key instead of the Start/Stop button.Otherwise, the automatic transmission mayshift to position P when the driver's or front-passenger door are opened, which could leadto damage to the transmission.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Thiscould damage the vehicle.

! Vehicles with differential locks: make surethe differential locks are in automatic mode.

Towing and tow-starting 341

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

When towing, the differential locks must notbe switched on. The transmission may other-wise be damaged.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30miles (50km). The towing speed of 30mph(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

It is better to have the vehicle transported thanto have it towed away.If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,have it transported on a transporter or trailer.The automatic transmission must be in positionN when the vehicle is being towed.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lockRcannot release the electric parking brakeRcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition N

Disarm the automatic locking feature before thevehicle is towed (Y page 239). You could other-wise be locked out when pushing or towing thevehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

The brackets for the screw-in towing eye arelocated in the bumpers. They are at the front andrear behind covers:;.X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle toolkit (Y page 331).

X To open the cover at the front: press themark on cover: inwards in the direction ofthe arrow.

X To open the cover at the rear: insert a flat,blunt object into the cutout and levercover; out of the bumper.

X Take cover: or; off the opening.X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as itwill go and tighten it.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Position cover: or; in the bumper andpress the cover on until it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundThe automatic transmission automatically shiftsto positionPwhen you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the Smart-Key from the ignition lock.In order to ensure that the automatic transmis-sion stays in positionNwhen towing the vehicle,you must observe the following points:X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 114).

In order to signal a change of direction whentowing the vehicle with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combination switchas usual. In this case, only the indicator lampsfor the direction of travel flash. After resetting

342 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

the combination switch, the hazard warninglamp starts flashing again.

Transporting the vehicle

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with auto-matic transmission

! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, thefront and rear axlesmust be stationary and onthe same transportation vehicle. Positioningover the connection point of the transportvehicle is not permitted. The drive train mayotherwise be damaged.

All vehicles! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise, thevehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-poses.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0in the ignitionlock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Information on 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised, asdoing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicleswith 4MATICmay either be towed awaywith both axles on the ground or be loaded upand transported.If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle isdamaged, have the vehicle transported on atruck or trailer.In the event of damage to the electrical sys-tem: if the battery is defective, the automatictransmissionwill be locked in positionP. To shiftthe automatic transmission to position N, youmust provide power to the vehicle's electricalsystem in the same way as when jump-starting(Y page 338).Have the vehicle transported on a transporter ortrailer.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-age the automatic transmission.

You can find information on "Jump-starting"under (Y page 338).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

! For the fuse boxes in the engine compart-ment and under the rear bench seat, only usefuses with the suffix "S". Otherwise, compo-nents or systems could be damaged.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

Fuses 343

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of thesame rating, which you can recognize by thecolor and value. The fuse ratings are listed in thefuse allocation chart.The fuse allocation chart is located in the fusebox under the rear bench seat (Y page 345).If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified special-ist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

Before changing a fuseObserve the important safety notes(Y page 343)X Switch off the engine.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-functionor KEYLESS‑GOX Open the driver's door.The vehicle electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.The driver’s door can be closed again.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 159).

All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box on the front-passenger side of thedashboardRFuse box in the engine compartment on theright-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed inthe direction of travelRFuse box under the rear bench seat

Dashboard fuse box! Do not use a pointed object such as a screw-driver to open the cover in the dashboard. Youcould damage the dashboard or the cover.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thiswork performed at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter.

X Open the front-passenger door.X To open: pull cover: outwards in the direc-tion of the arrow and remove it.

X To close: clip in cover: on the front of thedashboard.

X Fold cover: inwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

344 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

X Open the hood (Y page 319).X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture fromthe fuse box.

X To open: open clamps;.X Fold up cover: in the direction of the arrowand remove it.

X To close: check whether the seal is seatedcorrectly in cover:.

X Insert cover: at the side of the fuse box intothe retainers.

X Fold down cover: and close clamps;.X Close the hood.

Fuse box under the rear bench seat

X Fold the left-hand rear bench seat forward(Y page 297).

X To open: reach into recesses; on each sideof fuse box cover:.

X Fold cover: up in the direction of the arrowand remove it from the fuse box.i The fuse allocation chart is located in arecess at the side of the fuse box.

X To close: place cover: on the fuse box.X Press cover: down until you feel the clampsengage.

X Fold back the left-hand rear bench seat(Y page 297).

Fuses 345

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-rectly can impair the operating safety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendations

Further information regarding wheels and tirescan be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"(Y page 371).You can ask for information regarding permittedwheel-tire combinations at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Tire pressure information can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flapRin the "Tire pressure" section

Operation

Information on drivingCheck the tire pressure when the vehicle isheavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noisesand unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-ing to one side. This may indicate that thewheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect thata tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible tocheck the wheels and tires for damage. Hiddentire damage could also be causing the unusualhandling characteristics. If you find no signs ofdamage, have the tires and wheels checked at aqualified specialist workshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure that thetires do not get deformed by the curb or otherobstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs,speed humps or similar elevations, try to do soslowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, thetires, particularly the sidewalls, may be dam-aged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

346 OperationWheelsandtires

Checkwheels and tires for damage at least oncea month. Check wheels and tires after drivingoff-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheelscan cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particularattention to damage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole width ofthe tire (Y page 347). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protect thevalve against dirt and moisture. Do not mountanything onto the valve other than the standardvalve cap or other valve caps approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use anyother valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressuremonitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par-ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres-sure as necessary (Y page 349).Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 372).The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.

Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows where the bar indicator(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tiretread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.They are visible once a tread depth of approx-imatelyá in (1.6mm) has been reached. If thisis the case, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same typeand make.Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.Observe here the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics)" section(Y page 332).ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto thewheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for thefirst 60 miles (100 km). They only reach theirfull performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reduces thetraction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear.

Operation 347

Wheelsandtires

Z

Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 372).

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in oneor more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-tion with an active tire pressure loss warningsystem or with an active tire pressure monitorand on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with aflat tire (Y page 332).Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 366).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), the elas-ticity of summer tires and therefore also thetraction and braking capability are reduced con-siderably. Change the tires on your vehicle toM+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold tem-peratures could cause cracks to form, therebydamaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this typeof damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.

Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7†), use wintertires or all-season tires. Both types of tire areidentified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking providethe best possible grip in wintry road conditions.Only these tires will allow driving safety systemssuch as ABS and ESP® to function optimally inwinter. These tires have been developed specif-ically for driving in snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread on allwheels to maintain safe handling characteris-tics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.Once the winter tires are mounted:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 352).X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 353).

X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-sure loss warning system (Y page 353).

Information about driving with an emergencyspare wheel (Y page 372).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.

348 Winter operationWheelsandtires

To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

! Youmust drive at raised vehicle level (height1) if snow chains have been installed. Thevehicle may otherwise be damaged.

! Vehicles with ADS (Adaptive DampingSystem): do not use the sport mode whendriving with snow chains mounted. The vehi-cle may otherwise be damaged.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains that havebeen specially approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality. For more information,please contact a qualified specialist workshop.Install the snow chains on all driven wheels formaximum tractive power and driving stability. Ifyou own snow chains for two drivenwheels only,install the snow chains to the wheels on the rearaxle. The vehicle then remains more stableunder braking.If you intend to mount snow chains, please bearthe following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel/tire combinations (Y page 371).ROnly use snow chains when driving on roadscompletely covered by snow. Remove thesnow chains as soon as possible when youcome to a road that is not snow-covered.RLocal regulationsmay restrict the use of snowchains. Observe the appropriate regulations ifyou wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains areinstalled (Y page 193).

You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pullingaway with snow chains installed (Y page 67).You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in acontrolled manner, achieving an increased driv-ing force (cutting action).Information about driving with an emergencyspare wheel (Y page 372).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The data on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard and tire pressure table shown here areexamples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-cle-specific and may deviate from the datashown here. The tire pressure specificationsthat are valid for your vehicle can be found onthe Tire and Loading Information placard andtire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Operation with emergency spare wheel:Information on operation with the emergencyspare wheel can be found under "Emergencyspare wheel" (Y page 372).Operation with a trailer: the applicable valuefor the rear axle is the maximum tire pressurevalue stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap.

Tire pressure 349

Wheelsandtires

Z

Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard is onthe B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 356).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires. The recommended tire pressures are validfor the maximum permissible load and up to themaximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuelfiller flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tirespermitted at the factory for this vehicle; seeillustration (example).

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol-lowing tire pressure information is only valid forthat tire size; see illustration (example).

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fullyladen" are defined in the table for different num-bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. Theactual number of seats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.The rim diameter is part of the tire size and canbe found on the tire sidewall (Y page 361).If the tire pressures have been set to the lowervalues for lighter loads and/or lower roadspeeds, the pressures should be reset to thehigher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speedsThe tire pressures for increased loads and/orhigher road speeds, shown in the tire pressuretable, may have a negative effect on drivingcomfort.If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this canlead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud-den loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

350 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tirepressure. The outer appearance of a tire doesnot permit any reliable conclusion about the tirepressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressurecan be checked in the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is dependenton the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on theoutside temperature, the vehicle speed and thetire load. If the tire temperature changes by18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes byapproximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Takethis into account when checking the pressure ofwarm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is

too low for the current operating conditions. Ifyou check the tire pressure when the tires arewarm, the resulting value will be higher than ifthe tires were cold. This is normal. Do notreduce the tire pressure to the value specifiedfor cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwisebe too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 155)Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the emer-gency/collapsible sparewheel (depending onvehicle equipment)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.

Tire pressure 351

Wheelsandtires

Z

Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the recom-mended tire pressure for your vehicle whenadjusting the tire pressure (Y page 349).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 349).Information on air pressure for the tires on yourvehicle can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flapRin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pressure,proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to bechecked.

X Press the tire pressure gage securely onto thevalve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it to therecommended value on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure table(Y page 349).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tirepressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. Todo so, press down the metal pin in the valve,using the tip of a pen for example. Then checkthe tire pressure again using the tire pressurechecker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressureloss warning system monitors the set tire pres-sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.This enables the system to detect significantpressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation ofa wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,a corresponding warningmessage will appear inthe multifunction display.You can recognize the tire pressure losswarningby the Run Flat Indicator Active Press'OK' to Restart message which appears inthe Service menu of the multifunction display.Information on the message display can befound in the "Restarting the tire pressure losswarning system" section (Y page 353).

Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does not warnyou of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 349).The tire pressure loss warning does not replacethe need to regularly check the tire pressure. Aneven loss of pressure on several tires at the

352 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

same time cannot be detected by the tire pres-sure loss warning system.The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire ispenetrated by a foreign object. In the event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to ahalt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steeringmovements.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (corner-ing at high speeds or driving with high rates ofacceleration).Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi-cle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-ing systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning system ifyou have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, make sure that the tirepressures are set properly on all four tires forthe respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressure can be foundon the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressuretable is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tirepressure loss warning system can only givereliable warnings if you have set the correcttire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure isset, these incorrect values will be monitored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 349).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 138).

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Service menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator Active Press'OK' to Restart message appears in themultifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the9 or: button to select Yes.X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator Restarted mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.After a teach-in period, the tire pressure losswarning system will monitor the set tire pres-sures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX When the Tire Pressure Now OK?messageappears, press the9 or: button toselect Cancel.

X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tirepressures in all four tires. The tire pressuremon-itor warns you if the pressure drops in one ormore of the tires. The tire pressure monitor onlyfunctions if the corresponding sensors areinstalled in all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed in themultifunction display. After a few minutes ofdriving, the current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the Serv. menu of the multifunctiondisplay, see illustration (example).

For information on the message display, refer tothe "Checking the tire pressure electronically"section (Y page 355).

Tire pressure 353

Wheelsandtires

Z

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressure rec-ommended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressurelabel on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than thesize indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard or the tire pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire pressure forthose tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Underinflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling and stop-ping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-er's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.

When themalfunction indicator is illuminated,the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the mounting of incompatiblereplacement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-tioning properly. Always check the TPMSmal-function telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to function prop-erly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 349). Note that the correct tire pressurefor the current operating situation must first betaught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there isa substantial loss of pressure, the warningthreshold for the warning message is aligned tothe reference values taught-in. Restart the tirepressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure ofthe cold tires (Y page 355). The current pres-sures are saved as new reference values. As aresult, a warning message will appear if the tirepressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn you ofan incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe thenotes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 349).The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire ispenetrated by a foreign object. In the event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to ahalt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steeringmovements.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warninglamp in the instrument cluster for indicatingpressure loss or a malfunction. Whether thewarning lamp flashes or lights up indicateswhether a tire pressure is too low or the tirepressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tirepressure on one or more tires is significantlytoo low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal-functioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

354 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

In addition to the warning lamp, a messageappears in the multifunction display. Observethe information on display messages(Y page 268).It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunctionof the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. Amalfunction will be indicated by the tire pres-sure warning lamp flashing for approximatelyone minute and then remaining lit. When themalfunction has been rectified, the tire pressurewarning lamp goes out after a few minutes ofdriving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. Thetire pressures shown by the on-board computerrefer to those measured at sea level. At highaltitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by apressure gauge are higher than those shown bythe on-board computer. In this case, do notreduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressure monitor canbe affected by interference from radio transmit-ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-wayradios) thatmay be being operated in or near thevehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 138).

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire is shownin the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for longer than20 minutes, the Tire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a few minutesmessage appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-itor automatically detects new wheels or newsensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tirepressure value to the individual wheels is notpossible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activedisplay message is shown instead of the tirepressure display. The tire pressures are alreadybeing monitored.If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, thesystem may continue to show the tire pressure

of the wheel that has been removed for a fewminutes. If this occurs, note that the value dis-played for the position where the spare wheel ismounted is not the same as the current tirepressure of the emergency spare wheel.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning message isshown in the multifunction display. The yellowtire pressure warning lamp then lights up.RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressuremessage appears in themultifunction display,the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.The tire pressure must be corrected when theopportunity arises.RIf the Check Tires message appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure in atleast one tire has dropped significantly. Thetires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire Malfunctionmessageappears in the multifunction display, the tirepressure in at least one tire has dropped sud-denly. The tires must be checked.

Be sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes in the display messages in the "Tires" sec-tion (Y page 268).If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,the tire pressures may be displayed for thewrong positions for a short time. This is rectifiedafter a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-sures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted and thewarning lamps go out. Themonitor uses the cur-rently set tire pressures as the reference valuesfor monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressuremonitor will automatically detect the new refer-ence values after you have changed the tirepressure. However, you can also define refer-ence valuesmanually as described here. The tirepressure monitor then monitors the new tirepressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-ded for the corresponding driving situation onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's side B-pillar (Y page 349).

Tire pressure 355

Wheelsandtires

Z

You can find more tire pressure values forvarious operating conditions in the tire pres-sure table inside the fuel filler flap(Y page 349).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct onall four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the currenttire pressure for the individual tires or theTire pressure will be displayedafter driving a few minutes message.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐erence Valuesmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressures arewithin the specified range. The new tire pres-sures are then accepted as reference valuesand monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tire pres-sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433AFCC ID: MRXGG4FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433AIC: 2546A-GG4IC: 2546A-MC34MA4

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show themaximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is

on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tireand Loading Information placard shows themaximum permissible number of occu-pants and themaximumpermissible vehicleload. It also contains details of the tire sizesand corresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-tification plate informs you of the grossvehicle weight rating. It is made up of thevehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, thefuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-mation about the maximum gross axleweight rating on the front and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle). Never exceedthe maximum load or the maximum grossaxle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

356 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combinedweight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, loadand luggage must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specificand may differ from that in the illustration.You can find the valid maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle onthe Tire and Loading Information placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown.The number of seats in your vehicle can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-suant to the "National Traffic and Motor VehicleSafety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combinedweight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’sTire and Loading Information placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

Loading the vehicle 357

Wheelsandtires

Z

able cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-

cle. That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacity cal-culated in step 4.

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varyingseating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure you are using the actual loadlimit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 356).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Additional information when towing a trailer (Y page 222).Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Number of people inthe vehicle (driver andoccupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-pants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)Occupant 2: 180 lbs(82 kg)Occupant 3: 160 lbs(73 kg)Occupant 4: 140 lbs(63 kg)Occupant 5: 120 lbs(54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs(91 kg)Occupant 2: 190 lbs(86 kg)Occupant 3: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

358 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Permissible load (maxi-mum gross vehicleweight rating from theTire and Loading Infor-mation placard minusthe gross weight of alloccupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargo care-fully, you should still make sure that the grossvehicle weight rating and the gross axle weightrating are not exceeded. Details can be found onthe vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 356).Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-mum permissible weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed themaximum permissible values (gross vehicleweight and maximum gross axle weight rating),have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, thetrailer load/noseweight is included in the loadalong with occupants and luggage. The trailerload/noseweight is usually approximately 8% ofthe gross weight of the trailer and its cargo.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.government specifications. Their purpose is toprovide drivers with uniform reliable informationon tire performance data. Tire manufacturershave to grade tires using three performance fac-tors:: tread wear grade,; traction grade and= temperature grade. These regulations do notapply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold inNorth America are provided with the corre-sponding quality grading markings on the side-wall of the tire.Quality grades can be found, where applicable,on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width.Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: A

All about wheels and tires 359

Wheelsandtires

Z

All passenger car tiresmust conform to the stat-utory safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified U.S.government course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half times as wellon the government course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires depends uponthe actual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practicesand differences in road characteristics and cli-mate.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage tothe drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent thetire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-ured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfaces.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum treaddepth ofã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.Observe the legally required minimum tire treaddepth (Y page 347). Winter tires can reduce thebraking distance on snow-covered surfaces incomparison with summer tires. The braking dis-tance is still much further than on surfaces that

are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-priate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)(Y page 348).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law.

360 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards(Y page 364)

; Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi-cation Number (Y page 363)

= Maximum load rating (Y page 363)? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 352)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 364)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity

and speed rating (Y page 361)D Load index (Y page 363)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation) andthe manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe the

tire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed ratingGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wall maynot contain any letters or may contain one letterthat precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-ufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: these arelight truck tires according to U.S. manufacturingstandards.If "T" precedes the size description: compactemergency wheels with high tire pressure thatare only designed for temporary use in an emer-gency.Tire width:tire width: shows the nominal tirewidth in millimeters.Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is the sizeratio between the tire height and tire width andis shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula-ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height.Tire code:tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size

All about wheels and tires 361

Wheelsandtires

Z

description, depending on the manufacturer(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diameterof the bead seat, not the diameter of the rimflange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexA is anumerical code that specifies the maximumload-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 356).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.For further information on the maximum tireload in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 363).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 363).Speed rating:speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, always observethe speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt yourdriving style to the traffic conditions.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up of load-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifications,ask the tire manufacturer in order to find outthe maximum speed.If a service specification is available, the max-imum speed is limited according to the speedrating in the service specification. Example:245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" isthe service specification. The letter "Y" rep-resents the speed rating. The maximumspeed of the tire is limited to 186 mph(300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR",and the service specifica-tion must be given in parentheses. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-cates that the maximum speed of the tire isover 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-ufacturer about the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to theM+Smarking, winter tires alsohave thei snowflake symbol on the tirewall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association ofCanada (RAC) regarding the tire traction onsnow. They have been especially developedfor driving on snow.

2 Or M+Si for winter tires.

362 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-cle from exceeding the following speeds:RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG GLS 63):130 mph (210 km/h)RMercedes-AMGGLS63: 155mph (250 km/h)RMercedes-AMG GLS 63 with increased topspeed: 174 mph (280 km/h)

The speed rating of tires mounted at the factorymay be higher than themaximum speed that theelectronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 371).Further information about reading tire data canbe obtained from any qualified specialist work-shop.

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, loadindex:may be imprinted after the letters thatidentify speed indexB on the sidewall of thetire (Y page 361).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standard load(SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that dependson themaximum load that the tire can carry ata certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum permis-sible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 356).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-ufacturer or retreadermust imprint a TIN in or onthe sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retreadersto inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for thepurchaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-tion code;, tire size=, tire type code? andmanufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol:marks that the tire complies with the

All about wheels and tires 363

Wheelsandtires

Z

requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-portation.Manufacturer identification code: manufac-turer identification code; provides details onthe tire manufacturer. New tires have a codewith two symbols. Retreaded tires have a codewith four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 371).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be used bythe manufacturer as a code to describe specificcharacteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureAprovides information about the age of a tire. Thefirst and second positions represent the week ofmanufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-endar week. Positions three and four representthe year of manufacture. For example, a tire thatis marked "3214" wasmanufactured in week 32in 2014.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cordand the number of layers in sidewall: andunder tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the number oflayers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire treadand sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of theU S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehicleis designedmultiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality of tireswith regards to tread quality, tire traction andtemperature characteristics. The quality grad-ing assessment is made by the manufacturerfollowing specifications from the U.S. govern-ment. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall ofthe tire.

Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure applies to thetires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-mum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installed onthe vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tire ismounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. The grossaxle weight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

364 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identification.It specifies the speed range for which the tire isapproved.

GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)The GTW is the weight of a trailer including theweight of the load, luggage, accessories etc. onthe trailer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weight ofthe vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel,accessories installed, occupants, luggage andthe drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The grossvehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-cle identification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (theweight of thevehicle including all accessories, occupants,fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable). The gross vehicle weight rating isspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure isbar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacitymore precisely.

Curb weightTheweight of a vehicle with standard equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-

tem and optional equipment if these are instal-led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-gers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum tire load is the maximum permis-sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire isapproved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculated bydividing the maximum axle load of one axle bytwo.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tire widthin percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying an out-ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds persquare inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.The tire pressure should only be corrected whenthe tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contact withthe road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sits securelyon thewheel. There are several steel wires in thebead to prevent the tire from coming loose fromthe wheel rim.

All about wheels and tires 365

Wheelsandtires

Z

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-formance battery, are not included in the curbweight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be used bya tire manufacturer to identify tires, for examplefor a product recall, and thus identify the pur-chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-er's identity code, tire size, tire type code andthe manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is a codethat contains the maximum load bearing capa-city of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between the tiresand the road surface.

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)The TWR specifies the maximum permissibleweight that the ball coupling of the trailer towhitch can support.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is levelwith the bars, the wear limit ofá in (1.6 mm)has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle at theirdesignated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 331) contains information and notes onhow to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flattire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" (Y page 332).Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: inthe event of a flat tire, mount the emergencyspare wheel according to the description under"Mounting a wheel" (Y page 367).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are locatedin the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be used nearthe valve. This could damage the electroniccomponents.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 367).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tires inthe center.On vehicles that have the same size front andrear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer'swarranty book in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should berotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may

366 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

be required earlier. Do not change the directionof wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and thebrake disc thoroughly every time awheel is rota-ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary,restart the tire pressure loss warning system orthe tire pressure monitor (Y page 353).

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotation haveadditional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-planing. These advantages can only be gained ifthe tires are installed corresponding to thedirection of rotation.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates itscorrect direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStore wheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tiresfrom oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Vehicle with emergency spare wheel:whenmounting the emergency sparewheel inthe event of a flat tire, follow the additionalnotes on vehicle preparation under "Flat tire"(Y page 331).

X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-aheadposition.

X Vehicles with automatic transmission:shift the automatic transmission to positionP.

X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:make sure that the normal vehicle level isselected (Y page 188).

X Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineeringpackage: make sure that the normal level isselected (Y page 182).

X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driv-er's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 138).

X If included in the vehicle equipment, removethe tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.

X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

i Apart from certain country-specific varia-tions, vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For information on whichtools are required to perform a wheel changeon your vehicle, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Necessary tire-changing tools can include, forexample:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrench

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, itcan be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 331).The folding wheel chock is an additional safetymeasure to prevent the vehicle from rollingaway, for example when changing a wheel.X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into theopenings in base plate=.

Changing a wheel 367

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Place chocks or other suitable items underthe front and rear of the wheel that is diago-nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with"Minispare" emergency spare wheel: onlyuse the "Minispare" emergency spare wheelon the rear axle. If you mount the"Minispare" emergency spare wheel on thefront axle, this could result in damage to thebrake system.If a tire on the front axle is defective, an intactwheel from the rear axle must first bereplaced with the "Minispare" emergencyspare wheel. The damaged wheel on the frontaxle can then be replaced by the undamagedwheel from the rear axle.Make sure to note the placard on the"Minispare" emergency spare wheel.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jackingup the vehicle at the jacking points. Other-wise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the followingwhen raising the vehi-cle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-cific jack that has been tested and approved

by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold thevehicle for a short time while a wheel is beingchanged. It must not be used for performingmaintenance work under the vehicle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-hill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-ing away by applying the parking brake andinserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage theparking brake while the vehicle is raised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,flat, load-bearing underlaymust be used. On aslippery surface, a non-slip underlay must beused, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objectsas a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jackwill notbe able to achieve its load-bearing capacitydue to the restricted height.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground does notexceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RDo not place your hands or feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.RNever open or close a door or the tailgatewhen the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present in thevehicle when the vehicle is raised.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts on thewheel you wish to change by about one fullturn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

368 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel housings and just in front of the rearwheel housings (arrows).X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicletool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of thejack so that the letters AUF are visible.

X Position jack= at jacking point;.The alignment bolt on the jack must be inser-ted into the intended opening on the jackingpoint.

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn ratchet wrench? until jack= sitscompletely on jacking point; and the baseof the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn ratchet wrench? until the tire is raiseda maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing a wheel! Donot placewheel bolts in sand or on a dirtysurface. The bolt andwheel hub threads couldotherwise be damaged when you screw themin.

When mounting/removing wheels, and for aslong as the wheels are removed, avoid applyingany external force on the brake disks. This couldimpair the level of comfort when braking.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

Changing a wheel 369

Wheelsandtires

Z

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section(Y page 366).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respectivewheel.

! Always use wheel bolts; to mount the"Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Usingother wheel bolts to mount the "Minispare"emergency spare wheel could damage thebrake system.

: Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by thefactory and for the collapsible spare wheel(Mercedes-AMG GLE 63)

; Wheel bolts for the collapsible spare wheel

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-faces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-ment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsi-ble sparewheel: inflate the collapsible sparewheel (Y page 374).Only then lower the vehicle.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsi-ble sparewheel: before lowering the vehicle,inflate the collapsible spare wheel with thetire inflation compressor. The wheel rim couldotherwise be damaged.

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagonnut of the jack so that the letters AB are visi-ble.

X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle isonce again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

370 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswisepattern in the sequence indicated (: toA).The tightening torque must be110 lb-ft(150 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the tire-changetool kit in the stowage well under the cargocompartment floor again.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly mountedwheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 349).

When you are driving with the collapsible sparewheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warningsystemor the tire pressuremonitor cannot func-tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure losswarning system or tire pressure monitor whenthe defective wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-tem: all installed wheels must be equipped withfunctioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

You can ask for information regarding permittedwheel/tire combinations at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use tires and wheelswhich have been approved byMercedes-Benzspecifically for your vehicle.

These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABS orESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires mayonly be used on wheels that have been spe-cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessories testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certaincharacteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noiseemissions or fuel consumption, may other-wise be adversely affected. In addition, whendriving with a load, tire dimension variationscould cause the tires to come into contactwith the bodywork and axle components. Thiscould result in damage to the tires or the vehi-cle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from the use of tires, wheels oraccessories other than those tested andapproved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-ous damage cannot always be detected onretreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benzcannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreadedtires are mounted. Do not mount used tires ifyou have no information about their previoususage.

The recommended pressures for various oper-ating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flapObserve the notes on recommended tire pres-sures under various operating conditions(Y page 349).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the maintenancerecommendations of the tire manufacturer inthe vehicle document wallet.

Wheel and tire combinations 371

Wheelsandtires

Z

Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equipthe vehicle:Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (leftand right)Rwith the same type of tires at a given time(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtendedtires)

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

Emergency spare wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire type ofthe spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly anddrive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheel oremergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with"Minispare" emergency spare wheel: onlyuse the "Minispare" emergency spare wheelon the rear axle. If you mount the"Minispare" emergency spare wheel on thefront axle, this could result in damage to thebrake system.

If a tire on the front axle is defective, an intactwheel from the rear axle must first bereplaced with the "Minispare" emergencyspare wheel. The damaged wheel on the frontaxle can then be replaced by the undamagedwheel from the rear axle.Make sure to note the placard on the"Minispare" emergency spare wheel.

When using an emergency spare wheel or sparewheel of a different size, you must not exceedthe maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).Snow chains must not be mounted on emer-gency spare wheels.

General notesYou can ask for information regarding permittedemergency spare wheels at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Mounting the emergency spare wheel is descri-bed under "Mounting a wheel" (Y page 367).You should regularly check the pressure of theemergency spare wheel, particularly prior tolong trips, and correct the pressure as neces-sary (Y page 349). The value on the wheel isvalid.An emergency spare wheel may also be moun-ted against the direction of rotation. Observethe time restriction on use as well as the speedlimitation specified on the emergency sparewheel.Replace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to theemergency spare wheel.When you are driving with the collapsible sparewheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warningsystemor the tire pressuremonitor cannot func-tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure losswarning system or tire pressure monitor whenthe defective wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: aftermounting an emergency spare wheel, the sys-tem may still display the tire pressure of theremoved wheel for a fewminutes. The value dis-played for the mounted emergency spare wheelis not the same as the current tire pressure ofthe emergency spare wheel.

372 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

Removing/stowing the emergencyspare wheel

Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergencyspare wheel under the cargo compart-ment floorAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 367).Example image: vehicle without a lockablecargo compartment floor.

Removing the emergency spare wheelX Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards(Y page 301).

X Vehicles with a lockable cargo compart-ment floor: remove the stowage tray.

X Release the Velcro fastener (Y page 331).X Take out the jack.X Turn emergency spare wheel retainer:counter-clockwise and remove it.

X Remove stowage well;.X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel=.

Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergencyspare wheel in the emergency sparewheel bagAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 367).On vehicles with a Bang & Olufsen sound sys-tem, the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel ispacked in an emergency spare wheel bag. Theemergency spare wheel bag is secured to thecargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment.

Removing the emergency spare wheelX Detach fastening straps;.X Unhook retaining spring hooks: and= offastening straps; from the cargo tie-downrings.

X Remove the emergency spare wheel bag withthe "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.

X Open the emergency spare wheel bag andremove the "Minispare" emergency sparewheel.

Stowing the emergency spare wheelX Place the "Minispare" emergency sparewheelinto the emergency spare wheel bag andclose the emergency spare wheel bag.

X Place the emergency spare wheel bag withthe "Minispare" emergency spare wheel intothe cargo compartment with the carryingstrap at the back.

X Hook retaining spring hooks: and= offastening straps; into the cargo tie-downrings.

X Tighten fastening straps;.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collaps-ible spare wheel under the cargo com-partment floor! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in thevehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisturemay get into the vehicle.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 367).The collapsible spare wheel can be found in thestowage well under the cargo compartmentfloor.

Emergency spare wheel 373

Wheelsandtires

Z

Removing the emergency spare wheelX Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards(Y page 301).

X Unscrew retaining screw; counter-clock-wise.

X Remove collapsible spare wheel: from thespare wheel well.

Inflating the collapsible spare wheel(Y page 374).Take the following steps to stow a used collaps-ible sparewheel. Otherwise, it will not fit into thespare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you have this work performed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Stowing the emergency spare wheelX Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.X If possible, unscrew the valve insert from thevalve and release the air.i Fully deflating the tires can take a fewminutes.

X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.X Screw the valve cap back on.X Lay collapsible spare wheel: in the emer-gency spare wheel well.

X Screw in retaining screw; clockwise in thecollapsible emergency wheel to the stop.

X Swing the cargo compartment floor down(Y page 301).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collaps-ible spare wheel in the emergencyspare wheel bagAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 367).

On Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a Bang & Oluf-sen sound system, the collapsible sparewheel ispacked in an emergency spare wheel bag. Theemergency spare wheel bag is secured to thecargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment.

Removing the emergency spare wheelX Unhook retaining spring hooks: of fasten-ing strap; from the cargo tie-down rings.

X Remove the emergency spare wheel bag withthe emergency collapsible spare wheel.

X Open the bag and remove the emergency col-lapsible spare wheel.

Inflating the collapsible spare wheel(Y page 374).Stowing the emergency spare wheelX Place the collapsible spare wheel into theemergency spare wheel bag and close theemergency spare wheel bag.

X Place the emergency spare wheel bag withthe collapsible spare wheel into the cargocompartment with the carrying strap at theback.

X Hook retaining spring hooks: of fasteningstrap; into the cargo tie-down rings.

X Tighten fastening strap;.

Inflating the collapsible spare wheel(Mercedes-AMG GLS 63)! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using thetire inflation compressor before lowering thevehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise bedamaged.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressorfor longer than eightminutes at a timewithouta break. It may otherwise overheat.

374 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

The tire inflation compressor can be operatedagain once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety instruc-tions on the tire inflation compressor label andon the tire sealant bottle.X Mount the collapsible spare wheel as descri-bed (Y page 367).The collapsible spare wheel must bemountedbefore it is inflated.

X Remove the tire inflation compressor fromthe stowage space under the trunk floor(Y page 331).

X Pull connector? and hoseB out of thehousing.

X Remove the cap from the valve on the col-lapsible spare wheel.

X Screw union nut; of hoseB onto the valve.X Make sure on/off switchA of the tire infla-tion compressor is set to 0.

X Insert connector? into a socket in your vehi-cle.Cigarette lighter socket: (Y page 306)12 V sockets: (Y page 306)Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter(Y page 306). Observe the notes on sockets(Y page 306).

X Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 138).

X Press on and off switchA on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switched on.The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shownon pressure gauge=.

X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure.The specified tire pressure is printed on theyellow label of the emergency spare wheel.

X When the specified tire pressure has beenreached, press on and off switchA on thetire inflation compressor to 0.The tire inflation compressor is switched off.

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock.

X If the tire pressure is higher than the specifiedpressure, press pressure release valve but-ton: until the correct tire pressure has beenreached.

X Unscrew union nut; on hoseB from thevalve.

X Screw the cap onto the valve of the collapsi-ble spare wheel again.

X Stow connector? and hoseB in the lowersection of the tire inflation compressor.

X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehi-cle.

Emergency spare wheel 375

Wheelsandtires

Z

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to avehicle with standard equipment. Consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thedata for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Installing two-way radios and mobilephones (RF transmitters)

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from modifiedor incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters caninterfere with the vehicle electronics. This cancompromise the operational safety of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.You should have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from incor-rectly operated RF transmitters can interferewith the vehicle electronics, for example:Rif the RF transmitter is not connected withan exterior antennaRthe exterior antenna has been installedincorrectly or is not a low-reflection type

This can compromise the operational safetyof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Have the low-reflection exterior antennamounted at a qualified specialist workshop.When operating RF transmitters in the vehi-cle, always connect them with the low-reflec-tion exterior antenna.

! The operating permit may be invalidated ifthe instructions for installation and use of RFtransmitters are not observed.

In particular, the following conditionsmust becomplied with:Ronly approved wavebands may be used.Robserve the maximum permissible outputin these wavebands.Ronly approved antenna positions may beused.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and the healthof others. Using an exterior antenna takes intoaccount current scientific discussions relatingto the possible health hazards that may resultfrom electromagnetic fields.The following antenna positions may be used ifRF transmitters have been properly installed:

Approved antenna positions: Rear roof area; Rear fender

i On the rear fenders, it is recommended toposition the antenna on the side of the vehicleclosest to the center of the road.

Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609when retrofitting RF transmitters (RoadVehicles- EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarketradio frequency transmitting equipment).Observe the legal requirements for accessoryparts.If your vehicle has installations for two-way radioequipment, use the power supply or antennaconnections intended for use with the basic wir-ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup-plement when installing.Deviations with respect to frequency bands,maximum transmission outputs or antennapositions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.

376 Vehicle electronicsTechnicaldata

Themaximum transmission output (PEAK) at thebase of the antenna must not exceed the fol-lowing values:

Frequency band Maximumtransmission

output

Short wave3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband74 - 88 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio system/Tetra380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Mobile communications(2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle withoutrestrictions:RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-sion output of up to 100 mWRRF transmitters with transmitter frequenciesin the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-mum transmission output of up to 2 W(trunked radio/Tetra)RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G)There are no restrictions when positioning theantenna on the outside of the vehicle for thefollowing wavebands:RTrunked radio system/TetraR70 cm wavebandR2G/3G/4G

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); Paint code= VIN

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); Paint code= VIN

i The data shown on the vehicle identificationplate is used only as an example. This data isdifferent for every vehicle and can deviate

Identification plates 377

Technicaldata

Z

from the data shown here. You can find thedata applicable to your vehicle on the vehicleidentification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Open the front right-hand door.X Open cover: in the direction of the arrowand remove it.You will see the VIN.

The VIN can also be found in the following loca-tions:Ron the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 378)Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 377)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate, includ-ing the certification of both federal and Cali-fornian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Service products and filling capaci-ties

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRExhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.DEFRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must match.You should therefore only use products thathave been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.You can identify service products approved byMercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions onthe container:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40

378 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capa-city

All models 26.4 US gal(100.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles Approx.3.7 US gal(14.0 l)

All other models Approx.3.2 US gal(12.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premium gradegasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operatingthe vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-age to the fuel system, engine and exhaustsystem.

! Do not use the following:RE15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol)RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.

Service products and filling capacities 379

Technicaldata

Z

If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailableand you have to refuel with unleaded gasolineof a lower grade, observe the following pre-cautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regularunleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon aspossible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

You will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find the labelon the pump, ask the staff for assistance.

i For further information, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

As a temporary measure, if the recommendedfuel is not available, you may also use regularunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoiddriving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI.Information on refueling (Y page 154).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Do notmix fuel additives with fuel. This does notinclude additives for the removal and preven-tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only bemixed with additives recommended byMercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructionsfor use on the product label.More informationabout recommended additives can beobtained from any authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-ded fuels that have additives.The fuel quality available in some countries maynot be sufficient. Residue could build up in thefuel injection system as a result. In such cases,and in consultation with an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixedwith the cleaning additive recommended byMercedes-Benz. You must observe the notesand mixing ratios specified on the container.

Diesel

Fuel gradeG WARNINGIf you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flashpoint is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.When the engine is running, exhaust systemcomponents could overheat without beingnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with gasoline. Nevermix gasolinewith diesel fuel.

! Only use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD),otherwise it may lead to increased wear anddamage to the fuel system, engine andexhaust system.

! Do not use the following:RgasolineRdiesel with a bio-diesel content greaterthan 5% (e.g. B20)Rbio-dieselRvegetable oilRparaffinRkeroseneRmarine dieselRheating oilDo not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and donot use any special additives. Otherwise,engine damage may occur.

! In countries outside USA and Canada, onlyuse sulfur-free diesel with a sulfur contentunder 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission con-trol system could be damaged.

You will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find the labelon the pump, ask the staff for assistance.Information on refueling (Y page 154).

Low outside temperaturesi Diesel fuel with improved cold flow proper-ties is available during the winter months.Further information about fuel properties canbe obtained from oil companies, e.g. at gasstations.

380 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

DEF

Important safety notesComply with the important safety notes for ser-vice products when handling DEF (Y page 378).DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gasaftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:Rnot poisonousRcolorless and odorlessRnot flammableWhen you open the DEF container, smallamounts of ammonia vapor may be released.Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and areparticularly irritating to the skin, to mucousmembranes and to the eyes. You may experi-ence a burning sensation in your eyes, nose andthroat. Coughing and watering of the eyes arepossible.Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tankonly in well-ventilated areas.

Low outside temperaturesDEF freezes at a temperature of approximately12 ‡ (-11 †). The vehicle is delivered from thefactory equipped with a DEF preheating system.Winter operation can thus be guaranteed evenat temperatures below 12 ‡ (-11 †).

Additives! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO22241. Do not use additives with DEF and donot dilute DEF with water. This may destroythe BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment sys-tem.

Purity! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other serviceproducts, cleaning agents or dust) lead to:Rincreased emission valuesRdamage to the catalytic converterRengine damageRmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment system

Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly impor-tant with respect to avoidingmalfunctions in theBlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system.If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. duringrepair work, it must not be returned to the tank.

The purity of the fluid can no longer be guaran-teed.

Filling capacities

Model Total capacity

GLS 350 d 4MATIC 10.2 US gal(38.7 l)

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec-ification other than is necessary to fulfill theprescribed service intervals. Do not changethe engine oil or oil filter in order to achievelonger replacement intervals than those pre-scribed. You could otherwise cause enginedamage or damage to the exhaust gas after-treatment.Follow the instructions in the service intervaldisplay regarding the oil change. Otherwise,you may damage the engine and the exhaustgas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the importantsafety notes on service products (Y page 378).The engine oils are matched to the performanceofMercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.You should therefore only use engine oils and oilfilters that are approved for vehicles with main-tenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Service products and filling capacities 381

Technicaldata

Z

Gasoline engines MB-Freigabe orMB-Approval

All models 229.5

Diesel engines MB-Freigabe orMB-Approval

GLS 350 d 4MATIC 228.51, 229.31,229.51, 229.52

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: only use SAE 0W-40or SAE 5W-40 engine oils.

i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-ers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

GLS 350 d 4MATIC 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

GLS 550 4MATICMercedes‑AMGvehicles

9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

All other models 7.4 US qt (7.0 l)

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

Comply with the important safety notes for ser-vice products when handling brake fluid(Y page 378).The brake fluid change intervals can be found inthe Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid can beobtained at any qualified specialist workshop oron the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop in accordancewith the replacement intervals and thereplacement confirmed in the MaintenanceBooklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can be foundin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on theInternet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, evenin countries where high temperatures prevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

382 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Comply with the important safety notes for ser-vice products when handling coolant(Y page 378).The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible forthe following:RAnti-corrosion protectionRAntifreeze protectionRRaising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection down to-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolantduring operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection downto -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not bedissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordancewith MB Specifications for Service Products310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filledwith a coolant mixture that ensures adequateantifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.

i The coolant is checked with every mainte-nance interval at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

Approx. 11.9 US qt(11.3 l)

GLS 350 d 4MATIC Approx. 12.2 US qt(11.5 l)

GLS 550 4MATIC Approx. 12.0 US qt(11.4 l)

All other models Approx. 10.3 US qt(9.7 l)

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 378).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill thewasher fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill thewasher fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-mation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid allyear round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle is fil-led with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oilapproved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.The approved PAG oil may not be mixed withany other PAG oil that is not approved for

Service products and filling capacities 383

Technicaldata

Z

R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climatecontrol system may be damaged.

Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant orreplacing component parts, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli-cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639,must be adhered to.Always have work on the climate control systemcarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerantWarning symbol: advises you about:RPossible dangersRHaving service work carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop

Filling capacities

Refrigerant Capacity

Mercedes‑AMGvehiclesGLS 550 4MATIC

45.9 ± 0.4 oz(1300 ± 10 g)

All other models 37.0 ± 0.4 oz(1050 ± 10 g)

PAG oil Capacity

All models 3.9 ± 0.4 oz(110 ± 10 g)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicle data:Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:

- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Observe the information relating to level con-trol:RAIRMATIC package (Y page 188)ROffroad Engineering package (Y page 218)

Dimensions and weights

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model :Openingheight

;Max.

headroom

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

384 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

All other mod-els with:

:Openingheight

;Max.

headroom

AIRMATICpackage

83.9 in -86.9 in

(2132 mm -2207 mm)

76.1 in -79.1 in

(1934 mm -2009 mm)

ON&OFFROADpackage

83.9 in -88.1 in

(2132 mm -2237 mm)

76.1 in -80.3 in

(1934 mm -2039 mm)

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles

Vehicle length 203.2 in(5162 mm)

Vehicle width includingexterior mirrors

Vehiclewidthwithout exte-rior mirrors

Vehicle height 72.9 in1850 mm

Wheelbase 121.1 in3075 mm

Maximum ground clear-ance

Minimum ground clear-ance

7.8 in(198 mm)

Turning radius 39.7 ft(12.10 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lbs(100 kg)

All other models

Vehicle length 202.0 in(5130 mm)

Vehicle width includingexterior mirrors

84.3 in(2141 mm)

Maximum vehicle height(AIRMATIC package)

75.2 in(1910 mm)

All other models

Maximum vehicle height(ON&OFFROAD package)

76.4 in(1940 mm)

Minimum vehicle height 72.8 in(1850 mm)

Wheelbase 121.1 in(3075 mm)

Maximum ground clear-ance (AIRMATIC package)

10.9 in( 276 mm)

Maximum ground clear-ance (ON&OFFROAD pack-age)

12.0 in(306 mm)

Minimum ground clear-ance

7.9 in(201 mm)

Turning radius 40.7 ft(12.40 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb(100 kg)

Vehicle data for off-road driving

Fording depth! The depth of water must not exceed thevalue specified in the table. Note that thepossible fording depth is less in flowingwater.

: Fording depthOn vehicles with the AIRMATIC package or theOff-Road Engineering package, loads up to themaximum permissible load have no influence onfording capability.Missing values were not available at the time ofgoing to print.

Vehicle data for off-road driving 385

Technicaldata

Z

Fordingdepth

Vehicles without the Off-road Engineering package

Raised level 19.7 in(50 cm)

Vehicles with the Off-RoadEngineering package

Off-road level 1 19.7 in(50 cm)

Off-road level 2 19.7 in(50 cm)

Off-road level 3 23.6 in(60 cm)

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Formore information about off-road fording, see(Y page 167).

Approach/departure angle

All vehicles (except vehicleswith AMGbody-styling)

: ;

Vehicles without the Off-road Engineering package

Normal level 25° 20°

Raised level 30° 25°

Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-age

: ;

Normal level 25° 20°

Off-road level 1 28° 23°

Off-road level 2 30° 25°

Off-road level 3 33° 27°

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Normal level (in sport modewith AMG adaptive sportsuspension system activa-ted)

19° 19°

Raised level 22° 21°

Vehicles with AMG bodystyling

: ;

Vehicles without the Off-road Engineering package

Normal level 22° 20°

Raised level 27° 25°

Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-age

Normal level 22° 20°

Off-road level 1 25° 23°

Off-road level 2 27° 25°

Off-road level 3 29° 27°

For further information about approach/depar-ture angles, see (Y page 171).

Maximum gradient-climbing capabil-ityNote that the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-bility depends on the off-road conditions and theroad surface conditions.Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package:the maximum gradient climbing ability is 100 %when the LOW RANGE off-road gear is selected.Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD pack-age: the maximum gradient climbing ability is80 %.

386 Vehicle data for off-road drivingTechnicaldata

Accelerate carefully and make sure that thewheels do not spin when driving on steep ter-rain.

i If the load on the front axle is reduced whenpulling away on a steep uphill slope, the frontwheels have a tendency to spin. 4ETS recog-nizes this and brakes the wheels accordingly.The rear wheel torque is increased, making iteasier to drive off.

For further information about the maximum gra-dient climbing ability, see (Y page 171).

Trailer tow hitch

Mounting dimensions! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,changes to the cooling system and drive trainmay be necessary, depending on the vehicletype.If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,observe the anchorage points on the chassisframe.

: Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch; Rear axle center line

Trailer loads

Trailer loads, trailer drawbar nose-weights and axle loadsMissing values were not available at the time ofgoing to print.

GLS 450 4MATIC,

GLS 550 4MATIC and

GLS 350 d 4MATIC

Permissible trailer load,braked (at a minimum gra-dient-climbing capabilityof12%from a standstill)

7500 lbs(3402 kg)

Maximum drawbar nose-weight (the drawbar nose-weight is not included inthe trailer load)

600 lbs(272 kg)

Gross rear axle weight rat-ing when towing a trailer

3968 lbs(1800 kg)

Mercedes‑AMGGLS 63 4

MATIC

Permissible trailer load,braked (at a minimum gra-dient-climbing capabilityof12%from a standstill)

Maximum drawbar nose-weight (the drawbar nose-weight is not included inthe trailer load)

Gross rear axle weight rat-ing when towing a trailer

The actual noseweight may not be higher thanthe value which is given. The value can be foundon the trailer tow hitch or trailer identificationplates. The lowest weight applies.The maximum permissible trailer drawbar nose-weight is the maximum weight with which thetrailer drawbar can be loaded. Limit forMercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings.

Trailer tow hitch 387

Technicaldata

Z

Ball position of the ball coupling

When choosing a ball coupling, the dimensionsstated in the illustration must not be exceeded.

388 Trailer tow hitchTechnicaldata